TRANSISTORIZED INVERTER
FR-E500
FR-E500
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
HIGH PERFORMANCE
&
HIGH FUNCTION
TRANSISTORIZED INVERTER
FR-E520-0.1K to 7.5K(C)
FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K(C)
FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.75K
FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K
OUTLINE Chapter 1
INSTALLATION
Chapter 2
AND WIRING
OPERATION/
Chapter 3
CONTROL
PARAMETERS Chapter 4
IB(NA) 66813-H (0706) MDOC
Printed in Japan
Specifications subject to change without notice.
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
HEAD OFFICE:TOKYO BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100-8310
PROTECTIVE
Chapter 5
FUNCTIONS
MAINTENANCE/
Chapter 6
INSPECTION
SPECIFICATONS Chapter 7
Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Transistorized inverter.
This instruction manual gives handling information and precautions for use of this
equipment.
Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using the inverter, please
read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum.
Please forward this manual to the end user.
This section is specifically about safety matters
Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter until you have read
through this instruction manual and appended documents carefully and can use the
equipment correctly.
Do not use the inverter until you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety
information and instructions.
In this manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into "WARNING" and
"CAUTION".
WARNING
CAUTION
Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous
conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.
Assumes that incorrect handling may cause
hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight
injury, or may cause physical damage only.
Note that even the
CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence
according to conditions. Please follow the instructions of both levels because they are
important to personnel safety.
A-1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1. Electric Shock Prevention
WARNING
z While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover.
You may get an electric shock.
z Do not run the inverter with the front cover or wiring cover removed. Otherwise,
you may access the exposed high-voltage terminals or the charging part of the
circuitry and get an electric shock.
z If power is off, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic
inspection. You may access the charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock.
z Before starting wiring or inspection, check to make sure that the inverter power
indicator lamp is off, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been
switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the
like. The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time after power off and
it is dangerous.
z This inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (grounding) must conform to
the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes.
(NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
z Any person who is involved in the wiring or inspection of this equipment should
be fully competent to do the work.
z Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric
shock or be injured.
z Operate the switches and potentiometers with dry hands to prevent an electric
shock.
z Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or
pinching. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
z Do not change the cooling fan while power is on.
It is dangerous to change the cooling fan while power is on.
2. Fire Prevention
CAUTION
z Install the inverter on an incombustible wall without holes, etc. Installing the
inverter directly on or near a combustible surface could lead to a fire.
z If the inverter has become faulty, switch off the inverter power. A continuous flow
of large current could cause a fire.
z When a brake resistor is used, use an alarm signal to switch power off.
Otherwise, the brake resistor may excessively overheat due to damage of the
brake transistor and such, causing a fire.
z Do not connect the resistor directly to the DC terminals P(+) and N(-). This could
cause a fire.
A-2
3. Injury Prevention
CAUTION
z Apply only the voltage specified in the instruction manual to each terminal to
prevent damage etc.
z Ensure that the cables are connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise,
damage etc. may occur.
z Always make sure that polarity is correct to prevent damage etc.
z While power is on and for some time after power-off, do not touch the inverter or
brake resistor as they are hot and you may get burnt.
4. Additional Instructions
Also note the following points to prevent an accidental failure, injury, electric shock, etc.
(1) Transportation and installation
CAUTION
z When carrying products, use correct lifting gear to prevent injury.
z Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended.
z Ensure that installation position and material can withstand the weight of the
inverter. Install according to the information in the Instruction Manual.
z Do not operate if the inverter is damaged or has parts missing.
z Do not hold the inverter by the front cover or operation panel; it may fall off.
z Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the inverter.
z Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct.
z Prevent screws, wire fragments or other conductive bodies or oil or other
flammable substance from entering the inverter.
z Do not drop the inverter, or subject it to impact.
z Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions:
Environment
Ambient
temperature
-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
(-10°C to +40°C for totally enclosed structure feature)
Ambient humidity
90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Storage
temperature
-20°C to +65°C *
Ambience
Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust
and dirt)
Altitude, vibration
Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation. After
that derate by 3% for every extra 500m up to 2500m (91%).
5.9m/s 2 or less
*Temperatures applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
A-3
(2) Wiring
CAUTION
z Do not fit capacitive equipment such as power factor correction capacitor,
capacitor type filter or surge suppressor to the output of the inverter.
z The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect the
direction of rotation of the motor.
(3) Trial run
CAUTION
z Check all parameters, and ensure that the machine will not be damaged by a
sudden start-up.
(4) Operation
WARNING
z When you have chosen the retry function, stay away from the equipment as it will
restart suddenly after an alarm stop.
z Since the [STOP] key is valid only when functions are set (refer to page 130),
provide a circuit and switch separately to make an emergency stop (power off,
mechanical brake operation for emergency stop, etc).
z Make sure that the start signal is off before resetting the inverter alarm. A failure
to do so may restart the motor suddenly.
z The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. Connection of any
other electrical equipment to the inverter output may damage the equipment.
z Do not modify the equipment.
z Do not perform parts removal which is not instructed in this manual. Doing so
may lead to fault or damage of the inverter.
A-4
CAUTION
z The electronic thermal reray function does not guarantee protection of the motor
from overheating.
z Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/
stopping of the inverter.
z Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise
nearby electronic equipment may be affected.
z Take measures to suppress harmonics. Otherwise power supply harmonics from
the inverter may heat/damage the power capacitor and generator.
z When a 400V class motor is inverter-driven, please use an insulation-enhanced
motor or measures taken to suppress surge voltages. Surge voltages attributable
to the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the
insulation of the motor.
z When parameter clear or all clear is performed, each parameter returns to the
factory setting. Re-set the required parameters before starting operation.
z The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before changing its
setting, fully examine the performances of the motor and machine.
z In addition to the inverter's holding function, install a holding device to ensure
safety.
z Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period, always
perform inspection and test operation.
(5) Emergency stop
CAUTION
z Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the
machine and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails.
z When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault
(short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of
the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
z When any protective function is activated, take the corrective appropriate action,
then reset the inverter, and resume operation.
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
CAUTION
z Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the
inverter.
(7) Disposing of the inverter
CAUTION
z Treat as industrial waste.
(8) General instructions
Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual show the inverter
without a cover, or partially open. Never operate the inverter in this manner. Always
replace the cover and follow this instruction manual when operating the inverter.
A-5
CONTENTS
OUTLINE
1
1.1 Pre-Operation Information..................................................................................... 2
1.1.1 Precautions for operation .................................................................................. 2
1.2 Basic Configuration ............................................................................................... 4
1.2.1 Basic configuration ............................................................................................ 4
1.3 Structure ................................................................................................................. 5
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
Appearance and structure ................................................................................. 5
Removal and reinstallation of the front cover .................................................... 6
Removal and reinstallation of the wiring cover .................................................. 8
Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel ............................................ 9
Removal of the operation panel front cover..................................................... 10
Exploded view ................................................................................................. 11
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
13
2.1 Installation ............................................................................................................ 14
2.1.1 Instructions for installation ............................................................................... 14
2.2 Wiring .................................................................................................................... 16
2.2.1 Terminal connection diagram .......................................................................... 16
2.2.2 Wiring of the Main Circuit ................................................................................ 21
2.2.3 Wiring of the control circuit .............................................................................. 26
2.2.4 Connection to the PU connector...................................................................... 30
2.2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units ........................................................... 34
2.2.6 Design information........................................................................................... 38
2.3 Other Wiring.......................................................................................................... 39
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3.9
2.3.10
Power supply harmonics ................................................................................. 39
Harmonic suppression guideline in Japan....................................................... 40
EMC measures................................................................................................ 43
Leakage currents and countermeasures ......................................................... 47
Inverter-driven 400V class motor..................................................................... 48
Peripheral devices........................................................................................... 49
Power off and magnetic contactor (MC) .......................................................... 54
Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter................................................ 55
Instructions for UL, cUL ................................................................................... 58
Instructions for compliance with the European Directive................................. 60
CHAPTER 3
OPERATION/CONTROL
63
3.1 Pre-Operation Information................................................................................... 64
3.1.1 Types of operation modes ............................................................................... 64
3.1.2 Power on ......................................................................................................... 66
3.2 About the Operation Panel .................................................................................. 67
I
Contents
CHAPTER 1
3.2.1 Names and functions of the operation panel................................................... 67
3.2.2 Monitor display is changed by pressing the [MODE] key ................................ 68
3.2.3 Monitoring........................................................................................................ 68
3.2.4 Frequency setting ............................................................................................ 69
3.2.5 Parameter setting method ............................................................................... 69
3.2.6 Operation mode............................................................................................... 72
3.2.7 Help mode ....................................................................................................... 72
3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................. 74
3.3.1 Pre-operation checks....................................................................................... 74
3.3.2 PU operation mode (Operation using the operation panel) ............................. 75
3.3.3 External operation mode (Operation using the external frequency setting
potentiometer and external start signal) .......................................................... 77
3.3.4 Combined operation mode 1 (Operation using both external start signal and
operation panel)............................................................................................... 78
3.3.5 Combined operation mode 2 ........................................................................... 79
CHAPTER 4
PARAMETERS
81
4.1 Parameter List ...................................................................................................... 82
4.1.1 Parameter list .................................................................................................. 82
4.1.2 List of parameters classified by purpose of use .............................................. 89
4.1.3 Parameters recommended to be set by the user ............................................ 91
4.2 Parameter Function Details................................................................................. 92
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8
4.2.9
4.2.10
4.2.11
4.2.12
4.2.13
4.2.14
4.2.15
4.2.16
4.2.17
4.2.18
4.2.19
Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46)............................................................................. 92
Output frequency range (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)................................................... 93
Base frequency, base frequency voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47) ...................... 94
Multi-speed operation
(Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239).......................................... 95
Acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45) ..... 96
Electronic thermal relay function (Pr. 9, Pr. 48)............................................... 98
DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)................................................................ 99
Starting frequency (Pr. 13) ............................................................................ 100
Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) ...................................................................... 101
Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16) ........................................................................ 102
Stall prevention and current limit (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 156) ................. 103
Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29) ..................................................... 106
Regenerative brake duty (Pr. 30, Pr. 70)....................................................... 107
Frequency jump (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36) ................................................................. 108
Speed display (Pr. 37) ................................................................................... 109
Frequency at 5V (10V) input (Pr. 38)............................................................. 110
Frequency at 20mA input (Pr. 39) ................................................................. 110
Up-to-frequency sensitivity (Pr. 41) ............................................................... 111
Output frequency detection (Pr. 42, Pr. 43)................................................... 112
II
CHAPTER 5
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
199
5.1 Errors (Alarms) ................................................................................................... 200
5.1.1 Error (alarm) definitions ................................................................................. 200
III
Contents
4.2.20 Monitor display (Pr. 52, Pr. 54)...................................................................... 113
4.2.21 Monitoring reference (Pr. 55, Pr. 56) ............................................................. 115
4.2.22 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
(Pr. 57, Pr. 58) ............................................................................................... 116
4.2.23 Remote setting function selection (Pr. 59)..................................................... 118
4.2.24 Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode (Pr. 60 to Pr. 63)........................... 121
4.2.25 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69) ......................................................... 123
4.2.26 Applied motor (Pr. 71) ................................................................................... 125
4.2.27 PWM carrier frequency and long wiring mode (Pr. 72, Pr. 240) .................... 127
4.2.28 Voltage input (Pr. 73)..................................................................................... 129
4.2.29 Input filter time constant (Pr. 74) ................................................................... 129
4.2.30 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75) ........ 130
4.2.31 Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77)..................................................... 132
4.2.32 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78) .............................................. 133
4.2.33 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)................................................................. 133
4.2.34 General-purpose magnetic flux vector control selection (Pr. 80)................... 137
4.2.35 Offline auto tuning function (Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96) ......................... 138
4.2.36 Computer link operation (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 342) ................................... 144
4.2.37 PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134) ..................................................................... 157
4.2.38 Frequency setting command selection (Pr. 146) ........................................... 166
4.2.39 Output current detection function (Pr. 150, Pr. 151)...................................... 167
4.2.40 Zero current detection (Pr. 152, Pr. 153)....................................................... 168
4.2.41 User group selection (Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 176) ........................................ 169
4.2.42 Actual operation hour meter clear (Pr. 171) .................................................. 171
4.2.43 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183) .................................... 171
4.2.44 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192).................................. 173
4.2.45 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244) ...................................................... 174
4.2.46 Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247).......................................................... 175
4.2.47 Earth (ground) fault detection at start (Pr. 249)
(400V class does not have this function)....................................................... 176
4.2.48 Stop selection (Pr. 250) ................................................................................. 177
4.2.49 Output phase loss protection selection (Pr. 251)........................................... 178
4.2.50 Capacitor life alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504) (No function for the 400V class)........ 179
4.2.51 Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557)
(no function for the 400V class)..................................................................... 180
4.2.52 Meter (frequency meter) calibration (Pr. 900)................................................ 184
4.2.53 Biases and gains of the frequency setting voltage (current)
and built-in frequency setting potentiometer
(Pr. 902 to Pr. 905, Pr. 922, Pr. 923)............................................................. 186
5.1.2 To know the operating status at the occurrence of alarm.............................. 209
5.1.3 Correspondence between digital and actual characters................................ 209
5.1.4 Resetting the inverter .................................................................................... 209
5.2 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 210
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
5.2.11
Motor remains stopped.................................................................................. 210
Motor rotates in opposite direction ................................................................ 210
Speed greatly differs from the setting............................................................ 211
Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth........................................................ 211
Motor current is large..................................................................................... 211
Speed does not increase............................................................................... 211
Speed varies during operation....................................................................... 211
Operation mode is not changed properly ...................................................... 212
Operation panel display is not operating ....................................................... 212
POWER lamp is not lit ................................................................................... 212
Parameter write cannot be performed ........................................................... 212
CHAPTER 6
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
213
6.1 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection.................................................. 214
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
6.1.8
Precautions for maintenance and inspection................................................. 214
Check items................................................................................................... 214
Periodic inspection ........................................................................................ 214
Insulation resistance test using megger ........................................................ 215
Pressure test ................................................................................................. 215
Daily and periodic inspection......................................................................... 216
Replacement of parts .................................................................................... 219
Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers ........................ 224
CHAPTER 7
SPECIFICATIONS
227
7.1 Standard Specifications .................................................................................... 228
7.1.1 Model specifications ...................................................................................... 228
7.1.2 Common specifications ................................................................................. 232
7.1.3 Outline dimension drawings .......................................................................... 234
APPENDIX
241
APPENDIX 1 Instruction Code List .......................................................................... 242
APPENDIX 2 When using the communication option. (400V class only)............. 246
IV
CHAPTER 1
OUTLINE
This chapter gives information on the basic "outline" of this
product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
Chapter 1
1.1 Pre-Operation Information ....................... 2
1.2 Basic Configuration.................................. 4
1.3 Structure .................................................. 5
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
<Abbreviations>
• PU
Operation panel and parameter
unit (FR-PU04)
• Inverter
Mitsubishi transistorized inverter
FR-E500 series
• Pr.
Parameter number
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
1
OUTLINE
1.1
1.1.1
Pre-Operation Information
Precautions for operation
This manual is written for the FR-E500 series transistorized inverters.
Incorrect handling may cause the inverter to operate incorrectly, causing its life to be
reduced considerably, or at the worst, the inverter to be damaged. Handle the inverter
properly in accordance with the information in each section as well as the precautions
and instructions of this manual to use it correctly.
For handling information on the parameter unit (FR-PU04), stand-alone options, etc.,
refer to the corresponding manuals.
(1) Unpacking and product check
Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate
on the inverter side face to ensure that the product agrees with your order and the
inverter is intact.
1) Inverter type
Rating plate
Capacity plate
MITSUBISHI
Rating plate
Capacity plate
FR-E520-0.1K
Inverter type
Serial number
MODEL
Input rating
Output rating
Serial number
INPUT
INVERTER
FR-E520-0.1K
: XXXXX
Inverter
type
OUTPUT : XXXXX
SERIAL :
PASSED
z Inverter type
FR - E520 Symbol Voltage Class
E520
Three-phase
200V class
E540
Three-phase
400V class
E520S
E510W
K -
0.1
Represents the
inverter capacity
"kW ".
Symbol Protective Structure
None Enclosed-type
C
Totally enclosed
structure
IP40
Single-phase
200V class
Single-phase
100V class
2) Accessory
Instruction manual
If you have found any discrepancy, damage, etc., please contact your sales
representative.
2
OUTLINE
(2) Preparation of instruments and parts required for operation
Instruments and parts to be prepared depend on how the inverter is operated. Prepare
equipment and parts as necessary. (Refer to page 64.)
(3) Installation
To operate the inverter with high performance for a long time, install the inverter in a
proper place, in the correct direction, with proper clearances. (Refer to page 14.)
(4) Wiring
Connect the power supply, motor and operation signals (control signals) to the terminal
block. Note that incorrect connection may damage the inverter and peripheral devices.
(See page 16.)
1
3
OUTLINE
1.2
Basic Configuration
1.2.1
Basic configuration
The following devices are required to operate the inverter. Proper peripheral devices
must be selected and correct connections made to ensure proper operation. Incorrect
system configuration and connections can cause the inverter to operate improperly, its
life to be reduced considerably, and in the worst case, the inverter to be damaged.
Please handle the inverter properly in accordance with the information in each section
as well as the precautions and instructions of this manual. (For connections of the
peripheral devices, refer to the corresponding manuals.)
Name
Description
Use the power supply within the permissible power
supply specifications of the inverter. (Refer to page
228.)
Power supply
(MCCB)
or
(ELB)
Earth (ground)
leakage circuit The breaker should be selected with care since a
large inrush current flows in the inverter at power
breaker or
moulded case on. (Refer to page 49.)
circuit breaker
Install for your safety. (Refer to page 54.) Do not
use this magnetic contactor to start or stop the
inverter. It might reduce the inverter life. (Refer to
page 49.)
The reactors must be used when the power factor is
to be improved or the inverter is installed near a large
power supply system (500KVA or more and wiring
distance within 10m). Make selection carefully.
• The life of the inverter is influenced by ambient
temperature. The ambient temperature should be
as low as possible within the permissible range.
This must be noted especially when the inverter is
installed in an enclosure. (Refer to page 14.)
• Wrong wiring might lead to damage of the
inverter. The control signal lines should be kept
away from the main circuit to protect them from
noise. (Refer to page 16.)
Magnetic
contactor
(MC)
AC
reactor
(FR-BAL)
Reactors
DC reactor
(FR-BEL)
Inverter
Earth (ground)
Earth (ground)
Do not connect a power capacitor, surge suppressor
or capacitor type filter on the output side.
When installing a moulded case circuit breaker on
the output side of the inverter, contact each
manufacturer for selection of the moulded case
circuit breaker.
To prevent an electric shock, always earth
(ground) the motor and inverter.
For reduction of induction noise from the power
Earth (Ground) line of the inverter, it is recommended to wire the
earth (ground) cable by returning it to the earth
(ground) terminal of the inverter. (Refer to page
46.)
Devices
connected to
the output
Harmonic suppression guideline (when inverters are used in Japan)
All models of general-purpose inverters used by specific consumers are covered by
"Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers who receive high voltage or special high
voltage". (For further details, refer to page 40.)
4
OUTLINE
1.3
1.3.1
Structure
Appearance and structure
(1) Front view
(100V class, 200V class)
(400V class)
Operation panel front cover
Operation panel
Built-in frequency setting potentiometer
Capacity plate
Front cover
Rating plate
Wiring cover
1
Wiring port cover
for option
(2) Without front cover and operation panel front cover
(100V class, 200V class)
(400V class)
Inboard option
mounting position
Connector for connection
of inboard option
(400V class only)
Control circuit terminal block
Control logic changing
jumper connector
Main circuit
terminal block
Wiring cover
(3) Without operation panel
(100V class, 200V class)
(400V class)
PU connector
POWER lamp (yellow)
ALARM lamp (red)
Lamp indication
Power lamp .......Lit when power is spplied to the main circuit (R (L1),S (L2),T (L3)).
Alarm lamp........Lit when the inverter is in the alarm status (major faults).
5
OUTLINE
1.3.2
Removal and reinstallation of the front cover
zRemoval
(For the FR-E520-0.1K to 3.7K, FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.75K, FR-E510W0.1K to 0.75K)
The front cover is secured by hooks in positions A and B as shown below.
Push either A or B in the direction of arrows, and using the other end as a support,
pull the front cover toward you to remove.
1)
2)
A
3)
B
Overhead cross-sectional view
B
Front cover
A
(For the FR-E520-5.5K, 7.5K)
The front cover is fixed with hooks in positions A, B and C.
Push A and B in the directions of arrows at the same time and remove the cover
using C as supporting points.
2)
1)
3)
B
A
C
C
6
OUTLINE
(For the FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K)
The front cover is fixed with hooks in positions A, B and C.
Push A and B in the directions of arrows at the same time and remove the cover
using C as supporting points.
1)
B
A
C
2)
3)
1
C
zReinstallation
When reinstalling the front cover after wiring, fix the hooks securely.
With the front cover removed, do not switch power on.
Note: 1. Make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely.
2. The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover
and the rating plate of the inverter. Before reinstalling the front cover, check
the serial numbers to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the
inverter from where it was removed.
7
OUTLINE
1.3.3
Removal and reinstallation of the wiring cover
zRemoval
(For the FR-E520-0.1K to 7.5K, FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.75K, FR-E510W0.1K to 0.75K)
The wiring cover is fixed by hooks in positions 1) and 2).
Push either 1) or 2) in the direction of arrows and pull the wiring cover downward to
remove.
1)
2)
Wiring hole
(For the FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K)
Remove the wiring cover by pulling it in the direction of arrow A.
A
Wiring hole
zReinstallation
Pass the cables through the wiring hole and reinstall the cover in the original
position.
8
OUTLINE
1.3.4
Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel
To ensure safety, remove and reinstall the operation panel after switching power off.
The charging area and control printed board are exposed on the rear surface of the
operation panel. When removing the operation panel, always fit the rear cover option FRE5P. Never touch the control printed board because touching it can cause the inverter to fail
zRemoval
Hold down the portion A indicated by the arrow and lift the right hand side using
the portion B indicated by the arrow as a support, and pull out the operation panel
to the right.
1)
2)
B
3)
1
A
(If the above procedure is not used for removal, the internal connector may be
damaged by the force applied.)
z Reinstallation
Insert the mounting hook (left hand side) of the operation panel into the mounting
position of the inverter and push in the right hand side mounting hook to install the
operation panel.
Mounting position
Operation panel
Hook
1)
2)
9
A
3)
OUTLINE
zUsing the connection cable for operation
1) Remove the operation panel.
2) Fit the rear cover option FR-E5P to the back surface of the operation panel.
3) Securely plug one end of the connection cable into the PU connector of the
inverter and the other end into the adaptor of the FR-E5P option to connect it to
the operation panel. (For the connection cable of the FR-E5P, refer to page 30.)
PU connector
(RS-485 cable specifications)
zMounting the operation panel on an enclosure
When you open the operation panel front cover, the screw mounting guides for
fixing the operation panel to an enclosure appear on the top left and bottom right.
Remove the operation panel, fit the rear cover of the FR-E5P option, drill holes in
the operation panel mounting guides, and securely mount the operation panel on
the enclosure with screws.
1.3.5
Removal of the operation panel front cover
1)Open the operation panel front cover to 90 degrees.
2)Pull out the operation panel front cover to the left to remove it.
90 degrees
10
OUTLINE
1.3.6
Exploded view
z FR-E520-0.1K to 7.5K
z FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.75K
z FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K
Operation panel
1
Wiring cover
Front cover
z FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K
Operation panel
Front cover
Wiring port cover
for option
Wiring cover
CAUTION
Do not remove any parts other than the operation panel, front cover, and wiring cover
from the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter.
11
MEMO
12
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION AND
WIRING
This chapter gives information on the basic "installation and
wiring" for use of this product.
Always read the instructions in this chapter before using the
equipment.
2.1 Installation................................................ 14
2.2 Wiring....................................................... 16
2.3 Other Wiring............................................. 39
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
13
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.1
2.1.1
Installation
Instructions for installation
The FR-E520(S)-0.1K to 0.75K and FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.4K have top mounting holes
in the back of the operation panel front cover. Tighten the screws after opening the
cover.
1) Handle the unit carefully.
The inverter uses plastic parts. Handle it gently to protect it from damage.
Also, hold the unit with even strength and do not apply too much strength to the front
cover alone.
2) Install the inverter in a place where it is not affected by vibration easily (5.9m/s2
maximum).
Note the vibration of a cart, press, etc.
3) Note on the ambient temperature.
The inverter life is under great influence of the ambient temperature. In the place of
installation, the ambient temperature must be within the permissible range -10°C to
+50°C (-10°C to +40°C when using the totally enclosed structure). Check that the
ambient temperature is within that range in the positions shown in figure 3).
4) Install the inverter on a non-combustible surface.
The inverter will be very hot (maximum about 150°C). Install it on a non-combustible
surface (e.g. metal). Also leave sufficient clearances around the inverter.
5) Avoid high temperature and high humidity.
Avoid direct sunlight and places of high temperature and high humidity.
6) Avoid places where the inverter is exposed to oil mist, flammable gases, fluff, dust,
dirt etc.
Install the inverter in a clean place or inside a "totally enclosed" panel which does not
accept any suspended matter.
14
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
7) Note the cooling method when the inverter is installed in an enclosure.
When two or more inverters are installed or a ventilation fan is mounted in an
enclosure, the inverters and ventilation fan must be installed in proper positions with
extreme care taken to keep the ambient temperatures of the inverters with the
permissible values. If they are installed in improper positions, the ambient
temperatures of the inverters will rise and ventilation effect will be reduced.
8) Install the inverter securely in the vertical direction with screws or bolts.
4) Clearances around the inverter
3) Note on ambient
temperatures
Front
Side
10cm or more
Measurement
position
5cm
5cm
Inverter
1cm
or more *
1cm
or more *
1cm *
or more
5cm
Inverter
Measurement position
10cm or more
2
*5cm or more for 5.5K and 7.5K
7) For installation in an enclosure
Ventilation
fan
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
(Correct example) (Incorrect example)
Position of Ventilation Fan
Built-in cooling fan
(Correct example)
(Incorrect example)
When more than one inverter is contained
8) Vertical mounting
15
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.2 Wiring
2.2.1
Terminal connection diagram
z Three-phase 200V power input
z Three-phase 400V power input
MCCB MC
Three-phase
AC power
supply
24VDC power output and
external transistor common
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
U
V
W
PC
Note 5
P1
(+)P
PR
Forward rotation start STF
(-)N
Note 2
Reverse rotation start STR
Motor
IM
Earth
(ground)
Jumper
Remove this jumper when
using the optional power-factor
improving DC reactor.
Brake resistor connection
High RH
A
Multi-speed selection Middle RM
B
Low RL
C
Output stop MRS
Alarm
output
Reset RES
Contact input common SD
Note 4
RUN
FU
Control input signals
(No voltage input allowed)
SE
Note 3
Frequency setting signals (Analog)
3
(Note 1)
2
Frequency
setting
potentiometer1
1/2W1kΩ Current input(-)
4 to 20mADC(+)
2 0 to 5VDC Selected
FM
0 to 10VDC
4(4 to 20mADC)
Frequency detection
Open collector
output common
Open
collector outputs
Meter
(e.g. frequency meter)
10(+5V)
5(Common)
Note 4
Running
SD
Note 3
When using current input as the
PU connector
frequency setting signal, set "4" in
(RS-485)
any of Pr.180 to Pr.183 (input
terminal function selection) and
Operation panel
assign AU (current input selection)
(With frequency setting
to any of terminal RH, RM, RL, or
potentiometer)
MRS, then turn the AU signal on.
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
+
-
Calibration
resistor (Note 6)
Moving-coil type
1mA full-scale
Earth
(ground)
Main circuit terminal
Control circuit input terminal
Control circuit output terminal
If the potentiometer is to be operated often, use a 2W1kΩ potentiometer.
0.1K and 0.2K do not contain a transistor.
Terminals SD and SE are isolated.
Terminals SD and 5 are common terminals. Do not earth (ground) them to the
ground. Terminals SD and 5 are not isolated. (Those of the 400V class are isolated.)
5. When terminals PC-SD are used as a 24VDC power supply, be careful not
to short these terminals. If they are shorted, the inverter will be damaged.
6. Not needed when the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04) is used for
calibration. Used when calibration must be made near the frequency meter for
such a reason as a remote frequency meter. However, the frequency meter
needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resistor is connected. In this
case, use this resistor and the operation panel or parameter unit together.
16
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
z Single-phase 200V power input
z Single-phase 100V power input
MCCB
MC
U
V
W
R
S
Power supply
Motor
IM
Earth
(ground)
Note: 1. To ensure safety, connect the power input to the inverter via a magnetic
contactor and earth (ground) leakage circuit breaker or moulded case circuit
breaker, and use the magnetic contactor to switch power on-off.
2. The output is three-phase 200V.
(1) Description of the main circuit terminals
Symbol
Terminal Name
Description
R, S, T
(L1, L2, L3)
(Note)
AC power input
Connect to the commercial power supply. Keep these
terminals open when using the high power factor
converter (FR-HC) or power regeneration common
converter (FR-CV).
U, V, W
Inverter output
Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.
P (+), PR
Brake resistor
connection
Connect the optional brake resistor across terminals PPR (+ - PR) (not for 0.1K and 0.2K).
P (+), N (-)
Brake unit
connection
Connect the optional brake unit, high power factor
converter (FR-HC), and power regeneration common
converter (FR-CV).
P (+), P1
Power factor
improving
DC reactor
connection
Disconnect the jumper from terminals P-P1 (+ - P1) and
connect the optional power factor improving DC reactor.
(can not be connected to the single phase 100V power
input specification inverter)
Earth (Ground)
For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be
earthed (grounded).
Note: R, S (L1, L2) terminals for single-phase power input.
17
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(2) Description of the control circuit terminals
Type
Symbol
STF
Turn on the STF signal to start forward
rotation and turn it off to stop.
Reverse
rotation start
Turn on the STR signal to start reverse
rotation and turn it off to stop.
RH, RM, Multi-speed
RL
selection
MRS
Output stop
RES
Reset
Input signals
Contact input
STR
Terminal
Name
Forward
rotation start
SD
PC
Description
When the STF
and STR signals
are turned on
simultaneously,
the stop command
is given.
Combine the RH, RM and RL signals as
Input terminal
appropriate to select multiple speeds.
function selection
Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or
(Pr. 180 to Pr.
longer) to stop the inverter output.
183) changes
Used to shut off the inverter output to
terminal
bring the motor to a stop by the
functions.
electromagnetic brake.
Used to reset the protective circuit activated. Turn on the
RES signal for more than 0.1s then turn it off.
Factory setting is for reset always. By setting Pr.75, reset
can be set to enabled only at an inverter alarm occurrence.
(Refer to page 130.) Recover about 1s after reset is
cancelled.
Contact input
common
Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic)
(sink)
and terminal FM.
(initial setting)
When connecting the transistor output (open collector
External
output), such as a programmable controller, when source
transistor
logic is selected, connect the external power supply
common
common for transistor output to this terminal to prevent a
(source)
malfunction caused by undesirable currents.
24VDC power Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply
(PC terminal).
supply
Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
common
When connecting the transistor output (open collector
External
output), such as a programmable controller, when sink logic
transistor
is selected, connect the external power supply common for
common
transistor output to this terminal to prevent a malfunction
(sink)
(initial setting) caused by undesirable currents.
Contact input
common
Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).
(source)
24VDC power
Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.
supply
18
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Analog
Frequency setting
Type
Terminal
Symbol
Name
Frequency
10
setting power
supply
5
2
Frequency
setting
(voltage)
4
Frequency
setting
(current)
Frequency
setting
common
Description
5VDC, permissible load current 10mA
By entering 0 to 5VDC (0 to 10VDC), the maximum output
frequency is reached at 5V (or 10V) and I/O are
proportional. Use Pr. 73 to switch between input 0 to 5VDC
(factory setting) and 0 to 10VDC. Input resistance 10kΩ.
Maximum permissible voltage 20V.
By entering 4 to 20mADC, the maximum output frequency
is reached at 20mA and I/O are proportional. This input
signal is valid only when the AU signal (Note) is on (voltage
input is invalid). Input resistance approximately 250Ω.
Maximum permissible current 30mA.
Common to the frequency setting signals (terminal 2, 1 or
4).
Do not connect to the earth (ground).
Note: Assign the AU signal to any of the terminals using the input terminal function
selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183).
* Used as a contact input signal common terminal by switching between sink logic and
source logic. (Refer to page 27.)
19
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Symbol
A, B, C
RUN
Open collector
Output signals
Contact
Type
FU
RS-485
Communication
Pulse
SE
FM
⎯⎯
Terminal
Name
Alarm output
Inverter
running
Frequency
detection
Description
1 changeover contact output indicating that
the output has been stopped by the inverter
protective function activated. 230VAC 0.3A,
30VDC 0.3A. Alarm: discontinuity across BC (continuity across A-C), normal:
continuity across B-C (discontinuity across
A-C).
Output
terminal
Switched low when the inverter output
function
frequency is equal to or higher than the
selection
starting frequency (factory set to 0.5Hz,
variable). Switched high during stop or DC (Pr. 190 to
Pr. 192)
injection brake operation (*1).
changes
Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A. (a voltage
terminal
drop is 3.4V maximum when the signal is
functions.
on)
Switched low when the inverter output
frequency is equal to or higher than the
preset detected frequency and high when
less than the preset detected frequency.
(*1).
Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A
Open collector
Common to the RUN and FU terminals
output common
For meter
One selected from output
frequency, motor current
and output voltage is output
(*2). The output signal is
proportional to the
magnitude of each
monitoring item.
PU connector
With the operation panel connector, communication can
be made using the RS-485 protocol.
• Conforming Standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)
• Transmission format: Multi-drop link system
• Communication speed: Maximum 19200bps
• Overall length: 500m
Factory setting of output
item:
Frequency permissible
load current 1mA
1440 pulses/s at 60Hz
*1: Low indicates that the open collector output transistor is on (conducts). High
indicates that the transistor is off (does not conduct).
*2: Not output during inverter resetting.
20
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.2.2
Wiring of the Main Circuit
(1) Wiring instructions
1) It is recommended to use insulation-sleeved crimping terminals for power supply and
motor cables.
2) Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage the
inverter. Never perform such wiring.
3) After wiring, wire off-cuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire off-cuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and
other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
4) Use thick cables to make the voltage drop 2% or less.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage
drop will cause the motor torque to decrease, especially at the output of a low frequency.
(A selection example for the wiring length of 20m is shown on page 24.)
5) For long distance wiring, the overcurrent protection may be activated improperly or
the devices connected to the output side may misoperate or become faulty under the
influence of a charging current due to the stray capacitance of the wiring.
Therefore, the maximum overall wiring length should be as indicated in the following
table. If the wiring length exceeds the value, it is recommended to set "1" in Pr. 156 to
make the fast-response current limit function invalid. (When two or more motors are
connected to the inverter, the total wiring length should be within the indicated value.)
Inverter
Capacity
100V,
Non-low
200V
acoustic
class
noise
400V
mode
class
100V,
Low
200V
acoustic
class
noise
400V
mode
class
0.1K
0.2K
0.4K
0.75K
1.5K
2.2K
3.7K or
more
200
200
300
500
500
500
500
——
——
200
200
300
500
500
30
100
200
300
500
500
500
——
——
30
100
200
300
500
(Unit: m)
Overall wiring length (3.7K or more)
500m maximum
300m
300m
300m+300m=600m
21
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
6) Connect only the recommended optional brake resistor between the terminals P-PR
(+ - PR). Keep terminals P-PR (+ - PR) of 0.1K or 0.2K open.
These terminals must not be shorted.
0.1K and 0.2K do not accept the brake resistor. Keep terminals P-PR (+ - PR) open.
Also, never short these terminals.
7) Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components,
which may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near
the inverter. In this case, install the FR-BIF optional capacitor type filter (for use in the
input side only) or FR-BSF01 or FR-BLF common mode filter to minimize
interference.
8) Do not install a power capacitor, surge suppressor or capacitor type filter (FR-BIF
option) on the output side of the inverter.
This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be
damaged. If any of the above devices are installed, immediately remove them. (When
using the FR-BIF capacitor type filter with a single-phase power supply, connect it to
the input side of the inverter after isolating the T phase securely.)
9) When rewiring after operation, make sure that the POWER lamp has gone off, and
when more than 10 minutes has elapsed after power-off, check with a meter etc. that
the voltage is zero. After that, start rewiring work. For some time after power-off, there
is a dangerous voltage in the capacitor.
Notes on Earthing (Grounding)
z Leakage currents flow in the inverter. To prevent an electric shock, the inverter and
motor must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (grounding) must conform to the
requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes.
(NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
z Use the dedicated earth (ground) terminal to earth (ground) the inverter. (Do not
use the screw in the case, chassis, etc.) For the earth (ground) connection, avoid
direct contact between aluminium and copper. Tin-plated cable lugs can be used if
the plating does not contain zinc. When tightening the screws, take care not to
damage the thread in the aluminium frame.
z Use the thickest possible earth (ground) cable. Use the cable whose size is equal
to or greater than that indicated below, and minimize the cable length. The earthing
(grounding) point should be as near as possible to the inverter.
Motor Capacity
2.2kW or less
3.7kW
5.5kW, 7.5kW
(Unit: mm2)
Earth (ground) Cable Gauge
100V class
200V class
400V class
2 (2.5)
2 (2.5)
2 (2.5)
—
3.5 (4)
2 (4)
—
5.5 (6)
3.5 (4)
For use as a product compliant with the Low Voltage Directive, use PVC cable
whose size is indicated within parentheses.
z Earth (ground) the motor on the inverter side using one wire of the 4-core cable.
22
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(2) Terminal block layout of the power circuit
FR-E520-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K, 0.75K
FR-E520-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
N/- P/+
N/- P1 P/+ PR
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U
V
W
PR P1
TB1
Screw size (M3.5)
TB2
Screw size (M4)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U
V
W
TB1
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M3.5)
Screw size (M4)
FR-E520-5.5K, 7.5K
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P1 P/+ PR
U
V
Screw size
(M5)
W
TB1
Screw size
(M5)
FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K
2
N/-
P1 P/+ PR
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U
V
W
TB1
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M4)
FR-E520S-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K
FR-E510W-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K
FR-E520S-0.75K
FR-E510W-0.75K
N/- P/+
N/- P1 P/+ PR
R/L1 S/L2
U
V
W
PR P1
TB1
Screw size (M3.5)
TB2
Screw size (M4)
R/L1 S/L2
Screw size (M3.5)
U
V
W
TB1
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M4)
23
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(3) Cables, crimping terminals, etc.
The following table lists the cables and crimping terminals used with the inputs (R (L1), S
(L2), T (L3)) and outputs (U, V, W) of the inverter and the torques for tightening the screws:
1) FR-E520-0.1K to 7.5K
Applicable Inverter
Type
FR-E520-0.1K to
0.75K
FR-E520-1.5K,
2.2K
FR-E520-3.7K
FR-E520-5.5K
FR-E520-7.5K
Terminal
Screw
Size
PVC insulated
Cables
Cables
AWG
mm 2
mm2
Torque
R, S, T
R, S, T
R, S, T
R, S, T
U, V, W
U, V, W
U, V, W
U, V, W
N⋅m
(L1, L2, L3)
(L1, L2, L3)
(L1, L2, L3)
(L1, L2, L3)
Tight-
Crimping
ening
Terminals
M3.5
1.2
2-3.5
2-3.5
M4
1.5
2-4
2-4
M4
M5
M5
1.5
2.5
2.5
5.5-4
5.5-5
14-5
5.5-4
5.5-5
8-5
2
2
14
14
2.5
2.5
2
2
14
14
2.5
2.5
3.5
5.5
14
3.5
5.5
8
12
10
6
12
10
8
4
6
16
2.5
4
6
2) FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K
Applicable Inverter
Type
FR-E540-0.4K
FR-E540-0.75K
FR-E540-1.5K
FR-E540-2.2K
FR-E540-3.7K
FR-E540-5.5K
FR-E540-7.5K
Terminal
Screw
Size
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
Tight-
Crimping
ening
Terminals
PVC insulated
Cables
Cables
AWG
mm 2
mm2
Torque
R, S, T
R, S, T
R, S, T
R, S, T
N⋅m
U, V, W
U, V, W
U, V, W
U, V, W
(L1, L2, L3)
(L1, L2, L3)
(L1, L2, L3)
(L1, L2, L3)
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
5.5-4
5.5-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
5.5-4
2
2
2
2
2
3.5
3.5
2
2
2
2
2
2
3.5
14
14
14
14
14
12
12
14
14
14
14
14
14
12
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
4
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
3) FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.75K
Applicable Inverter
Type
Terminal
Screw
Size
Tight-
Crimping
ening
Terminals
Torque
N⋅m
R, S
(L1, L2)
PVC insulated
Cables
Cables
mm 2
U, V, W
R, S
(L1, L2)
mm2
AWG
U, V, W
R, S
(L1, L2)
U, V, W
R, S
(L1, L2)
U, V, W
FR-E520S-0.1K to
M3.5
0.4K
1.2
2-3.5
2-3.5
2
2
14
14
2.5
2.5
FR-E520S-0.75K
1.5
2-4
2-4
2
2
14
14
2.5
2.5
M4
24
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
4) FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K
Applicable Inverter
Type
TightTerminal
ening
Screw
Torque
Size
N⋅m
FR-E510W-0.1K
M3.5
to 0.4K
FR-E510W-0.75K
M4
PVC insulated
Cables
HIV Cables
Crimping
Terminals
mm 2
AWG
mm2
R, S
U, V, W
(L1, L2)
R, S
(L1, L2)
U, V, W
1.2
2-3.5
2-3.5
2
2
14
14
2.5
2.5
1.5
5.5-4
2-4
3.5
2
12
14
4
2.5
R, S
(L1, L2)
U, V, W
R, S
(L1, L2)
U, V, W
Note: 1. The cables used should be 75°C copper cables.
2. Tighten the terminal screws to the specified torques.
Undertightening can cause a short or misoperation.
Overtightening can cause the screws and unit to be damaged, resulting in a
short or misoperation.
3. The power supply cable size of the motor indicated assumes that its length
is 20m.
(4) Connection of the power supply and motor
z Three-phase power input
Three-phase
power supply 200V
Three-phase
power supply 400V
2
R
(L1)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
R
S
(L1) (L2)
U
V
U
T
(L3)
W
V
W
Earth
(ground)
MCCB
The power supply cables must be connected
to R, S, T (L1, L2 ,L3). Never connect the
power cable to the U, V, W of the inverter.
Doing so will damage the inverter.
(Phase sequence need not be matched.)
Earth (ground)
terminal
Motor
Connect the motor to U, V, W. In the above
connection, turning on the forward rotation switch (signal)
rotates the motor in the counterclockwise (arrow) direction
when viewed from the load shaft.
z Single-phase power input
Single-phase power
supply 200V
Single-phase power
supply 100V
R
S
(L1) (L2)
U
V
U
S
R
(L1) (L2)
W
V
W
Earth (ground)
terminal
Motor
Earth
(ground)
MCCB
Note: 1.To ensure safety, connect the power input to the inverter via a magnetic
contactor and earth (ground) leakage circuit breaker or moulded case
circuit breaker, and use the magnetic contactor to switch power on-off.
2.The output is three-phase 200V.
25
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.2.3
Wiring of the control circuit
(1) Wiring instructions
1) Terminals SD, SE and 5 are common to the I/O signals. These common terminals must
not be earthed (grounded) to the ground.
Terminals SD and 5 are not isolated. Do not connect terminals SE-5. (Those of the 400V
class are isolated. Avoid connecting the terminal SD and 5 and the terminal SE and 5.)
2) Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them
away from the main and power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit).
3) The frequency input signals to the control circuit are micro currents. When contacts
are required, use two or more parallel micro signal contacts or a twin contact to
prevent a contact fault.
4) It is recommended to use the cables of 0.3mm2 to 0.75mm2 gauge for connection to
the control circuit terminals.
(2) Terminal block layout
In the control circuit of the inverter, the terminals are arranged as shown below:
Terminal screw size: M2.5
(200V class, 100V class)
Terminal layout of control circuit
RH
RM
RL
MRS
RES
SD
FM
PC
SE
(400V class)
A
B
C
10
2
5
4
SD
RUN
STF
STR
FU
SD
(3) Wiring method
1) For wiring the control circuit, use cables after stripping their sheaths.
Refer to the gauge printed on the inverter and strip the sheaths to the following
dimensions. If the sheath is stripped too much, its cable may be shorted with the
adjoining cable. If the sheath is stripped too little, the cable may come off.
7mm ± 1mm
26
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2) When using bar terminals and solid wires for wiring, their diameters should be 0.9mm
maximum. If they are larger, the threads may be damaged during tightening.
3) Loosen the terminal screw and insert the cable into the terminal.
4) Tighten the screw to the specified torque.
Undertightening can cause cable disconnection or misoperation. Overtightening can
cause damage to the screw or unit, leading to short circuit or misoperation.
Tightening torque: 0.25N⋅m to 0.49N⋅m
*Use a size 0 screwdriver to tighten.
Note: When routing the stripped cables, twist them so that they do not become loose.
In addition, do not solder it.
(4) Control logic changing
The input signal logic is factory-set to the sink logic.
To change the control logic, the position of the jumper connector must be changed.
1) Use tweezers etc. to remove the jumper connector in the sink logic position and fit it
in the source logic position.
Do this position changing before switching power on.
2
Jumper
connector
Jumper
connector
(100V/200V class)
(400V class)
Note: 1. Make sure that the front cover has been installed securely.
2. The front cover has a capacity plate and the inverter a rating plate on it.
Since these plates have the same serial numbers, always reinstall the
removed cover to the inverter from where it was removed.
3. Always install the sink-source logic changing jumper connector in either of
the positions. If two connectors are installed in these positions at the same
time, the inverter may be damaged.
27
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2) Sink logic type
• In this logic, a signal switches on when a current flows out of the corresponding signal
input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the
open collector output signals.
Inverter
Current
QX40
R
STF
TB1
RUN
R
R
R
STR
TB17
SE
SD
24VDC
• Use terminal PC as a common terminal, and perform wiring as shown below. (Do not
connect terminal SD of the inverter with terminal 0V of the external power supply.
When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC power supply, do not install a power supply
in parallel in the outside of the inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction due to
undesirable current.)
Inverter
QY40P type transistor
output unit
TB1 STF
24VDC
(SD)
TB2 STR
Constant
voltage
circuit
TB17
PC
TB18
24VDC SD
Current flow
28
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
3) Source logic type
• In this logic, a signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal
input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the
open collector output signals.
Inverter
PC
RUN
Current
QX80
TB1
STF
R
R
SE
R
STR
24VDC
TB18
R
• Use terminal SD as a common terminal, and perform wiring as shown below. (Do not
connect terminal PC of the inverter with terminal +24V of the external power supply.
When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC power supply, do not install an external
power supply in parallel with the inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the
inverter due to undesirable currents.)
Fuse
PC
TB1
STF
TB2
STR
TB17
TB18
24VDC
Constant
voltage
circuit
2
Inverter
QY80 type transistor
output unit
24VDC
(SD)
SD
Current flow
(5) How to use the STOP signal
The following connection example shows how to self-hold the start signals (forward
rotation, reverse rotation).
Use Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection) to assign the STOP signal.
Stop
RL
(STOP)
MRS
RES
SD
Forward
rotation
Reverse
rotation
STF
STR
(Wiring example for sink logic)
29
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.2.4
Connection to the PU connector
(1) When connecting the operation panel or parameter unit using a cable
Use the option FR-CB2†† or the following connector and commercially available
cable:
<Connection cable>
• Connector: RJ45 connector
Example: 5-554720-3, Tyco Electronics Corporation
:Cable conforming to EIA568 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable)
Example: SGLPEV-T 0.5mm×4P (Twisted pair cable, 4 pairs),
MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES, LTD.
Note: The rear cover and junction adaptor are required since the circuit board is
exposed in the back of the operation panel. Use the FR-E5P option (cover and
adaptor available as a set).
• Cable:
<Maximum wiring length>
• Operation panel: 20m
• Parameter unit (FR-PU04): 20m
(2) For RS-485 communication
With the operation panel disconnected, the PU
connector can be used for communication operation
from a personal computer etc.
When the PU connector is connected with a personal,
FA or other computer by a communication cable, a
user program can run and monitor the inverter or read
and write to the parameters.
1) SG
2) P5S
3) RDA
4) SDB
<PU connector pin-outs>
Viewed from the inverter (receptacle side) front
5) SDA
6) RDB
7) SG
8) P5S
8) to 1)
Note: 1. Do not connect the PU connector to a computer's LAN board, FAX modem
socket or telephone modular connector. The product could be damaged
due to differences in electrical specifications.
2. Pins 2) and 8) (P5S) provide power to the operation panel or parameter
unit.
Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication.
3. Refer to page 144 for the communication parameters.
30
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
<System configuration example>
(1) Connection of a computer to the inverter (1:1 connection)
Computer
RS-485
interface/
terminal
Station 0
Inverter
RS-485
connector
Station 0
Inverter
Computer
RS-232C
connector
RS-232C
cable
RS-232C
converter
Max. 15m
RS-485
connector
RS-485
RJ-45 connector 2)
10BASE-T cable 1)
RJ-45 connector 2)
10BASE-T cable 1)
z Computer-inverter connection cable
For a connection cable between the computer having RS-232C and the inverter (RS232C⇔RS-485 converter), refer to the table below.
Example of product available on the market (as of Sep., 2006)
Model
FA-T-RS40†*
Maker
Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
* The converter cable cannot connect two or more inverters (the computer and
inverter are connected on a 1:1 basis). Since the product is packed with the RS232C cable and RS-485 cable (10BASE-T + RJ-45 connector), the cable and
connector need not be prepared separately. Contact a maker for details of the
product.
REMARKS
Refer to the following when fabricating the cable on the user side.
Example of product available on the market (as of Sep., 2006)
Product
1) 10BASE-T cable
2) RJ-45 connector
Model
SGLPEV-T 0.5mm × 4P
* Do not use No. 2 and No. 8
pin (P5S).
5-554720-3
31
Maker
Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
Tyco Electronics Corporation
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(2) Connection of a computer to multiple inverters (1:n connection)
Station 0
Computer
RS-485
interface/
terminal
Station 1
Station n
(Max. 32 inverters)
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
RS-485
connector
RS-485
connector
RS-485
connector
Distributor
Termination resistor
10BASE-T cable 1)
Computer
RS-232C
connector
RS-232C
cable
RJ-45 connector 2)
Station 1
Station 2
Inverter
Inverter
Station n
Inverter
RS-485
connector
RS-485
connector
RS-485
connector
Max. 15m
Converter
Distributor
Termination resistor
10BASE-T cable 1)
RJ-45 connector 2)
REMARKS
Refer to the following when fabricating the cable on the user side.
Example of product available on the market (as of Sep., 2006)
Product
1) 10BASE-T cable
2) RJ-45 connector
Model
SGLPEV-T 0.5mm × 4P*
5-554720-3
Maker
Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
Tyco Electronics Corporation
* Do not use No. 2 and No. 8 pin (P5S) of the 10 BASE-T cable.
32
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
<Wiring methods>
1) Wiring of one RS-485 computer and one inverter
Computer Side Terminals
Signal name
Description
RDA
Receive data
Receive data
RDB
SDA
Send data
SDB
Send data
Request to send
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SG
FG
Cable connection and signal direction
Inverter
PU connector
SDA
SDB
RDA
RDB
10 BASE-T Cable
Request to send
Clear to send
Clear to send
Signal ground
Frame ground
(Note 1)
0.2mm2 or more
SG
2) Wiring of one RS-485 computer and "n" inverters (several inverters)
Cable connection and signal direction
10 BASE-T Cable
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
(Note 1)
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
Terminating
resistor
(Note 2)
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
Computer
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SG
FG
SG
Station 1
SG
Station 2
SG
Station n
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Note: 1. Make connections in accordance with the instruction manual of the
computer used.
Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer as they differ between
models.
2. There may be the influence of reflection depending on the transmission
speed and/or transmission distance. If this reflection hinders
communication, provide a terminating resistor. If the PU connector is used
to make a connection, use the distributor as a terminating resistor cannot
be fitted.
Connect the terminating resistor to only the inverter remotest from the
computer. (Terminating resistor: 100Ω)
33
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.2.5
Connection of stand-alone option units
The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required.
Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or an accident. Connect and operate
the option unit carefully in accordance with the corresponding option unit manual.
(1) Connection of the dedicated external brake resistor (option)
(Cannot be connected to 0.1K and 0.2K)
Connect a brake resistor across terminals P (+) and PR. Connect a dedicated brake
resistor only.
(For the locations of terminals P (+) and PR, refer to the terminal block layout (page
23).)
·
·
·
·
FR-E520-0.4K, 0.75K, 5.5K, 7.5K
FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K
FR-E520S-0.4K
FR-E510W-0.4K
· FR-E520-1.5K to 3.7K
· FR-E520S-0.75K
· FR-E510W-0.75K
N(-) P1 P(+) PR
P
Brake resistor
PR
Brake resistor
Do not remove a jumper across terminal P and P1 except when connecting a DC
reactor.
34
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(2) Connection of the brake unit (BU)
Connect the BU brake unit correctly as shown below. Incorrect connection will damage
the inverter. Remove the jumper across terminals HB-PC and terminals TB-HC of the
brake unit and fit it to across terminals PC-TB.
MCCB
MC
Power
supply
T(Note 3)
Inverter
R (L1)
U
S (L2)
V
T (L3)
W
P (+)
Motor
IM
N (-)
MC
OFF
Connect a
jumper.
ON
Discharging resistor
Remove
jumpers.
MC
PC HA HB HC
P
TB
N
PR
OCR
OCR
BU type brake unit
Note: 1. The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit and discharging
resistor should be within 2m. If twisted wires are used, the distance should
be within 5m.
2. If the transistors in the brake unit should fail, the resistor will be extremely
hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a magnetic contactor on the inverter's
power supply side to shut off current in case of failure.
3. When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
4. Do not remove a jumper across terminal P and P1 except when connecting
a DC reactor.
35
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(3) Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC)
(In the case of single-phase power input, the FR-HC cannot be connected.)
When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC) to suppress power supply
harmonics, perform wiring securely as shown below. Wrong connection will damage the
high power factor converter and inverter.
High power
factor converter
(FR-HC)
External box
(FR-HCB)
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL01)
MCCB MC
Power
supply
R R2
S S2
T T2
Resistor
R2
S2
T2
MC1
MC2
R3
MC S3
T3
Filter
capacitor
Reactor 2
(FR-HCL02)
R3 R4
S3 S4
T3 T4
Resistor
MC1
MC2
(Note 6)
R4
P
S4
N
T4
RDY
RSO
SE
R
Inverter
(FR-E500)
R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
(Note 2)
P (+)
U
N (-)
V
MRS
W
RES
SD
Motor
IM
S Phase
T detection
Note: 1. Use sink logic (factory setting) when the FR-HC is connected. The FR-HC
cannot be connected when source logic is selected.
2. The power input terminals R, S, T (L1, L2, L3) must be open.
Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.
3. The voltage phases of terminals R, S, T (L1, L2, L3) and terminals R4, S4,
T4 must be matched before connection.
4. The MRS terminal functions can be changed using Pr.183 "MRS terminal
function selection". When connecting the high power factor converter (FRHC), use the inverter with "6" (factory-set) in Pr.183. (Refer to page 171.)
5. If the load capacity is less than half of the high power factor converter
capacity, satisfactory harmonic suppression effects cannot be produced.
6. Do not install the MCCB between terminals P-N (P (+) -P, N (-) -N).
Opposite polarity of terminals P (+), N (-) will damage the inverter.
7. Do not remove a jumper across terminal P and P1 except when connecting
a DC reactor.
(4) Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (FR-BEL)
Connect the FR-BEL power
factor improving DC reactor
between terminals P1-P (+). In
this case, the jumper connected
across terminals P1-P (+) must
be removed. Otherwise, the
reactor will not function.
<Connection method>
• FR-E520-0.1K to 0.75K,5.5K,7.5K • FR-E520-1.5K to 3.7K
• FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K
• FR-E520S-0.75K
• FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.4K
N
P
P
Remove
( ) P1 (+) PR
(+)
FR-BEL
the jumper.
P1
FR-BEL
Remove the jumper.
36
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Note: 1. The wiring distance should be within 5m.
2. The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the
power supply cables (R (L1), S (L2), T (L3)).
(5) Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
When connecting the type power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), connect the
inverter terminals (P(+), N(-)) and power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
terminals as shown below so that their signals match with each other. For details, refer
to the instruction manual of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).
R (L1)
U
S (L2) (Note 2)
V
T (L3)
W
MCCB
Three-phase
AC power
supply
MC1
Dedicated stand-alone
reactor (FR-CVL)
R/L11
S/L21
T/L31
FR-CV power regeneration
common converter
R2/L12
S2/L22
T2/L32
R2/L1
S2/L2
T2/L3
(Note 3)
(Note 6)
R/L11
S/L21
T/MC1
IM
Inverter
(Note 5)
P/L+
N/L-
P (+)
(Note 2)
N (-)
P24
PC
SD
SD
RDYA
RDYB
RSO
SE
MRS (Note 4)
RES
SD
Note: 1. When the FR-CV is connected, use sink logic (factory setting). For source
logic, the FR-CV cannot be connected.
2. The DC power supply input from the terminals P (+) and N (-) is used as the
control power supply. The power input terminals R (L1), S (L2), T (L3) must
be open. Accidental connection will damage the inverter.
3. The voltage phases of terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1 and terminals R2/L1,
S2/L2, T2/L3 must be matched before connection.
4. The MRS terminal functions can be changed using Pr.183 "MRS terminal
function selection". When connecting the power regeneration common
converter (FR-CV), use the inverter with "6" (factory-set) in Pr.183. (Refer to
page 171.)
5. Do not insert MCCB between terminals P-N (P (+) - P/L+, N (-) - N/L-).
Opposite polarity of terminals P (+), N (-) will damage the inverter.
6. Make sure terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1 are connected to the power
supply. Running the inverter without connecting the terminals will damage
the power regeneration common converter.
7. Do not remove a jumper across terminal P and P1 except when connecting
a DC reactor.
37
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.2.6
Design information
1) When performing commercial power supply-inverter switch-over operation, securely
provide electrical and mechanical interlocks for the MC1 and MC2 used for electronic
bypass operation.
When there is a commercial power supply-inverter switch-over circuit as shown
below, the inverter will be damaged by leakage current from the power supply due to
arcs generated at the time of switch-over or chattering caused by a sequence error.
2) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure,
provide a magnetic contactor in the inverter's primary circuit and also make up a
sequence which will not switch on the start signal.
If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will
automatically restart as soon as the power is restored.
3) Since the input signals to the control circuit are on a low level, use two or more
parallel micro signal contacts or a twin contact for contact inputs to prevent a contact
fault.
4) Do not apply a large voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control
circuit.
5) Always apply a voltage to the alarm output terminals (A, B, C) via a relay coil, lamp,
etc.
6) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.
1) Electronic bypass
Power
supply
3) Low-level signal contacts
MC1
Interlock
R (L1) U
IM
S (L2) V
MC2
T (L3) W Leakage current
Inverter
Low-level signal contacts
38
Twin contact
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.3
2.3.1
Other Wiring
Power supply harmonics
Power supply harmonics may be generated from the converter section of the inverter,
affecting the power supply equipment, power capacitor, etc. Power supply harmonics
are different in generation source, frequency band and transmission path from radio
frequency (RF) noise and leakage currents. Take the following counter measures.
z The differences between harmonics and RF noises are indicated below:
Environment
Quantitative
understanding
Generated
amount
Immunity of
affected
device
Examples of
safeguard
Harmonics
Normally 40th to 50th degrees or
less (up to 3kHz or less)
To wire paths, power impedance
Approximately proportional to
load capacity
RF Noise
High frequency (several 10kHz to
1GHz order)
Across spaces, distance, laying paths
Occurs randomly, quantitative
understanding is difficult.
According to current fluctuation rate
(larger with faster switching)
Specified in standards for each
device.
Differs according to maker's device
specifications.
Install a reactor.
Increase the distance.
Logical computation is possible
z Countermeasures
The harmonic current generated from the
inverter to the power supply differs according
to various conditions such as the wiring
impedance, whether a power factor
improving reactor is used or not, and output
frequency and output current on load side.
For the output frequency and output current,
the adequate method is to obtain them under
rated load at the maximum operating
frequency.
Power factor
improving DC
reactor
MCCB
Inverter
Item
Frequency
Power factor
improving AC
reactor
Motor
IM
Do not insert power
factor improving capacitor
Note: A power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter's
output side may overheat or be damaged due to the harmonics of the inverter
output. Also, since an excessive current flows in the inverter to activate
overcurrent protection, do not provide a capacitor and surge suppressor on the
inverter output side when the motor is driven by the inverter. To improve the
power factor, insert a power factor improving reactor in the inverter's input or
DC circuit. For details, refer to the FR-A500/E500 series technical information.
39
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.3.2
Harmonic suppression guideline in Japan
Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point via a power
transformer. The harmonic suppression guideline was established to protect other
consumers from these outgoing harmonic currents.
The three-phase 200V input specifications 3.7kW or less (single phase 200V class is
2.2kW or less and single phase 100V class is 0.75kW or less) are previously covered by
"Harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose
products" and other models are covered by "Harmonic suppression guideline for
consumers who receive high voltage or special high voltage". However, the generalpurpose inverter has been excluded from the target products covered by "Harmonic
suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose products" in
January 2004. Later, this guideline was repealed on September 6, 2004. All capacities
of all models are now target products of "Harmonic suppression guideline for
consumers who receive high voltage or special high voltage" (hereinafter referred to as
"Guideline for specific consumers").
"Guideline for specific consumers"
This guideline sets forth the maximum values of harmonic currents outgoing from a
high-voltage or especially high-voltage consumer who will install, add or renew
harmonic generating equipment. If any of the maximum values is exceeded, this
guideline requires that consumer to take certain suppression measures.
Table 1 Maximum Values of Outgoing Harmonic Currents per 1kW Contract Power
Received Power
Voltage
6.6kV
22kV
33kV
5th
7th
11th
13th
17th
19th
23rd
3.5
1.8
1.2
2.5
1.3
0.86
1.6
0.82
0.55
1.3
0.69
0.46
1.0
0.53
0.35
0.9
0.47
0.32
0.76
0.39
0.26
Over
23rd
0.70
0.36
0.24
(1) Application of the harmonic suppression guideline for specific
consumers
New installation/addition/
renewal of equipment
Calculation of equivalent
capacity sum
Not more than
reference capacity
Sum of equivalent
capacities
Over reference
capacity
Calculation of outgoing
harmonic current
Is outgoing harmonic
current equal to or lower
than maximum value?
Not more than
maximum value
Harmonic suppression
technique is not required.
40
Over maximum value
Harmonic suppression
technique is required.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Table 2 Conversion Factors for FR-E500 Series
Class
3
5
Circuit Type
Without reactor
With reactor (AC side)
Three-phase bridge
(Capacitor-smoothed)
With reactor (DC side)
With reactors (AC, DC sides)
Self-excitation threeWhen high power factor
phase bridge
converter is used
Conversion Factor (Ki)
K31 = 3.4
K32 = 1.8
K33 = 1.8
K34 = 1.4
K5 = 0
Table 3 Equivalent Capacity Limits
Received Power Voltage
6.6kV
22/33 kV
66kV or more
Reference Capacity
50 kVA
300 kVA
2000 kVA
Table 4 Harmonic Contents (Values at the fundamental current of 100%)
Reactor
Not used
Used (AC side)
Used (DC side)
Used (AC, DC sides)
5th
65
38
30
28
7th
41
14.5
13
9.1
11th
8.5
7.4
8.4
7.2
13th
7.7
3.4
5.0
4.1
17th
4.3
3.2
4.7
3.2
19th
3.1
1.9
3.2
2.4
23rd
2.6
1.7
3.0
1.6
25th
1.8
1.3
2.2
1.4
1) Calculation of equivalent capacity (P0) of harmonic generating equipment
The "equivalent capacity" is the capacity of a 6-pulse converter converted from the
capacity of consumer's harmonic generating equipment and is calculated with the
following equation. If the sum of equivalent capacities is higher than the limit in Table
3, harmonics must be calculated with the following procedure:
* Rated capacity: Determined by the
P0=Σ (Ki× Pi) [kVA]
Ki : Conversion factor (refer to Table 2) capacity of the applied motor and found
in Table 5. It should be noted that the
Pi : Rated capacity of harmonic
rated capacity used here is used to
generating equipment* [kVA]
calculate a generated harmonic amount
i : Number indicating the conversion
and is different from the power supply
circuit type
capacity required for actual inverter drive.
2) Calculation of outgoing harmonic current
Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converterd from received
power voltage) × operation ratio × harmonic content
• Operation ratio: Operation ratio = actual load factor × operation time ratio
during 30 minutes
• Harmonic content: Found in Table 4.
41
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Table 5 Rated Capacities and Outgoing Harmonic Currents for Inverter Drive
Rated
Applied Current [A]
Motor
(kW)
200V 400V
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
1.61
2.74
5.50
7.93
13.0
19.1
25.6
0.81
1.37
2.75
3.96
6.50
9.55
12.8
6.6kV
Fundamental Wave Current Converted from 6.6kV
Equivalent of
Rated
(No reactor, 100% operation ratio)
Fundamental Capacity
Wave Current
(kVA)
5th
7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
(mA)
49
0.57
31.85 20.09 4.165 3.773 2.107 1.519 1.274 0.882
83
0.97
53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1.494
167
1.95
108.6 68.47 14.20 12.86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006
240
2.81
156.0 98.40 20.40 18.48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320
394
4.61
257.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092
579
6.77
376.1 237.4 49.22 44.58 24.90 17.95 15.05 10.42
776
9.07
504.4 318.2 65.96 59.75 33.37 24.06 20.18 13.97
3) Application of the guideline for specific consumers
If the outgoing harmonic current is higher than; maximum value per 1kW (contract
power) × contract power, a harmonic suppression technique is required.
4) Harmonic suppression techniques
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Item
Reactor installation
(ACL, DCL)
Description
Install a reactor (ACL) on the AC side of the inverter or a reactor
(DCL) on its DC side or both to suppress outgoing harmonic
currents.
High power factor
The converter circuit is switched on-off to convert an input
converter
current waveform into a sine wave, suppressing harmonic
(FR-HC)
currents substantially. The high power factor converter (FR-HC)
is used with the standard accessory.
Installation of power When used with a series reactor, the power factor improving
factor improving
capacitor has an effect of absorbing harmonic currents.
capacitor
Transformer multi- Use two transformers with a phase angle difference of 30° as in
phase operation
-Δ, Δ-Δ combination to provide an effect corresponding to 12
pulses, reducing low-degree harmonic currents.
AC filter
A capacitor and a reactor are used together to reduce
impedances at specific frequencies, producing a great effect of
absorbing harmonic currents.
Passive filter
This filter detects the current of a circuit generating a harmonic
(Active filter)
current and generates a harmonic current equivalent to a
difference between that current and a fundamental wave current
to suppress a harmonic current at a detection point, providing a
great effect of absorbing harmonic currents.
42
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.3.3
EMC measures
Some electromagnetic noises enter the inverter causing it to incorrectly operate, and
others are radiated by the inverter causing misoperation of peripheral devices. Though
the inverter is designed have high immunity performance, it handles low-level signals,
so it requires the following basic measures to be taken. Also, since the inverter chops
the output at high carrier frequencies, it could generate electromagnetic noise. If these
electromagnetic noises cause peripheral devices to malfunction, EMI measures should
be taken to suppress noise. The measures differ slightly depending on noise
propagation paths.
1) Basic techniques
• Do not run the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the inverter in
parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
• Use twisted shield cables for the detector connecting and control signal cables and
connect the sheathes of the shield cables to terminal SD.
• Earth (ground) the inverter, motor, etc. at one point.
2) Techniques to reduce electromagnetic noises that enter and malfunction the inverter
When devices which generate electromagnetic noise (devices which use magnetic
contactors, magnetic brakes, many relays, for example) are installed near the
inverter, the inverter may be malfunctioned by electromagnetic noises. The following
measures must be taken:
• Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate electromagnetic noise to
suppress electromagnetic noise.
• Fit data line filters (refer to page 46) to signal cables.
• Earth (ground) the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with
cable clamp metal.
43
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
3) Techniques to reduce electromagnetic noises that are radiated by the inverter to
malfunction peripheral devices (EMI measures) periperal devices
Inverter-generated noises are largely classified into those radiated by the cables
connected to the inverter and inverter main circuit (I/O), those electromagnetically
and electrostatically inducted to the signal cables of the peripheral devices close to
the main circuit power supply, and those transmitted through the power supply
cables.
Inverter-generated
electromagnetic noise
Air-propagated
electromagnetic
noise
Noise directly radiated by
inverter
··· Path 1)
Noise radiated by power
cables
··· Path 2)
Noise radiated by motor
cables
··· Path 3)
Magnetic induc··· Path 4), 5)
tion noise
Static induction
noise
··· Path 6)
Noise propagated through
power cables
Cable propagated noise
Leakage noise from earth
(ground) cable due to
leakage current
5)
7)
Telephone
7)
2)
1)
Instrument
Receiver
Sensor
power supply
3) Inverter
6)
1)
4)
Motor IM
44
3) Sensor
8)
··· Path 7)
··· Path 8)
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Noise Path
Measures
1), 2), 3)
When devices that handle low-level signals and are liable to
malfunction due to electromagnetic noises, e.g. instruments,
receivers and sensors, are contained in the enclosure that contains
the inverter or when their signal cables are run near the inverter, the
devices may be malfunctioned by air-propagated electromagnetic
noises. The following measures must be taken:
(1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the
inverter.
(2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the
inverter.
(3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O
cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
(4) Insert common mode filters onto I/O and capacitors between the
inputs lines to suppress cable-radiated noises.
(5) Use shielded cables for signal cables and power cables and run
them in individual metal conduits to further reduce effects.
4), 5), 6)
When the signal cables are run in parallel with or bundled with the
power cables, magnetic and static induction noises may be
propagated to the signal cables causing misoperation of the devices
and the following measures must be taken:
(1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the
inverter.
(2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the
inverter.
(3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O
cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
(4) Use shielded cables for signal cables and power cables and run
them in individual metal conduits to further reduce effects.
7)
When the power supplies of the peripheral devices are connected to
the power supply of the inverter within the same line, invertergenerated noise may flow back through the power supply cables
causing misoperation of the devices and the following measures
must be taken:
(1) Install the capacitor type filter (FR-BIF) to the power cables (input
cables) of the inverter.
(2) Install the common mode filter (FR-BLF, FR-BSF01) to the power
cables (I/O cables) of the inverter.
8)
When a closed loop circuit is formed by connecting the peripheral
device wiring to the inverter, leakage current may flow through the
earth (ground) cable of the inverter causing misoperation of the
device. In such a case, disconnection of the earth (ground) cable of
the device may cause the device to operate properly.
45
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
z Data line filter
As immunity measures it may effective,
other cable.
z Data examples
By decreasing the carrier frequency, the
noise terminal voltage* can be reduced.
Use Pr. 72 to set the carrier frequency to
a low value (1kHz).
Though motor noise increases at a low
carrier frequency, selection of Soft-PWM
will make it unoffending.
provide a data line filter for the detector or
By using shielded cables as signal
cables, induction noise can be reduced
greatly (1/10 to 1/100). Induction noise
can also be reduced by moving the
signal cables away from the inverter
output cables.
(Separation of 30cm reduces noise to 1/
2 to 1/3.)
By fitting the FR-BSF01 or BLF on the
inverter output side, induction noise to
the signal cables can be reduced.
Noise induced to signal cables by
inverter output cables
Conditions
Average terminal voltage
0dB=1μV
120dB=1V
Carrier frequency 10kHz
Induction voltage (dB)
Noise terminal voltage (dB)
Differences between noise terminal
voltages at different carrier frequencies
Conditions
Inverter: FR-E520-3.7K
Motor: FR-JR 4P 3.7kW
Output frequency: 30Hz
Twisted pair cable Noise form: Normal mode
60
5cm
Inverter d(cm) Motor
40
Coaxial cable
FR-BLF
20
FR-BSF01
Terminal
(4T)
0 10 20 30 40 50
Measuring instrument
Line-to-line distance d (cm)
100
120
100
80
60
40
Carrier frequency 1kHz
20
0
0.1
1
10
Noise frequency (MHz)
80
Parallel cable
* Noise terminal voltage:Represents the magnitude of noise propagated from the
inverter to the power supply.
z EMC measures
Install common mode filter
FR-BLF
to inverter input side.
FR-BSF01
Reduce
Control box carrier frequency.
Inverter
power supply
Install capacitor type filter
FR-BIF to inverter input side.
FRBSF01
Inverter
FRBIF
Separate inverter and power line
by more than 30cm and at least
10cm from sensor circuit.
Control power
Power supply
for sensor
supply
Do not earth (ground) control
box directly.
Do not earth (ground) control cable.
46
FRBSF01
Install common mode filter
FR-BLF
to inverter output
FR-BSF01
side.
Motor
IM
Use 4-core cable for motor power
cable and use one wire as
earth (ground) cable.
Use twisted pair shielded cable.
Sensor
Do not earth (ground) shield but connect it to
signal common cable.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.3.4
Leakage currents and countermeasures
Due to the static capacitance existing in the inverter I/O wiring and motor, leakage
currents flow through them. Since their values depend on the static capacitance, carrier
frequency, etc., take the following measures.
(1) To-earth (ground) leakage currents
Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's own line but also into the other
lines through the earth (ground) cable, etc. These leakage currents may operate earth
(ground) leakage circuit breakers and earth (ground) leakage relays unnecessarily.
z Countermeasures
• If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the carrier frequency (Pr. 72) of the
inverter.
Note that motor noise increases. Selection of Soft-PWM (Pr. 240) will make it
unoffending.
• By using earth (ground) leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonic and surge
suppression in the inverter's own line and other line, operation can be performed
with the carrier frequency kept high (with low noise).
z To-earth (ground) leakage current
• Take caution as long wiring length will increase leakage currents. Decreasing the
carrier frequency of the inverter reduces leakage currents.
• Increasing the motor capacity increases leakage currents. The leakage currents of
the 400V class are higher than those of the 200V class.
(2) Line-to-line leakage currents
Harmonics of leakage currents flowing in static capacities between the inverter output
cables may operate the external thermal relay unnecessarily.
MCCB
Power
supply
Thermal relay
Motor
Inverter
IM
Line static capacitances
Line-to-line leakage current path
47
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
z Countermeasures
• Use the electronic thermal relay function of the inverter.
• Decrease the carrier frequency. Note that motor noise increases. Selection of SoftPWM will make it unoffending.
To ensure that the motor is protected not to be influenced by line-to-line leakage
currents, we recommend the protection method which uses a temperature sensor
to directly detect motor temperature.
2.3.5
Inverter-driven 400V class motor
In the PWM type inverter, a surge voltage attributable to wiring constants is generated at
the motor terminals.
Especially for a 400V class motor, the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation.
When the 400V class motor is driven by the inverter, consider the following measures:
z Measures
It is recommended to take either of the following measures:
(1) Rectifying the motor insulation
For the 400V class motor, use an insulation-enhanced motor. Specifically,
1) Specify the "400V class inverter-driven, insulation-enhanced motor".
2) For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor,
use the "inverter-driven, dedicated motor".
Note: If the wiring length between the motor and inverter is 40m or longer, set Pr. 240
to long wiring mode in addition to the above countermeasures to operate the
inverter. (Refer to page 127 for Pr. 240 "Soft-PWM selection".)
(2) Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side
On the secondary side of the inverter, connect the optional surge voltage suppression
filter (FR-ASF-H).
48
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.3.6
Peripheral devices
(1) Selection of peripheral devices
Check the inverter type of the inverter to be used with the inverter you purchased.
Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to the capacity.
Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:
Single-phase 100V Single-phase 200V
Three-phase 400V
Three-phase 200V
Inverter Type
Motor
Output
(kW)
Power
Supply
Capacity
(kVA)
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
(MCCB) or Earth (Ground)
Leakage Circuit Breaker (NV)
(Note 6)
Standard
With power
factor
improving
reactor
Magnetic
Contactor (MC)
A
B
C
FR-E520-0.1K
0.1
0.4
30AF 5A
30AF 5A
S-N11
S-N18
S-N20
FR-E520-0.2K
0.2
0.8
30AF 5A
30AF 5A
S-N18 S-N20
S-N20
FR-E520-0.4K
0.4
1.5
30AF 5A
30AF 5A
S-N18 S-N21
S-N21
FR-E520-0.75K
0.75
2.5
30AF 10A
30AF 10A
S-N18 S-N21
S-N21
S-N50
FR-E520-1.5K
1.5
4.5
30AF 15A
30AF 15A
S-N21 S-N25
FR-E520-2.2K
2.2
5.5
30AF 20A
30AF 15A
S-N10
FR-E520-3.7K
3.7
9
30AF 30A
30AF 30A
S-N20, S-N21
FR-E520-5.5K
5.5
12
50AF 50A
50AF 40A
S-N25
FR-E520-7.5K
7.5
17
100AF 60A
50AF 50A
S-N35
FR-E540-0.4K
0.4
1.5
30AF 5A
30AF 5A
S-N10
FR-E540-0.75K
0.75
2.5
30AF 5A
30AF 5A
S-N10
FR-E540-1.5K
1.5
4.5
30AF 10A
30AF 10A
S-N10
FR-E540-2.2K
2.2
5.5
30AF 15A
30AF 10A
S-N10
FR-E540-3.7K
3.7
9
30AF 20A
30AF 15A
S-N20, S-N21
FR-E540-5.5K
5.5
12
30AF 30A
30AF 20A
S-N20, S-N21
FR-E540-7.5K
7.5
17
30AF 30A
30AF 30A
FR-E520S-0.1K
0.1
0.4
30AF 5A
30AF 5A
S-N18 S-N20
S-N20
FR-E520S-0.2K
0.2
0.8
30AF 10A
30AF 10A
S-N18 S-N21
S-N21
FR-E520S-0.4K
0.4
1.5
30AF 10A
30AF 10A
S-N21 S-N25
S-N50
FR-E520S-0.75K
0.75
2.5
30AF 15A
30AF 15A
S-N21 S-N25
S-N50
FR-E510W-0.1K
0.1
0.5
30AF 10A
30AF 10A
S-N18 S-N21
S-N21
FR-E510W-0.2K
0.2
0.9
30AF 15A
30AF 15A
S-N21 S-N25
S-N25
FR-E510W-0.4K
0.4
1.5
30AF 20A
30AF 20A
S-N21 S-N25
S-N50
FR-E510W-0.75K
0.75
2.5
30AF 30A
30AF 30A
S-N21 S-N25
S-N50
49
2
S-N20, S-N21
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Note:1. • Select the MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
• Install one MCCB per inverter.
MCCB
INV
IM
MCCB
INV
IM
Power supply capacity(kVA)
2. The inverter input side magnetic
Power factor
improving
contactor to be chosen differs
AC reactor
between the applicable ranges A, B
range
500
and C shown on the right, depending
B
A
on the power supply capacity and
C
wiring length. For the FR-E520-0.4K
50
to 1.5K, FR-E520S-0.4K to 0.75K
0
10
20 Wiring length(m)
and FR-E510W-0.4K to 0.75K,
Note: Power supply used has the above
recommended size.
choose the S-N10 when the power
factor improving reactor (FR-BEL or
FR-BAL) is used.
3. When the inverter capacity is greater than the motor capacity, choose the
MCCB and magnetic contactor in accordance with the inverter type and
choose the cables and power factor improving reactor in accordance with the
motor output.
4. When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault
(short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of
the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
5. For installations in the United States or Canada, the circuit breaker must be
inverse time or instantaneous trip type.
z Installation and selection of moulded case circuit breaker
Install a moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) in the power supply side for protection of
the inverter's primary wiring. Refer to the previous table and choose the MCCB
according to the inverter's power supply side power factor (which changes with the
power supply voltage, output frequency and load). Especially for a completely
electromagnetic type MCCB, the one with a larger capacity must be selected since its
operational characteristics change with harmonic currents. (Check the data of the
corresponding breaker for confirmation.) Also the earth (ground) leakage circuit breaker
used should be our product durable against harmonics/surges.
50
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
z Power factor improving reactor
Power Factor
Improving AC Reactor
Power Factor
Improving DC Reactor
FR-E520-0.1K
FR-BAL-0.4K (Note 1)
FR-BEL-0.4K (Note 1)
FR-E520-0.2K
FR-BAL-0.4K (Note 1)
FR-BEL-0.4K (Note 1)
FR-E520-0.4K
FR-BAL-0.4K
FR-BEL-0.4K
FR-E520-0.75K
FR-BAL-0.75K
FR-BEL-0.75K
FR-E520-1.5K
FR-BAL-1.5K
FR-BEL-1.5K
FR-E520-2.2K
FR-BAL-2.2K
FR-BEL-2.2K
FR-E520-3.7K
FR-BAL-3.7K
FR-BEL-3.7K
FR-E520-5.5K
FR-BAL-5.5K
FR-BEL-5.5K
FR-E520-7.5K
FR-BAL-7.5K
FR-BEL-7.5K
FR-E540-0.4K
FR-BAL-H0.4K
FR-BEL-H0.4K
Singlephase 100V
Singlephase 200V
Three-phase 400V
Three-phase 200V
Inverter Model
FR-E540-0.75K
FR-BAL-H0.75K
FR-BEL-H0.75K
FR-E540-1.5K
FR-BAL-H1.5K
FR-BEL-H1.5K
FR-E540-2.2K
FR-BAL-H2.2K
FR-BEL-H2.2K
FR-E540-3.7K
FR-BAL-H3.7K
FR-BEL-H3.7K
FR-E540-5.5K
FR-BAL-H5.5K
FR-BEL-H5.5K
FR-E540-7.5K
FR-BAL-H7.5K
FR-BEL-H7.5K
FR-E520S-0.1K
FR-BAL-0.4K (Note 1)
FR-BEL-0.4K (Note 1)
FR-E520S-0.2K
FR-BAL-0.4K (Note 1)
FR-BEL-0.4K (Note 1)
FR-E520S-0.4K
FR-BAL-0.75K (Note 1)
FR-BEL-0.75K (Note 1)
FR-E520S-0.75K
FR-BAL-1.5K (Note 1)
FR-BEL-1.5K (Note 1)
FR-E510W-0.1K
FR-BAL-0.75K (Note 1)
⎯ (Note 2)
FR-E510W-0.2K
FR-BAL-1.5K (Note 1)
⎯ (Note 2)
FR-E510W-0.4K
FR-BAL-2.2K (Note 1)
⎯ (Note 2)
FR-E510W-0.75K
FR-BAL-3.7K (Note 1)
⎯ (Note 2)
Note:1. The power factor may be slightly lower.
2. The single-phase 100V power input models does not allow the power factor
improving DC reactor to be fitted.
51
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
When the inverter is connected near a largeInverter
MCCB FR-BAL
capacity power supply transformer (500kVA or more,
R
X R (L ) U
1
wiring length 10m maximum) or there is power
Power
S
Y S (L ) V
2
capacitor switch-over, excessive peak currents may supply
T
Z T (L3) W
flow into the power input circuit and damage the
P(+)P1
converter circuit. In such a case, the power supply
improving reactor (FR-BEL or FR-BAL) must be
FR-BEL
installed.
When the FR-E510W-0.4K is connected to a singlePower
phase 100V class output power transformer (in Power 1500 factor
improving
excess of 50kVA capacity), install the power factor supply 1000 reactor
range
capacity
improving reactor (FR-BAL-2.2K) to improve (kVA) 500
reliability
0
10 Wiring length(m)
(2) Selecting the rated sensitivity current for the earth (ground) leakage
circuit breaker
When using the earth (ground) leakage circuit breaker with the inverter circuit, select its
rated sensitivity current as follows, independently of the PWM carrier frequency:
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
2 3.5
5.5
Leakage current example of threephase induction motor during
commercial power supply operation
(200V 60Hz)
Leakage current (mA)
Leakage current (mA)
Example of leakage current per 1km in
cable path during commercial power
supply operation when the CV cable is
routed in metal conduit
(200V 60Hz)
8 14 22 38 80 150
30 60 100
Cable size (mm2)
2.0
1.0
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
1.5
3.7 7.5 15 22 37 55
5.5 11 18.5 30 45
2.2
Motor capacity (kW)
• Breaker for harmonic and surge
Rated sensitivity current: IΔn ≥ 10×(lg1+Ign+lg2+lgm)
• Standard breaker
Rated sensitivity current: IΔn ≥ 10×{lg1+lgn+3×(lg2+lgm)}
lg1, lg2 : Leakage currents in wire path during commercial power supply operation
lgn*
: Leakage current of noise filter on inverter input side
lgm
: Leakage current of motor during commercial power supply operation
* Note the leakage current value of the noise filter installed on the inverter input
side.
52
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
<Example>
5.5mm2 × 5m 5.5mm2 × 70m
NV Noise filter
Inverter
IM
Ig1 Ign
Ig2
3φ
200V 2.2kW
Igm
Note:1. Install the earth (ground) leakage breaker (ELB) on the input side of the
inverter.
2. Earth (Gground) fault on the secondary side of the inverter can be detected at
the running frequency of 120Hz or lower.
3. In the
connection neutral point earthed (grounded) system, the sensitivity
current becomes worse for earth (ground) faults on the inverter secondary
side. Earthing (Ggrounding) must conform to the requirements of national and
local safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class
1 and other applicable standards)
4. When the breaker is installed on the secondary side of the inverter, it may be
unnecessarily operated by harmonics if the effective value is less than the
rating. In this case, do not install the breaker since the eddy current, hysteresis
loss, and the temperature all increase.
5. General products indicate the following models.
BV-C1, BC-V, NVB, NV-L, NV-G2N, NV-G3NA, NV-2F, earth (ground) leakage
relay (except NV-ZHA), NV with AA neutral wire open-phase protection
The other models are designed for harmonic and surge suppression
NV-C/NV-S/MN series, NV30-FA, NV50-FA, BV-C2, earth (ground) leakage
alarm breaker (NF-Z), NV-ZHA, NV-H
Breaker for Harmonic
and Surge
Leakage current (Ig1)
(mA)
33 ×
Leakage current (Ign)
(mA)
Standard Breaker
5m
1000m
= 0.17
0 (without noise filter)
Leakage current (Ig2)
(mA)
33 ×
Motor leakage
current (Igm) (mA)
70m
1000m
= 2.31
0.18
Total leakage current (mA)
Rated sensitivity current
(mA) ( ≥ Ig × 10)
53
2.66
7.64
30
100
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.3.7
Power off and magnetic contactor (MC)
(1) Inverter primary side magnetic contactor (MC)
On the inverter primary side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following
purposes. (Refer to page 49 for selection.)
1) To release the inverter from the power supply when the inverter protective function
is activated or the drive becomes faulty (e.g. emergency stop operation)
When cycle operation or heavy-duty operation is performed with an optional brake
resistor connected, overheat and burnout of the discharging resistor can be
prevented if a regenerative brake transistor is damaged due to insufficient heat
capacity of the discharging resistor and excess regenerative brake duty.
2) To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an
inverter stop made by a power failure
3) To rest the inverter for an extended period of time
The control power supply for inverter is always running and consumes a little
power. When stopping the inverter for a long time, switching inverter power off
saves power slightly.
4) To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and
inspection work
As the inverter's primary MC is used for the above purposes, select class
JEM1038-AC3 for the inverter input side current when making an emergency stop
during normal operation.
REMARKS
The MC may be switched on/off to start/stop the inverter. However, since repeated
inrush currents at power-on will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is
about 100,000 times), frequent starts and stops must be avoided.
Turn on/off the inverter start controlling terminals (STF, STR) to run/stop the inverter.
z Inverter Start/Stop Circuit
Example
As shown on the right, always
use the start signal (ON or OFF
across terminals STF or STRSD) to make a start or stop.
(Refer to page 18.)
MCCB
MC
R
Power
supply
U
S
V
T
W
To
motor
T (*1)
Inverter
Operation ready
REMARKS
OFF
*1 When the power supply is
400V class, install a stepdown transformer.
A
ON
B
MC
MC
C
RA
STF(STR)
SD
Start/Stop
MC
Operation
RA
OFF
RA
(2) Handling of secondary side magnetic contactor
Note that if it is switched off then on again during operation when the magnetic
contactor is installed between the inverter and motor, a large inrush current may flow,
affecting the motor.
54
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.3.8
Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips to output an alarm. However, an alarm output
signal may not be output at an inverter alarm occurrence when the detection circuit or
output circuit fails, etc. Although Mitsubishi assures best quality products, provide an
interlock which uses inverter status output signals to prevent accidents such as damage
to machine when the inverter fails for some reason and at the same time consider the
system configuration where failsafe from outside the inverter, without using the inverter,
is enabled even if the inverter fails.
(1) Interlock method which uses the inverter status output signals
By combining the inverter status output signals to provide an interlock as shown
below, an inverter alarm can be detected.
No
Interlock Method
Check Method
Used Signals
Refer
to
Page
Inverter protective
function operation
Operation check of an
alarm contact
Circuit error detection by
negative logic
Alarm output signal
(ABC signal)
173
2)
Inverter running
status
Operation ready signal
check
Operation ready signal
(RY signal)
173
3)
Inverter running
status
Logic check of the start
signal and running signal
Start signal
(STF signal, STR signal)
Running signal
(RUN signal)
16
4)
Inverter running
status
Logic check of the start
signal and output current
Start signal
(STF signal, STR signal)
Output current detection
signal
(Y12 signal)
16, 173
1) Check by the inverter alarm output
signal
When the inverter protective
function is activated to stop the
inverter output, the alarm output
signal (ABC signal) is output (ABC
signal is assigned to terminal ABC
in the initial setting).
Check that the inverter functions
properly.
Output frequency
1)
ABC
(when output
at NC contact)
RES
Inverter alarm occurrence
(output shutoff)
Time
ON OFF
ON OFF
Reset processing
(about 1s)
Reset ON
55
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
ON
OFF
ON
STF
OFF
ON
RH
Output frequency
2) Checking the inverter operating
status by the inverter operation
ready completion signal
Operation ready signal (RY signal)
is output when the inverter power is
on and the inverter becomes
operative.
Check if the RY signal is output
after powering on the inverter.
Power
supply
DC injection brake
operation point
DC injection
brake operation
Pr. 13
"starting frequency"
Time
Reset
3) Checking the inverter operating
processing
status by the start signal input to
the inverter and inverter running RY
ON
OFF
signal.
ON
OFF
RUN
The inverter running signal (RUN signal) is output when the inverter is running
(RUN signal is assigned to terminal RUN in the initial setting).
Check if RUN signal is output when inputting the start signal to the inverter
(forward signal is STF signal and reverse signal is STR signal). For logic check,
note that RUN signal is output for the period from the inverter decelerates until
output to the motor is stopped, configure a sequence considering the inverter
deceleration time.
4) Checking the motor operating status by the start signal input to the inverter and
inverter output current detection signal.
The output current detection signal (Y12 signal) is output when the inverter
operates and currents flows in the motor. Check if Y12 signal is output when
inputting the start signal to the inverter (forward signal is STF signal and reverse
signal is STR signal). Note that the current level at which Y12 signal is output is set
to 150% of the inverter rated current in the initial setting, it is necessary to adjust
the level to around 20% using no load current of the motor as reference with Pr.
150 "output current detection level".
For logic check, as same as the inverter running signal (RUN signal), the inverter
outputs for the period from the inverter decelerates until output to the motor is
stopped, configure a sequence considering the inverter deceleration time.
Output Signal
Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 Setting
ABC
RY
RUN
99
11
0
Y12
12
y When using various signals,
assign functions to Pr. 190 to Pr.
192 (output terminal function
selection) referring to the table
on the left.
Note: Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal
function selection) may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming
the function of each terminal.
56
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(2) Backup method outside the inverter
Even if the interlock is provided by the inverter status signal, enough failsafe is not
ensured depending on the failure status of the inverter itself. For example, even if
the interlock is provided using the inverter alarm output signal, start signal and
RUN signal output, there is a case where an alarm output signal is not output and
RUN signal is kept output even if an inverter alarm occurs.
Provide a speed detector to detect the motor speed and current detector to detect
the motor current and consider the backup system such as checking up as below
according to the level of importance of the system.
1) Start signal and actual operation check
Check the motor running and motor current while the start signal is input to the
inverter by comparing the start signal to the inverter and detected speed of the
speed detector or detected current of the current detector. Note that the motor
current runs as the motor is running for the period until the motor stops since the
inverter starts decelerating even if the start signal turns off. For the logic check,
configure a sequence considering the inverter deceleration time. In addition, it is
recommended to check the three-phase current when using the current detector.
2) Command speed and actual operation check
Check if there is no gap between the actual speed and commanded speed by
comparing the inverter speed command and detected speed of the speed detector.
Controller
System failure
Inverter
Sensor
(speed, temperature,
air volume, etc.)
To the alarm detection sensor
57
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.3.9
Instructions for UL, cUL
(Standard to comply with: UL 508C, CSA C22.2 No. 14)
(1) Installation
The above types of inverter have been approved as products for use in enclosure and
approval tests were conducted under the following conditions. For enclosure design, refer
to these conditions so that the ambient temperature of the inverter is 50°C or less.
z 200V class, 100V class
Inverter Type
FR-E520 -3.7K
Cabinet (enclosure)
Size (Unit: mm)
W
H
D
255×192×218
Vent Hole Area
• 55% of both the side of the
Cabinet
• Width of each slit: 3.2mm
• To be provided on each of
the upper side areas.
Cooling Fan
Installed at the enclosure top
to suck air from inside the
enclosure to the outside.
(Fan air flow: 2 × 0.59m 3/min
or more)
z 400V class
Design the enclosure so that the ambient temperature, humidity and ambience of the
inverter will satisfy the above specifications. (Refer to page 233.)
Branch circuit protection
For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection must be provided, in
accordance with the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes.
For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance
with the Canada Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes.
(2) Wiring of the power supply and motor
Screw the cables wired to the input (R, S, T) <L1, L2, L3> and output (U, V, W) terminals
and control circuit of the inverter to the specified tightening torque using UL-recognized,
75°C or higher rated copper wires and round crimping terminals. Crimp the crimping
terminals with the crimping tool recommended by the terminal maker.
(3) Short circuit ratings
•100V class
Suitable For Use in A Circuit Capable of Delivering Not More Than 100 kA rms
Symmetrical Amperes, 132 V Maximum.
•200V class
Suitable For Use in A Circuit Capable of Delivering Not More Than 100 kA rms
Symmetrical Amperes, 264 V Maximum.
•400V class
Suitable For Use in A Circuit Capable of Delivering Not More Than 100 kA rms
Symmetrical Amperes, 528 V Maximum.
58
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(4) Motor overload protection
When using the electronic thermal relay function as motor overload protection, set the
rated motor current in Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay".
When connecting two or more motors to the inverter, install external thermal relays for
individual motors
Reference: Motor overload protection characteristics
Operation time (s)
50% setting 100% setting
(Note 1, 2) (Note 2)
240
180
value) of the rated inverter output current.
Electronic overcurrent (Note 2) The % value denotes the percentage of
protection for transistor
the current value to the rated inverter
protection
120
60
0
Protection activating range
Range on the right of characteristic curve
30Hz or higher
Normal operating range
(Note 3)
Range on the left of characteristic curve
20Hz
10Hz
(Note 1) When you set the 50% value (current
50
100
150 180200
Inverter output current (%)
(% to rated inverter output current)
output current, not to the rated motor current.
(Note 3) This characteristic curve will be described
even under operation of 6Hz or higher
when you set the electronic overcurrent
protection dedicated to the Mitsubishi
constant-torque motor.
2
59
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.3.10 Instructions for compliance with the European Directive
(The products conforming to the Low Voltage Directive carry the CE mark.)
(1) EMC Directive
1) Our view of transistorized inverters for the EMC Directive
A transistorized inverter is a component designed for installation in a control box and
for use with the other equipment to control the equipment/device.
Therefore, we understand that the EMC Directive does not apply directly to
transistorized inverters. For this reason, we do not place the CE mark on the
transistorized inverters. (The CE mark is placed on inverters in accordance with the
Low Voltage Directive.) The European power drive manufacturers' organization
(CEMEP) also holds this point of view.
2) Compliance
We understand that the transistorized inverters are not covered directly by the EMC
Directive. However, the EMC Directive applies to machines/equipment into which
transistorized inverters have been incorporated, and these machines and equipment
must carry the CE marks. Hence, we prepared the technical information "EMC
Installation Guidelines" (information number BCN-A21041-202) so that machines and
equipment incorporating transistorized inverters may conform to the EMC Directive
more easily.
3) Outline of installation method
Install an inverter using the following methods:
* Use the inverter with an European Standard-compliant noise filter.
* For wiring between the inverter and motor, use shielded cables or run them in a
metal piping and earth (ground) the cables on the inverter and motor sides with the
shortest possible distance.
* Insert a common mode filter and ferrite core into the power and control lines as
required.
Full information including the European Standard-compliant noise filter
specifications are written in the technical information "EMC Installation Guidelines"
(BCN-A21041-202). Please contact your sales representative.
(2) Low Voltage Directive
1) Our view of transistorized inverters for the Low Voltage Directive
Transistorized inverters are covered by the Low Voltage Directive (Standard to
comply with: DIN VDE0160 (200V class), EN50178 (400V class, 100V class)).
2) Compliance
We have self-confirmed our inverters as products compliant to the Low Voltage
Directive and place the CE mark on the inverters.
60
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
3) Outline of instructions
* In the 400V class inverters, the rated input voltage range is three-phase, 380V to
415V, 50Hz/60Hz.
* Connect the equipment to the earth (ground) securely. Do not use an earth
(ground) leakage circuit breaker as an electric shock protector without connecting
the equipment to the earth (ground).
* Wire the earth (ground) terminal independently. (Do not connect two or more
cables to one terminal.)
* The wire size on pages 22 and 24 are shown for following conditions
• Ambient Temp: 40°C maximum
• Wire installation: On wall without ducts or conduits
If conditions are different from above, select appropriate wire according to
EN60204 ANNEX C TABLE 5.
* Use the moulded case circuit breaker and magnetic contactor which conform to the
EN or IEC Standard.
Design notice: Where residual-current-operated protective device (RCD) is used
for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only RCD of Type
B is allowed on the supply side of this Electronic Equipment (EE).
Otherwise another protective measure shall be applied such as
separation of the EE from the environment by double or reinforced
insulation or isolation of EE and supply system by a transformer.
(Extract from EN51078)
* Use the inverter under the conditions of overvoltage category II and contamination
level 2 or higher specified in IEC664.
(a) To use the inverter under the conditions of overvoltage category II, put an
insulated transformer or surge absorber which conform to the EN or IEC
standard on the inverter input side.
(b) To meet the contamination level 2, install the inverter in a control box protected
against ingress of water, oil, carbon, dust, etc. (IP54 or higher).
* On the input and output of the inverter, use cables of the type and size set forth in
EN60204 Appendix C.
* The operating capacity of the relay outputs (terminal symbols A, B, C) should be
30VDC, 0.3A.
* The terminals indicated as the input and output terminals for control circuit on page
16 are isolated safely from the main circuit.
Environment
During
operation
In storage
During
transportation
Ambient Temperature
-10°C to +50°C
-20°C to +65°C
-20°C to +65°C
Ambient Humidity
90% RH or less
90% RH or less
90% RH or less
Maximum Altitude
1,000 m
1,000 m
10,000 m
Details are given in the technical information "Low Voltage Directive Conformance
Guide" (BCN-A21041-203). Please contact your sales representative.
61
2
MEMO
62
CHAPTER 3
OPERATION/CONTROL
This chapter provides the basic "operation/control" for use of this
product.
Always read this chapter before using the equipment.
Chapter 1
3.1 Pre-Operation Information ....................... 64
3.2 About the Operation Panel ...................... 67
3.3 Operation ................................................. 74
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
63
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.1
Pre-Operation Information
3.1.1 Types of operation modes
The inverter can be operated in any of "PU operation mode", "external operation mode",
"combined operation mode" and "communication operation mode". Prepare required
instruments and parts according to the operation mode. For the way of changing the
operation mode, refer to page 70.
(1) PU operation mode
(factory setting, Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = 1)
The inverter is operated from the operation panel or parameter
unit.
Use Pr. 146 "frequency setting command selection" to choose
the way to make frequency setting from the operation panel.
For the Pr. 146 setting method, refer to page 71.
Pr. 146 = 0: Frequency setting using the built-in frequency
setting potentiometer (factory setting)
Pr. 146 = 1: Digital frequency setting using
/
key
Preparation
• Operation unit...................Operation panel (equipped as standard) or parameter unit
(FR-PU04)
• Connection cable..............To be prepared for use of the operation panel away from
the inverter or for use of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).
FR-CB2†† (option)
• FR-E5P (option) ...............To be prepared for use of the operation panel away from
the inverter. It is available as a set of operation panel cover
and connection cable junction adaptor.
(2) External operation mode (Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = 2)
The inverter is operated using an external start signal and an
external frequency setting signal.
Preparation
• Start signal ....................... Switch, relay, etc.
• Frequency setting signal ..0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC
signals or multiple speeds from a
potentiometer or outside the
inverter
Note: Operation cannot be started by the start signal alone. Both the start signal and
frequency setting signal are required to run the inverter.
64
OPERATION/CONTROL
(3) Combined operation mode 1 (Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = 3)
The start signal is an external signal.
The frequency setting signal is set using the operation panel or
parameter unit.
Use Pr. 146 "frequency setting command selection" to choose
the way to make frequency setting from the operation panel. For
the Pr. 146 setting method, refer to page 71.
Pr. 146 = 0: Frequency setting using the built-in frequency
setting potentiometer (factory setting)
Pr. 146 = 1: Digital frequency setting using
/
key
Preparation
• Start signal ....................... Switch, relay, etc.
• Operation unit .................. Operation panel (equipped as
standard) or parameter unit (FRPU04)
• Connection cable .............Refer to (1) PU operation mode.
• FR-E5P (option) ...............Refer to (1) PU operation mode.
(4) Combined operation mode 2 (Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = 4)
The start signal is entered from the operation command key
of the operation panel.
The frequency setting signal is set using the external
frequency setting signal.
Preparation
• Frequency setting signal ..0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA
DC signals from an external
potentiometer or from outside
the inverter
• Operation unit .................. Operation panel (equipped as
standard) or parameter unit
(FR-PU04)
• Connection cable .............Refer to (1) PU operation mode.
• FR-E5P (option) ...............Refer to (1) PU operation mode.
65
3
OPERATION/CONTROL
(5) Communication operation mode
(Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = 0 or 1)
Communication operation can be performed by connecting a personal computer and
the PU connector with the RS-485 communication cable. The inverter setup software
(FR-SW†-SETUP-WE (or -WJ for Japanese Version)) is available as an FR-E500
inverter start-up support software package.
Preparation
• Connection cable......................Connector: RJ45 connector
Cable: Cable conforming to EIA568
(e.g. 10BASE-T cable)
• Personal computer ...................Refer to the instruction manual of the inverter setup
software for hardware requirements of the inverter
setup software.
• RS-485, RS-232C converter ....To be prepared when the communication port of the
personal computer has RS-232C specifications.
3.1.2 Power on
Before switching power on, check the following.
z Installation check
Make sure that the inverter is installed correctly in a proper location. (Refer to page
14.)
z Wiring check
Make sure that the main and control circuits are wired correctly.
Make sure that the options and peripheral devices are selected and connected
correctly. (Refer to page 16.)
z Switch power on.
Power-on is complete if the operation panel LED shows correct data or the POWER
lamp (lit only when the operation panel is removed) is lit and the ALARM lamp is off.
66
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.2
About the Operation Panel
With the operation panel, you can run the inverter, set the frequency, monitor the
operation command display, set parameters, and display an error.
3.2.1
Names and functions of the operation panel
Cover opened
Display
LED 4 digits
Setting key
Mode key
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
RUN
STOP
RESET
RUN key
MODE
SET
FWD
MIN
MAX
REV
STOP
RESET
MAX
Forward key
STOP/RESET key
Unit indication
Operation status
indication
Reverse key
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
MIN
STOP/RESET key
UP/DOWN key
Built-in frequency
setting potentiometer
z Key indication
Key
Description
key
Built-in frequency setting
potentiometer
RUN
Used to give a start rotation command.
You can set a frequency on an analog basis.
MODE
key
You can select the operation mode or setting mode.
SET
key
You can determine the frequency and parameter setting.
/
FWD
REV
STOP
RESET
key
key
key
key
• Used to increase or decrease the running frequency
consecutively. Hold down this key to change the frequency.
• Press this key in the setting mode to change the parameter
setting consecutively.
Used to give a forward rotation command.
Used to give a reverse rotation command.
• Used to stop operation.
• Used to reset the inverter when its output is stopped by the
activated protective function.
z Unit indications, operating status indications
Indication
Hz
A
RUN
MON
PU
EXT
Description
Lit to indicate frequency.
(Flickers or lit when Pr.52 "operation panel/PU main display data selection"
= "100". Refer to page 113.)
Lit to indicate the current.
Lit while the inverter is operating. Lit to indicate forward rotation, and flickers
to indicate reverse rotation.
Lit in the monitor display mode.
Lit in the PU operation mode.
Lit in the external operation mode.
67
3
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.2.2
Monitor display is changed by pressing the
zMonitoring mode
zFrequency setting
mode (Note)
Hz
SET
FWD
Hz
MODE
MON
PU
MODE
MODE
STOP
RESET
SET
MIN
PU EXT
MODE
REV
STOP
RESET
FWD
MAX
key
M
O
[D
E
]
zParameter setting
mode
MODE
PU
REV
MODE
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
FWD
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
zHelp mode
zOperation mode
MODE
MODE
MODE
PU
MODE
SET
FWD
PU
REV
MODE
STOP
RESET
FWD
MAX
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
MIN
MAX
MIN
(Note)The frequency setting mode is displayed only in the PU operation mode.
3.2.3
Monitoring
• Operation command indications given while a monitor display is being provided EXT
is lit to indicate external operation.
PU is lit to indicate PU operation.
Both EXT and PU are lit to indicate combined operation.
• The monitor display can also be changed during operation.
zFrequency monitor
zCurrent monitor zVoltage monitor zAlarm monitor
Hz
Alarm present
MON
SET
PU EXT
MODE
SET
FWD
REV
STOP
RESET
SET
A MON
PU EXT
MON
PU EXT
SET
SET
MAX
*1
MIN
SET
*1
Alarm absent
SET
*1
SET
SET
*2
MODE
To 3.2.4 Frequency setting mode (Note3)
Note: 1. Hold down the SET key marked *1 for more than 1.5 s to change the current
monitor to the power-on monitor.
2. Hold down the SET key marked *2 for more than 1.5 s to display the last four
errors including the most recent one.
3. In the external operation mode, it shifts to the parameter setting mode.
68
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.2.4
Frequency setting
When the built-in frequency setting potentiometer is invalid (Pr. 146 = 1) in the PU
operation mode, set the frequency value used for operation performed under the
operation command given by the RUN key ( FWD or
This mode is displayed only in PU operation.
REV
key).
/
• When the
key is used to make the frequency setting
Set "1" (built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid) in Pr. 146 "frequency setting
command selection". (For the setting method, refer to page 71.)
Change the set frequency with the
/
key.
To frequency monitoring
zFrequency setting mode
zSet frequency
zSet frequency changing
write
Hz
Hz
SET
FWD
REV
STOP
RESET
MAX
MODE
Hz
PU
PU
MODE
SET
PU
Change the set
frequency with
Flicker
Hz
MIN
PU
MODE
To 3.2.5 Parameter setting mode
3.2.5
3
Parameter setting method
With the exception of some parameters, parameter setting can be made when the PU
operation mode is selected by the Pr. 79 setting.
(Also, as other to set method independently of the operation mode, you can set "2" in
Pr. 77. Refer to page 132.)
• A parameter value may either be set by updating its parameter number or setting the
value digit-by-digit using the
/
key.
• To write the setting, change it and press the
SET
key for about 1.5 s.
Note: If parameter write cannot be performed, refer to page 212.
69
OPERATION/CONTROL
(1) Example:To change the Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" setting
from "2" (external operation mode) to "1" (PU operation mode)
(For details of Pr. 79, refer to page 133.)
Press the
MODE
key, to choose the
parameter setting mode.
Parameter setting mode
Most significant
digit flickers
PU
MODE
SET
FWD
SET
Middle digit flickers
Least significant
digit flickers
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
MAX
× 9 times
or
× 1 time
× 7 times
or
× 3 times
MIN
MODE
To 3.2.6 Operation mode
SET
0 to 9
0 to 9
Current setting
Setting change
SET
Press for
1.5s
SET
Setting write
When
appears
1) If the RUN indication is lit or flickering,
stop operation by pressing the
RUN
STOP
RESET
key or turning off the forward rotation
(STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal
Flicker
connected to the control terminal.
2) You cannot set any value that is outside the
parameter setting range. Write a value within
the setting range.
"1" (PU operation mode) has been set in Pr. 79.
If the value and
do not flicker but
appears, you did not press the
SET
key
for 1.5s when writing the value.
Press the
key once, press the
SET
restart the setting from the beginning.
70
key, and
OPERATION/CONTROL
(2) When changing the Pr. 146 "frequency setting command selection"
setting from "0" (built-in frequency setting potentiometer valid) to "1"
(built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid)
(For details of Pr. 146, refer to page 166.)
Press the MODE key, to choose the
parameter setting mode.
Parameter setting mode
Most significant
digit flickers
PU
MODE
SET
FWD
Least significant
Middle digit flickers digit flickers
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
MAX
MIN
× 1 time
MODE
× 4 times
SET
× 6 times
SET
3.2.6 Operation mode
0 to 9
0 to 9
0 to 9
Current setting
SET
Setting change
3
SET
Press for 1.5s
Setting write
Flicker
When
has appeared
1) If the EXT indication is lit, refer to page 70 and change
the Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" setting to "1"
EXT
(PU operation mode).
2) If the RUN indication is lit or flickers, press the
STOP
RUN
RESET key or turn off the forward rotation (STF) or
reverse rotation (STR) signal connected to the control
terminal to stop operation.
3) You cannot set any value outside the parameter setting range.
Write a value within the setting range.
"1" (built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid) has been set in
Pr. 146. If the display does not alternate between the set value and
parameter No.
but
has appeared, you did not
press the SET key for 1.5s to write the set value.
Press the
key once, press the SET key, and restart the setting
from the beginning.
71
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.2.6
Operation mode
The operation mode change method which is shown below is only allowed when Pr. 79
"operation mode selection" is "0".
zPU operation
zPU jog operation
zExternal operation
PU
MODE
SET
FWD
PU
REV
STOP
RESET
EXT
MODE
MAX
MODE
MIN
MODE
To 3.2.7 Help mode
Note: If the operation mode cannot be changed, refer to page 212.
3.2.7
Help mode
zAlarm history
zAlarm history clear zParameter clear
PU EXT
MODE
SET
FWD
REV
STOP
RESET
MAX
MIN
zSoftware version
read
MODE
To 3.2.3 Monitoring mode
72
zAll clear
OPERATION/CONTROL
(1) Alarm history
Four past alarms can be displayed with the
("." is appended to the most recent alarm.)
When no alarm exists, E._ _0 is displayed.
/
key.
Most recent alarm
SET
SET
When alarm occurs
Hz
Frequency
Current
PU EXT
Cumulative
energization time
Voltage
PU EXT
A
PU EXT
PU EXT
(2) Alarm history clear
Clears all alarm history.
Flicker
SET
SET
SET
3
Cancel
(3) Parameter clear
Initializes the parameter values to the factory settings. The calibration values are
not initialized.
(Parameter values are not cleared by setting "1" in Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection")
Flicker
SET
SET
SET
Cancel
Note: The Pr. 75, Pr. 146, Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 900 to Pr. 905, Pr.
922 and Pr. 923 values are not initialized.
(4) All clear
Initializes the parameter values and calibration values to the factory settings.
Flicker
SET
SET
SET
Cancel
Note: The Pr. 75 and Pr. 146 values are not initialized.
73
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.3
3.3.1
Operation
Pre-operation checks
Before starting operation, check the following:
z Safety
Perform test operation after making sure that safety is ensured if the machine should
become out of control.
z Machine
Make sure that the machine is free of damage.
z Parameters
Set the parameter values to match the operating machine (system) environment.
z Test operation
Perform test operation and make sure that the machine operates safely under light
load at a low frequency. After that, start operation.
Since the Pr. 240 "Soft-PWM setting" value is factory-set to select Soft-PWM control,
the tone is different from that in the conventional non-low acoustic noise mode, this is
not a fault.
74
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.3.2
PU operation mode (Operation using the operation panel)
(1) Using the built-in frequency setting potentiometer for operation at
60Hz (Factory setting)
Operation command: RUN key or FWD / REV key
Frequency setting: built-in frequency setting potentiometer
Related parameters:Pr. 79 "operation mode selection", Pr. 146 "frequency setting
command selection"
Step
1
2
Description
Power on → Operation mode check
In the factory setting, switching power on chooses the PU
operation mode and lights up the [PU] indication.
If the [PU] indication is not lit, refer to page 70 and set "1" in Pr.
79.
Image
ON
PU
Frequency setting potentiometer selection
Refer to page 71 and set "0" (built-in frequency setting
potentiometer) in Pr. 146 "frequency setting command
selection".
(Refer to page 166)
Flicker
Start
3
Press the RUN key (or FWD or REV key) of the operation panel.
The [RUN] indication is lit to indicate forward rotation, or
flickers to indicate reverse rotation.
RUN
FWD
REV
Hz RUN
MON
PU
4
5
3
Acceleration → Constant speed
Slowly turn the potentiometer fully clockwise.
The frequency shown on the display increases gradually to
60.00Hz.
Deceleration
Slowly turn the potentiometer fully counterclockwise.
The frequency shown on the display decreases gradually to
0.00Hz.
The motor stops running.
Stop
6
STOP
Press the RESET
key.
The [RUN] indication goes off.
<Reference>
Hz
MON
PU EXT
The running frequency available by turning the potentiometer fully
counterclockwise or fully clockwise can be changed using Pr. 922 "builtin frequency setting potentiometer bias" or Pr. 923 "built-in frequency
setting potentiometer gain". (Refer to page 186.)
75
OPERATION/CONTROL
(2) Using the digital frequency setting for operation at 60Hz
By repeating step 2 below during motor run, speed can be varied.
Operation command: RUN key or FWD / REV key
Frequency setting:
key
/
Related parameters:Pr. 79 "operation mode selection", Pr. 146 "frequency setting
command selection"
Step
1
Description
Image
Power on → Operation mode check
In the factory setting, switching power on chooses the PU
operation mode and shows [PU].
If the [PU] indication is not lit, refer to page 70 and set "1" in Pr.
79.
ON
PU
2
Running frequency setting
Set the running frequency to 60Hz.
1) Refer to page 71 and set "1" (built-in frequency setting
potentiometer invalid) in Pr. 146 "frequency setting
command selection".
2) Refer to page 68 and choose the frequency setting mode
using the
MODE
Hz RUN
A MON
P U E XT
MODE
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
FWD
MAX
MIN
key.
3) Refer to page 69, change the setting using the
and press the
(or)
SET
/
key,
key to write the setting.
Start
3
Press the RUN key (or FWD / REV key). The monitoring mode is
automatically selected and the output frequency is displayed.
The [RUN] indication is lit to indicate forward rotation, or
flickers to indicate reverse rotation.
RUN
FWD
REV
Hz RUN
A MO N
PU EX T
MODE
F WD
SET
REV
STOP
RESE T
MAX
MIN
Stop
4
STOP
Press the RESET
key.
The motor is decelerated to a stop.
The [RUN] indication goes off.
Hz
MON
PU
(3) PU jog operation
Hold down the RUN (or FWD or REV ) key to perform operation, and release it to stop.
1) Set Pr. 15 "jog frequency" and Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration time".
2) Select the PU jog operation mode. (Refer to page 72.)
3) Hold down the RUN (or FWD or REV ) key to perform operation.
(If the motor remains stopped, check Pr. 13 "starting frequency". The motor will not
start if its setting is lower than the starting frequency.
76
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.3.3
External operation mode (Operation using the external
frequency setting potentiometer and external start signal)
(1) Operation at 60Hz
Operation command: Externally connected start signal
Frequency setting : Externally connected frequency setting potentiometer
<Connection diagram>
Frequency setting by voltage input
Frequency setting
potentiometer
0 to 10VDC
STF
STR
SD
10 Inverter
2
5
Frequency setting by current input
Current input
4 to 20mADC
*Short terminals AU-SD for
STF
STR
current input.
SD
Use Pr.180 to Pr.183 (input
AU *
terminal function selection) to
Inverter
4
assign the function of AU to any
5
of RL, RM, RH or MRS terminal.
Refer to page 18 for details of each terminal.
Step
1
2
3
4
Description
Power on → Operation mode check
Switch power on, refer to page 70, and set "2" in Pr. 79
"operation mode selection".
The [EXT] indication is lit.
Start
Set the start switch (STF or STR) to ON.
The [RUN] indication is lit to indicate forward rotation, or
flickers to indicate reverse rotation.
Note: The motor does not start if both the forward and
reverse rotation switches are turned on. If both
switches are turned on during operation, the motor
decelerates to a stop.
Acceleration → Constant speed
Slowly turn the potentiometer connected across terminals 2-5
(4-5) (frequency setting potentiometer) fully clockwise.
The frequency shown on the display increases gradually to
60.00Hz.
Deceleration
Slowly turn the potentiometer connected across terminals 2-5
(4-5) (frequency setting potentiometer) fully counterclockwise.
The frequency shown on the display decreases gradually to
0.00Hz.
The motor stops running.
Stop
Turn off the start switch (STF or STR).
5
Image
ON
Hz
MON
EXT
Forward rotation
Reverse
rotation
Hz RUN
MON
EXT
External potentiometer
External potentiometer
Forward rotation
Reverse
rotation
Stop
OFF
<Reference> If other frequency is required at fully clockwise position, change Pr. 38 "frequency
at 5V (10V)", Pr.39 "frequency at 20mA input" setting. (Refer to page 110.)
77
3
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.3.4
Combined operation mode 1 (Operation using both external
start signal and operation panel)
When the start signal is provided externally (switch, relay, etc.) and the running
frequency is set from the operation panel (Pr. 79 = 3).
The external frequency setting signal and PU's forward rotation, reverse rotation and
stop keys are not accepted. (Note)
Operation command: externally connected start signal
/
Frequency setting: Built-in frequency setting potentiometer or
key, or multi-speed
command (multi-speed command has priority) (Refer to page 95)
Related parameter: Pr. 146 "frequency setting command selection"
Step
Description
Image
Power on
Switch power on.
ON
1
2
3
4
5
Operation mode selection
Refer to page 70 and set "3" in Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection".
The [PU] and [EXT] indications are lit.
Start
Turn on the start switch (STF or STR).
Note: The motor does not start if both the forward and
reverse rotation switches are turned on. If both
switches are turned on during operation, the motor
decelerates to a stop.
The [RUN] indication is lit to indicate forward rotation,
or flickers to indicate reverse rotation.
Running frequency setting
Slowly turn the built-in frequency setting potentiometer fully
clockwise or set the running frequency to 60.00Hz with the
key.
/
Note: Use the built-in frequency setting potentiometer or
key to make frequency setting.
/
Select the operation using Pr. 146 "frequency setting
command selection".
Pr. 146 = "0" (Built-in frequency setting potentiometer
valid)
Pr. 146 = "1" (Built-in frequency setting potentiometer
invalid) (Refer to page 71)
Stop
Turn off the start switch (STF or STR).
The motor stops.
The [RUN] indication goes off.
Note: The
STOP
RESET
Flicker
Forward rotation
Reverse
rotation
ON
Hz RUN
MON
PU EXT
<Step setting>
Hz
MON
PU EXT
key is made valid if any of "14" to "17" is set in Pr. 75 "PU stop selection".
78
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.3.5
Combined operation mode 2
When the running frequency is set from a potentiometer connected across terminals 2-5
(frequency setting potentiometer) and the start signal is provided by the RUN key or FWD /
REV
key of the operation panel. (Pr.79 = 4)
Operation command: RUN key (or FWD / REV key) of the operation panel
Frequency setting:Externally connected frequency setting potentiometer or multi-speed
command (multi-speed command has priority) (Refer to page 95).
Step
Description
Image
Power on
Switch power on.
ON
1
2
Operation mode
Refer to page 70 and set "4" in Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection".
The [PU] and [EXT] indications are lit.
Flicker
Start
3
4
5
Press the RUN key (or FWD / REV key) of the operation panel.
The [RUN] indication is lit to indicate forward rotation, or flickers to
indicate reverse rotation.
Acceleration → Constant speed
Slowly turn the potentiometer connected across terminals 2-5
(frequency setting potentiometer) fully clockwise.
The frequency shown on the display increases gradually to
60.00Hz.
Deceleration
Slowly turn the potentiometer connected across terminals 2-5
(frequency setting potentiometer) fully counterclockwise.
The frequency shown on the display decreases gradually to
0.00Hz.
The motor stops running.
RUN
FWD
REV
Hz RUN
MON
PU EXT
External potentiometer
External potentiometer
Stop
6
STOP
Press the RESET
key.
The operation command indication RUN goes off.
<Reference>
Hz
MON
PU EXT
If other frequency is required at fully clockwise position, change Pr. 38
"frequency at 5V (10V) " setting. (Refer to page 110.)
79
3
MEMO
80
CHAPTER 4
PARAMETERS
This chapter explains the "parameters" of this product.
With the factory settings, the inverter is designed to perform
simple variable-speed operation. Set necessary parameter
values according to the load and operating specifications.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
4.1 Parameter List ......................................... 82
4.2 Parameter Function Details ..................... 92
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Note: By making parameter setting, you can change the functions of
contact input terminals RL, RM, RH, MRS, open collector output
terminals RUN, FU, and contact output terminals A, B, C. Therefore,
signal names corresponding to the functions are used in the
description of this chapter (except in the wiring examples). Note that
they are not terminal names.
Chapter 4
REMARKS
Do not use the copy/verify function between this inverter and another
type (CC-Link type FR-E520-KN, DeviceNet type FR-E520-KND)
inverter.
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
81
PARAMETERS
4.1
4.1.1
Parameter List
Parameter list
Basic functions
Func- Parameter
tion
Number
Setting
Range
0
Torque boost (Note 1)
1
Maximum frequency
2
Minimum frequency
0 to 120Hz
3
Base frequency (Note 1)
0 to 400Hz
4
5
6
Multi-speed setting
(high speed)
Multi-speed setting
(middle speed)
Multi-speed setting
(low speed)
7
Acceleration time
8
Deceleration time
9
Electronic thermal O/L
relay
10
11
12
13
Standard operation functions
Name
14
DC injection brake
operation frequency
DC injection brake
operation time
DC injection brake voltage
Starting frequency
Load pattern selection
(Note 1)
0 to 30%
0 to 120Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 3600s/
0 to 360s
0 to 3600s/
0 to 360s
Minimum
Setting
Increments
Factory
Setting
0.1%
6%/4%
(Note 10)
92
120Hz
93
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.1s/0.01s
0.1s/0.01s
Refer Customer
To:
Setting
0Hz
93
60Hz
94
60Hz
95
30Hz
95
10Hz
95
5s/10s
(Note 4)
5s/10s
(Note 4)
Rated
current
(Note 5)
96
96
0 to 500A
0.01A
0 to 120Hz
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
98
3Hz
0 to 10s
0.1s
0.5s
99
0 to 30%
0 to 60Hz
0.1%
0.01Hz
6%
0.5Hz
99
100
99
0 to 3
1
0
101
15
Jog frequency
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
5Hz
102
16
Jog acceleration/
deceleration time
High-speed maximum
frequency
Base frequency voltage
(Note 1)
Acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency
Acceleration/deceleration
time increments
Stall prevention operation
level
Stall prevention operation
level compensation factor
at double speed
(Note 6)
0 to 3600s/
0 to 360s
120 to
400Hz
0 to 1000V,
8888, 9999
0.1s/ 0.01s
0.5s
102
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
120Hz
93
0.1V
9999
94
1 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
60Hz
96
0, 1
1
0
96
0 to 200%
0.1%
150%
103
0 to 200%,
9999
0.1%
9999
103
18
19
20
21
22
23
82
PARAMETERS
24
25
26
Output
terminal
functions
Standard operation functions
27
29
30
31
Second functions
Multi-speed setting
(speed 4)
Multi-speed setting
(speed 5)
Multi-speed setting
(speed 6)
Multi-speed setting
(speed 7)
Acceleration/deceleration
pattern
Regenerative function
selection
Frequency jump 1A
32
Frequency jump 1B
33
Frequency jump 2A
34
Frequency jump 2B
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0, 1, 2
1
Setting
Range
0, 1
1
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0,
0.01 to 9998
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
35
Frequency jump 3A
36
Frequency jump 3B
37
Speed display
38
Frequency at 5V (10V) input
1 to 400Hz
39
Frequency at 20mA input
1 to 400Hz
41
Up-to-frequency sensitivity
0 to 100%
42
Output frequency detection
0 to 400Hz
43
Output frequency detection
for reverse rotation
Second acceleration/
deceleration time
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 3600s
/0 to 360s
0 to 3600s
/0 to 360s,
9999
0 to 30%,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 500A,
9999
44
45
46
47
48
Display functions
Name
Minimum
Setting
Increments
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
52
54
55
56
Second deceleration time
Second torque boost
(Note 1)
Second V/F (base
frequency) (Note 1)
Second electronic thermal
O/L relay
Operation panel/PU main
display data selection
FM terminal function
selection
Frequency monitoring
reference
Current monitoring
reference
Factory
Setting
Refer
To:
9999
95
9999
95
9999
95
9999
95
0
106
0
107
9999
108
9999
108
9999
108
9999
108
9999
108
9999
108
0.001
0
109
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.1%
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
60Hz
(Note 2)
60Hz
(Note 2)
10%
0.1s/0.01s
5s/10s
(Note 11)
96
0.1s/0.01s
9999
96
92
110
110
111
6Hz
112
9999
112
0.1%
9999
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
9999
94
0.01A
9999
98
0, 23, 100
1
0
113
0, 1, 2
1
0
113
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz (Note 3)
60Hz
115
0 to 500A
0.01A
Rated
current
115
83
Customer
Setting
Parameter List
ParamFunceter
tion
Number
4
PARAMETERS
Additional Automatic
restart
function
functions
ParamFunceter
tion
Number
Factory
Setting
Refer
To:
Restart coasting time
0 to 5s, 9999
0.1s
9999
116
58
Restart cushion time
0 to 60s
0.1s
1.0s
116
59
Remote setting function
selection
0, 1, 2
1
0
118
60
Shortest acceleration/
deceleration mode
61
Reference current
62
65
66
Operation selection functions
Setting
Range
57
63
67
68
69
70
Reference current for
acceleration
Reference current for
deceleration
Retry selection
Stall prevention operation
level reduction starting
frequency (Note 6)
Number of retries at alarm
occurrence
Retry waiting time
Retry count display erasure
Special regenerative brake
duty
0, 1, 2, 11, 12
0 to 500A,
9999
0 to 200%,
9999
0 to 200%,
9999
0, 1, 2, 3
1
0
121
0.01A
9999
121
1%
9999
121
1%
9999
121
1
0
123
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz (Note 3)
60Hz
103
0 to 10,
101 to 110
0.1 to 360s
0
1
0
123
0.1s
1
1s
0
123
123
0 to 30%
0.1%
0%
107
1
0
125
1
0
1
105
129
129
14
130
0
132
0
133
0, 1, 3, 5, 6,
13, 15, 16, 23,
100, 101, 103,
105, 106, 113,
115, 116, 123,
0 to 15
0, 1
0 to 8
71
Applied motor (Note 6)
72
73
74
PWM frequency selection
1
0-5V/0-10V selection
1
Filter time constant
1
Reset selection/
0 to 3,
disconnected PU detection/
1
14 to 17
PU stop selection
Parameter write disable
0, 1, 2
1
selection
Reverse rotation
0, 1, 2
1
prevention selection
Operation mode selection
0 to 4, 6 to 8
1
(Note 6)
0.1 to 7.5kW,
Motor capacity (Note 6)
0.01kW
9999 (Note 8)
0 to 500A,
Motor excitation current
0.01A
9999
Rated motor voltage
0 to 1000V
0.1V
(Note 6)
Rated motor frequency
50 to 120Hz 0.01Hz (Note 3)
(Note 6)
0 to 50Ω,
Motor constant (R1)
0.001Ω
9999
Auto-tuning setting/status
0, 1
1
(Note 6)
75
77
78
79
General-purpose magnetic
flux vector control
Name
Minimum
Setting
Increments
80
82
83
84
90
96
84
1
133
9999
137
9999
138
200V/
400V
138
60Hz
138
9999
138
0
138
Customer
Setting
PARAMETERS
118
Communication station
number
Communication speed
119
Stop bit length
Communication functions
117
120
121
122
123
124
128
PID control
129
130
131
132
133
134
Initial Additional
Sub
Current detection Additional
monitor function function
function
Name
145
146
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Refer
To:
0 to 31
1
0
144
48, 96, 192
0, 1
(data length 8)
10, 11
(data length 7)
1
192
144
1
1
144
Parity check
0, 1, 2
presence/absence
Number of communication
0 to 10, 9999
retries
Communication check time
0, 0.1 to
interval
999.8s, 9999
0 to 150ms,
Waiting time setting
9999
CR/LF selection
0, 1, 2
0, 20, 21,
PID action selection
50,51,60,61
0.1 to 1000%,
PID proportional band
9999
0.1 to 3600s,
PID integral time
9999
0 to 100%,
Upper limit
9999
0 to 100%,
Lower limit
9999
PID action set point for PU
0 to 100%
operation
0.01 to
PID differential time
10.00s, 9999
Parameter for option (FR-PU04).
Frequency setting
command selection
Minimum
Setting
Increments
0, 1, 9999
1
2
144
1
1
144
0.1s
0
144
1
9999
144
1
1
144
1
0
157
0.1%
100%
157
0.1s
1s
157
0.1%
9999
157
0.1%
9999
157
0.01%
0%
157
0.01s
9999
157
1
0
166
0.1%
150%
167
0.1s
0
167
152
Output current detection
0 to 200%
level
Output current detection
0 to 10s
period
Zero current detection level 0 to 200.0%
0.1%
5.0%
168
153
Zero current detection
period
0.05 to 1s
0.01s
0.5s
168
156
Stall prevention operation
selection
0 to 31,100
1
0
103
160
User group read selection
0, 1, 10, 11
1
0
169
⎯⎯
0
171
150
151
168
169
171
Parameters set by manufacturer. Do not set.
Actual operation hour
meter clear
0
85
Customer
Setting
Parameter List
ParamFunceter
tion
Number
4
PARAMETERS
User functions
ParamFunceter
Name
tion
Number
173
User group 1 registration
174
User group 1 deletion
175
User group 2 registration
176
User group 2 deletion
Terminal
assignment functions
180
181
182
183
190
191
192
232
Multi-speed operation
233
234
235
236
237
238
Sub functions
239
240
Soft-PWM setting
244
Cooling fan operation
selection
245
Rated motor slip
246
247
249
Stop
selection
function
RL terminal function
selection (Note 6)
RM terminal function
selection (Note 6)
RH terminal function
selection (Note 6)
MRS terminal function
selection (Note 6)
RUN terminal function
selection (Note 6)
FU terminal function
selection (Note 6)
A, B, C terminal function
selection (Note 6)
Multi-speed setting
(speed 8)
Multi-speed setting
(speed 9)
Multi-speed setting
(speed 10)
Multi-speed setting
(speed 11)
Multi-speed setting
(speed 12)
Multi-speed setting
(speed 13)
Multi-speed setting
(speed 14)
Multi-speed setting
(speed 15)
250
Slip compensation
response time
Constant power range slip
compensation selection
Earth (ground) fault
detection at start (Note 9)
Stop selection
Setting
Range
0 to 999
0 to 999,
9999
0 to 999
0 to 999,
9999
Minimum
Setting
Increments
1
Factory
Setting
Refer
To:
0
169
1
0
169
1
0
169
1
0
169
0 to 8, 16, 18
1
0
171
0 to 8, 16, 18
1
1
171
0 to 8, 16, 18
1
2
171
0 to 8, 16, 18
1
6
171
0 to 99
1
0
173
0 to 99
1
4
173
0 to 99
1
99
173
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0, 1, 10, 11
(Note 12)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
9999
95
9999
95
9999
95
9999
95
9999
95
9999
95
9999
95
1
9999
95
1
105
0, 1
1
0
174
0 to 50%,
9999
0.01%
9999
175
0.01 to 10s
0.01s
0.5s
175
0, 9999
1
9999
175
0, 1
1
0
176
0 to 100s,
1000 to
1100s,
8888, 9999
1s
9999
177
86
Customer
Setting
PARAMETERS
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Refer
To:
251
Output phase loss
protection selection
0, 1
1
1
178
342
E2PROM write selection
0, 1
1
0
144
0
179
500
(50000h)
179
503
Capacitor life timer (Note 9)
—
1
(100h)
504
Capacitor life alarm output
set time (Note 9)
0 to 9998,
(9999)
1
(100h)
555
Current average time
0.1 to 1.0s
0.1s
1s
180
556
Data output mask time
0.0 to 20.0s
0.1s
0s
180
0.1 to 999A
0.01A
⎯⎯
0 to
0 to
10V 60Hz
0 to
1 to
10V 400Hz
0 to
0 to
20mA 60Hz
0 to
1 to
20mA 400Hz
0 to
0 to
5V
60Hz
0 to
1 to
5V 400Hz
⎯⎯
557
900
902
Calibration functions
Name
Minimum
Setting
Increments
903
904
905
922
923
990
991
Current average value
monitor signal output
reference current
FM terminal calibration
Frequency setting voltage
bias
Frequency setting voltage
gain
Frequency setting current
bias
Frequency setting current
gain
Built-in frequency setting
potentiometer bias
Built-in frequency setting
potentiometer gain
Rated
inverter
current
⎯⎯
180
184
0.01Hz
0V
0Hz
0.01Hz
5V
60
Hz
186
0.01Hz
4
mA
20
mA
0Hz
186
60
Hz
186
0.01Hz
0V
0Hz
186
0.01Hz
5V
60
Hz
186
0.01Hz
Customer
Setting
Parameter List
Current average
value monitor
Capacitor Additional
function
life
ParamFunceter
tion
Number
186
Parameter for options (FR-PU04).
4
87
PARAMETERS
Note: 1. Indicates the parameter of which setting is ignored when the generalpurpose magnetic flux vector control mode is selected.
2. Since calibration is made before shipment from the factory, the settings
differ slightly between inverters. The inverter is preset to provide a
frequency slightly higher than 60Hz.
3. When the operation panel is used and the setting is 100Hz or more, the
setting increments are 0.1Hz.
The setting increments are 0.01Hz when operating in the communication
mode.
4. The setting varies according to the inverter capacity: (0.1K to 3.7K)/(5.5K to
7.5K).
5. The 0.1K to 0.75K are set to 85% of the rated inverter current.
6. If "2" is set in Pr. 77 (parameter write disable selection), the setting cannot
be changed during operation.
7. The shaded parameters allow their settings to be changed during operation
if "0" (factory setting) has been set in Pr. 77 (parameter write disable
selection). (However, the Pr. 72 and Pr. 240 values may be changed during
PU operation only.)
8. The Pr. 80 setting range changes with the inverter class: 0.2kW to 7.5kW,
9999 for the 400V class.
9. Pr. 249, Pr. 503, Pr. 504 can be set for the 200V/100V class only.
10.The factory setting of Pr. 0 changes with the inverter capacity: 4% for the
FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K.
11. For the FR-E540-5.5K and 7.5K, the factory setting is 10s.
12.The setting values "10, 11" can be set for the 400V class only.
88
PARAMETERS
4.1.2
List of parameters classified by purpose of use
Set parameters according to the operating conditions. The following list indicates
purpose of use and corresponding parameters.
Purpose of Use
Operation mode selection
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern
adjustment
Selection of output characteristics
optimum for load characteristics
Output frequency restriction (limit)
Related to application operation
Related to operation
Operation over 60Hz
Adjustment of frequency setting
signals and outputs
Motor output torque adjustment
Brake operation adjustment
Multi-speed operation
Jog operation
Frequency jump operation
Automatic restart operation after
instantaneous power failure
Optimum acceleration/deceleration
within continuous rated range
Slip compensation setting
Output stop method selection
Setting of output characteristics
matching the motor
Stall prevention of motor, lift operation
General-purpose magnetic flux vector
control operation
Electromagnetic brake operation timing
Offline auto tuning setting
Sub-motor operation
Regenerative function selection
Operation in communication with
personal computer
Parameter Numbers
Parameter numbers which must be set
Pr. 79, Pr. 146
Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 29
Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18
Pr. 1, Pr. 18, Pr. 38, Pr. 39, Pr. 903, Pr. 905,
Pr. 923
Pr. 38, Pr. 39, Pr. 73, Pr. 902 to Pr. 905, Pr.
922, Pr. 923
Pr. 0, Pr. 80
Pr. 10, Pr. 11, Pr. 12
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 4, Pr. 5, Pr. 6, Pr. 15, Pr. 24,
Pr. 25, Pr. 26, Pr. 27, Pr. 232, Pr. 233, Pr. 234,
Pr. 235, Pr. 236, Pr. 237, Pr. 238, Pr. 239
Pr. 15, Pr. 16
Pr. 31, Pr. 32, Pr. 33, Pr. 34, Pr. 35, Pr. 36
Pr. 57, Pr. 58
Pr. 60
Pr. 245 to Pr. 247
Pr. 250
Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 71
Pr. 156
Pr. 80
Pr. 42, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96
Pr. 0, Pr. 3, Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 9, Pr. 44, Pr. 45,
Pr. 46, Pr. 47, Pr. 48
Pr. 30, Pr. 70
Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 342
Pr. 73, Pr. 79, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134,
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
Pr. 72, Pr. 240
Operation under PID control
Noise reduction
89
4
PARAMETERS
Others
Related to incorrect
operation prevention
Related to
monitoring
Purpose of Use
Frequency meter calibration
Display of monitor on operation panel
or parameter unit (FR-PU04)
Display of speed, etc.
Clearing of inverter's actual operation
time
Parameter Numbers
Parameter numbers which must be set
Pr. 54, Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 900
Pr. 54, Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 900
Pr. 37, Pr. 52
Pr. 171
Function write prevention
Pr. 77
Reverse rotation prevention
Pr. 78
Parameter grouping
Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 176
Current detection
Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
Motor stall prevention
Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 156
Input terminal function assignment
Output terminal function assignment
Increased cooling fan life
Motor protection from overheat
Automatic restart operation at alarm
stop
Earth (ground) fault overcurrent
protection setting
Inverter reset selection
Output phase loss protection selection
To determine the replacement time of
capacitor
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183
Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
Pr. 244
Pr. 9, Pr. 71
90
Pr. 65, Pr. 67, Pr. 68, Pr. 69
Pr. 249
Pr. 75
Pr. 251
Pr. 503, Pr. 504
PARAMETERS
4.1.3
Parameters recommended to be set by the user
We recommend the following parameters to be set by the user.
Set them according to the operation specifications, load, etc.
Parameter
Number
1
2
7
8
Name
Maximum frequency
Minimum frequency
Acceleration time
Deceleration time
9
Electronic thermal O/L
relay
14
Load pattern selection
71
Applied motor
73
0-5V/0-10V selection
146
Frequency setting
command selection
156
Stall prevention
operation selection
900
FM terminal calibration
902
903
904
905
922
923
Frequency setting
voltage bias
Frequency setting
voltage gain
Frequency setting
current bias
Frequency setting
current gain
Built-in frequency setting
potentiometer bias
Built-in frequency setting
potentiometer gain
Application
Used to set the maximum and minimum output
frequencies.
Used to set the acceleration and deceleration
times.
Used to set the current of the electronic
overcurrent protection to protect the motor from
overheat.
Used
to
select
the
optimum
output
characteristics which match the application and
load characteristics.
Used to set the thermal characteristics of the
electronic overcurrent protection according to
the motor used.
Used to select the specifications of the
frequency setting signal entered across terminal
2-5 to perform operation with the voltage input
signal.
Select whether the output frequency setting is
the setting using the built-in frequency setting
potentiometer or the digital setting using the
key.
/
In vertical lift applications, make setting so that
the fast-response current limit is not activated.
When fast-response current limit is activated,
torque may not be produced, causing a gravity
drop.
Used to calibrate the meter connected across
terminals FM-SD.
Used to set the magnitude (slope) of the output
frequency relative to the frequency setting
signal
(0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC) as desired.
You can set the magnitude (slope) of the output
frequency relative to the built-in frequency
setting potentiometer of the operation panel as
desired.
91
4
PARAMETERS
4.2
4.2.1
Parameter Function Details
Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46)
Pr. 0 "torque boost"
Pr.
Pr.
Pr.
Pr.
Pr.
Pr. 46 "second torque boost"
Related parameters
3 "base frequency"
19 "base frequency voltage"
71 "applied motor"
80 "motor capacity"
180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal
function selection)
Increase the setting value when the
distance between the inverter and motor is
long or when the motor torque in the low
speed range is insufficient, etc.
z Motor torque in the low-frequency range
can be adjusted to the load to increase the starting motor torque.
z You can select either of the two starting torque boosts by RT terminal switching.
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
Setting Range
6%/4%
(Note)
0 to 30%
46
9999
0 to 30%, 9999
Output voltage
0
Pr.0
Setting range
Pr.46
Remarks
(Note) FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K: 6%
FR-E520 (S)-0.1K to 7.5K: 6%
FR-E540-0.4K to 3.7K: 6%
FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K : 4%
9999: Function invalid
100%
Base frequency
0 Output frequency (Hz)
<Setting>
• Assuming that the base frequency voltage is 100%, set the 0Hz voltage in %.
• Pr. 46 "second torque boost" is valid when the RT signal is on. (Note 3)
• When using the inverter-dedicated motor (constant-torque motor), change the setting
as indicated below:
FR-E520 (S)-0.1K to 0.75K, FR-E540-0.4K, 0.75K, FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K...............6%
FR-E520-1.5K to 7.5K, FR-E540-1.5K to 3.7K ...................................................... 4%
FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K .............................................................................................................3%
If you leave the factory setting as it is and change the Pr. 71 value to the setting for
use of the constant-torque motor, the Pr. 0 setting changes to the above value.
Note: 1. This parameter setting is ignored when the general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control mode has been selected.
2. A large setting may result in an overheated motor or overcurrent trip. The
guideline for the largest value for this parameter is about 10%.
3. The RT signal serves as the second function selection signal and makes the
other second functions valid. Refer to page 171 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input
terminal function selection).
92
PARAMETERS
4.2.2 Output frequency range (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)
Pr. 1 "maximum frequency"
Related parameters
Pr. 13 "starting frequency"
Pr. 38 "frequency at 5V (10V)
input"
Pr. 39 "frequency at 20mA input"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 146 "frequency setting
command selection"
Pr. 2 "minimum frequency"
Pr. 18 "high-speed maximum
frequency"
Used to clamp the upper and lower
limits of the output frequency. Used for
high-speed operation at or over 120Hz.
z Can be used to set the upper and lower limits of motor speed.
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
Setting
Range
1
120Hz
0 to 120Hz
2
0Hz
0 to 120Hz
18
120Hz
120 to
400Hz
Output frequency
Pr.1
Pr.18
Frequency setting
Pr.2
0
(4mA)
5,10V
(20mA)
<Setting>
• Use Pr. 1 to set the upper limit of the output frequency. If the frequency of the
frequency command entered is higher than the setting, the output frequency is
clamped at the maximum frequency.
• To perform operation over 120Hz, set the upper limit of the output frequency in Pr. 18.
(When the Pr. 18 value is set, Pr. 1 automatically changes to the frequency in Pr. 18.
Also, when the Pr. 1 value is set, Pr. 18 automatically changes to the frequency in Pr.
1.)
• Use Pr. 2 to set the lower limit of the output frequency.
Note: When the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) connected across
terminals 2-5 is used for operation beyond 60Hz, change the value of Pr. 38 (or
Pr. 39 for use of the potentiometer connected across terminals 4-5).
Alternatively, when the built-in frequency setting potentiometer (Pr.146 = 0) is
used for operation beyond 60Hz, change the Pr. 923 value.
Operation over 60Hz cannot be performed by merely changing the settings of
Pr. 1 and Pr. 18.
CAUTION
If the Pr. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 13 "starting frequency" value,
note that the motor will run at the set frequency according to the
acceleration time setting by merely switching the start signal on, without
entry of the command frequency.
93
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.3 Base frequency, base frequency voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47)
Pr. 3 "base frequency"
Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage"
Pr. 47 "second V/F(base frequency)
Related parameters
Pr. 14 "load pattern selection"
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal
function selection)
Used to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage,
frequency) to the motor rating.
z When running a standard motor,
generally set the rated motor frequency.
When running the motor using the electronic bypass, set the base frequency to the
same value as the power supply frequency.
z If the frequency given on the motor rating plate is "50Hz" only, always set to "50Hz".
Leaving it as "60Hz" may make the voltage too low and the torque less, resulting in
overload tripping. Care must be taken especially when Pr. 14 "load pattern selection = 1.
Parameter
Number
3
Factory
Setting
60Hz
19
9999
47
9999
Setting
Range
0 to 400Hz
0 to 1000V,
8888, 9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
Remarks
8888: 95% of power supply voltage *1
9999: Same as power supply voltage *2
9999: Function invalid
Output voltage
*1: The base frequency voltage of the FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K is 1.9 times larger than
the power supply voltage.
*2: The base frequency voltage of the FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K is 2 times larger than
the power supply voltage.
Pr.19
Output
frequency (Hz)
Pr.3
Pr.47
<Setting>
• Use Pr. 3 and Pr. 47 to set the base frequency (rated motor frequency). Two base
frequencies can be set and the required frequency can be selected from them.
• Pr. 47 "second V/F (base frequency)" is valid when the RT signal is on. (Note 3)
• Use Pr. 19 to set the base voltage (e.g. rated motor voltage).
Note: 1. Set 60Hz in Pr. 3 "base frequency" when using a Mitsubishi constant-torque
motor.
2. When the general-purpose magnetic flux vector control mode has been
selected, Pr. 3, Pr. 19 and Pr. 47 are made invalid and Pr. 83 and Pr. 84 are
made valid.
However, Pr. 3 or Pr. 47 is made valid for the S-shaped inflection pattern
point of Pr. 29.
3. The RT signal serves as the second function selection signal and makes the
other second functions valid. Refer to page 171 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input
terminal function selection).
94
PARAMETERS
4.2.4 Multi-speed operation
(Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)
Pr. 4 "multi-speed setting (high speed)"
Pr. 5 "multi-speed setting (middle speed)"
Pr. 6 "multi-speed setting (low speed)"
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 "multi-speed setting
(speeds 4 to 7)"
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 "multi-speed setting
(speeds 8 to 15)"
Related parameters
Pr. 1 "maximum frequency"
Pr. 2 "minimum frequency"
Pr. 29 "acceleration/
deceleration pattern"
Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection"
Pr. 146 "frequency setting
command selection"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal
function selection)
Used to switch between the predetermined running speeds.
z Any speed can be selected by merely switching on/off the corresponding contact
signals (RH, RM, RL, REX signals).
z By using these functions with Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" and Pr. 2 "minimum
frequency", up to 17 speeds can be set.
z Valid in the external operation mode or combined mode (Pr. 79 = 3 or 4)
.
Factory Setting
Setting Range
Remarks
60Hz
30Hz
10Hz
9999
9999
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
9999: Not selected
9999: Not selected
Speed 1
(high speed)
Output frequency(Hz)
Output frequency(Hz)
Parameter
Number
4
5
6
24 to 27
232 to 239
Speed 5
Speed 2
Speed 6
(middle speed)
Speed 3
(low speed)
Speed 4
Speed 7
Speed 10
Speed 11
Speed 12
Speed 13
Speed 8
Speed 14
Speed 15
Speed 9
Time
RH
ON
RM
RL
Time
ON ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON ON ON
RH
ON ON
ON ON
RM
ON
RL
REX
<Setting>
ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
(Note 7)
• Set the running frequencies in the corresponding parameters.
• Each speed (frequency) can be set as desired between 0 and 400Hz during inverter
operation.
After the required multi-speed setting parameter has been read, the setting can be
changed by pressing the
key. In this case, when you release the
key,
/
/
press the SET key (
key when using the parameter unit (FR-PU04)) to store the set
frequency.
• Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 to assign the terminal used to input the REX signal.
WRITE
95
4
PARAMETERS
Note: 1. The priorities of external terminal of the frequency command are in order of
jog, multi-speed, terminal 4 and terminal 2.
2. The multi-speeds can also be set in the PU or external operation mode.
3. For multi-speed setting, if two or three speeds are simultaneously selected,
priority is given to the frequency setting of the lower signal.
4. Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 settings have no priority between them.
5. The parameter values can be changed during operation.
6. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal
function selection) may affect the other functions. Check the functions of the
corresponding terminals before making setting.
7. When only the REX signal is on with "9999" set in Pr.232, the set frequency
is changed to 0Hz.
4.2.5
Acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr.
44, Pr. 45)
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Related parameters
Pr. 3 "base frequency"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration
Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration
pattern"
reference frequency"
Pr. 21 "acceleration/deceleration time increments"
Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time"
Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"
Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time.
Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a smaller value for a faster
speed increase/decrease.
Parameter
Number
7
8
20
Factory Setting
0.1K to 3.7K
5.5K, 7.5K
0.1K to 3.7K
5.5K, 7.5K
60Hz
5s
10s
5s
10s
Setting Range
Remarks
0 to 3600s/0 to 360s
0 to 3600s/0 to 360s
1 to 400Hz
0: 0 to 3600s
1: 0 to 360s
21
0
0, 1
44
5s (Note)
45
9999
0 to 3600s/0 to 360s
0 to 3600s/
0 to 360s, 9999
9999: acceleration time =
deceleration time
Output frequency
(Hz)
Note: The FR-E540-5.5K and 7.5K are factory-set to 10s.
Pr.20
Pr.7
Pr.44 Acceleration
Running frequency
Time
Deceleration
96
Pr.8
Pr.45
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
• Use Pr. 21 to set the acceleration/deceleration time and minimum setting
increments:
Set value "0" (factory setting) ........0 to 3600s (minimum setting increments: 0.1s)
Set value "1"..................................0 to 360s (minimum setting increments: 0.01s)
• When you have changed the Pr. 21 setting, set the deceleration time again. (Note 5)
• Use Pr. 7 and Pr. 44 to set the acceleration time required to reach the frequency set in
Pr. 20 from 0Hz.
• Use Pr. 8 and Pr. 45 to set the deceleration time required to reach 0Hz from the
frequency set in Pr. 20.
• Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 are valid when the RT signal is on. When the RT signal is on, the
other second functions such as second torque boost are also selected.
• Set "9999" in Pr. 45 to make the deceleration time equal to the acceleration time (Pr.
44).
Note: 1. In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A (refer to page 106), the set
time is the period required to reach the base frequency set in Pr. 3.
•Acceleration/deceleration time formula when the set frequency is the base
frequency or higher
t=
4
9
2
T
5
(Pr. 3) 2 f + 9 T
T: Acceleration/deceleration time setting (s)
f : Set frequency (Hz)
•Guideline for acceleration/deceleration time at the base frequency of 60Hz
(0Hz to set frequency)
Frequency setting (Hz)
Acceleration/
deceleration time (s)
5
15
60
120
200
400
5
12
27
102
15
35
82
305
2. If the Pr. 20 setting is changed, the settings of calibration functions Pr. 903
and Pr. 905 (frequency setting signal gains) remain unchanged.
To adjust the gains, adjust calibration functions Pr. 903 and Pr. 905.
3. When the setting of Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44 or Pr. 45 is 0.03s or less, the
acceleration/deceleration time is 0.04s. At this time, set 120Hz or less in Pr. 20.
4. If the shortest acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual motor
acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter than the shortest
acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mechanical system's J
(moment of inertia) and motor torque.
5. Changing the Pr. 21 setting changes the acceleration/deceleration setting
(Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 16, Pr. 44, Pr. 45).
<Example>
When Pr. 21 = "0" and the setting of Pr. 7 = "5.0"s, and if the setting of Pr. 21
is changed to "1", the setting value of Pr. 7 will change to "0.5"s.
97
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.6 Electronic thermal relay function (Pr. 9, Pr. 48)
Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay
Related parameter
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183
(input terminal function
selection)
Pr. 48 "second electronic thermal
O/L relay "
Set the current of the electronic thermal relay function to protect the motor from
overheat. This feature provides the optimum protective characteristics, including
reduced motor cooling capability, at low speed.
Parameter
Number
9
48
Factory Setting
Setting Range
Remarks
Rated current*
9999
0 to 500A
0 to 500A, 9999
9999: Function invalid
*0.1K to 0.75K are set to 85% of the rated inverter current.
<Setting>
• Set the rated current [A] of the motor.
(Normally set the rated current at 50Hz if the motor has both 50Hz and 60Hz rated
current.)
• Setting "0" makes the electronic thermal relay function (motor protective function)
invalid. (The inverter's protective function is valid.)
• Set "1" in Pr.71 when using the Mitsubishi constant torque motor. (This provides a
100% continuous torque characteristic in the low-speed range.) Then, set the rated
motor current in Pr. 9.
• Pr. 48 "second electronic thermal O/L relay" is made valid when the RT signal is on.
(Note 4)
Note: 1. When two or more motors are connected to the inverter, they cannot be
protected by the electronic overcurrent protection. Install an external
thermal relay to each motor.
2. When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and
the setting is small, the protective characteristics of the electronic thermal
relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal
relay.
3. A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function.
Use an external thermal relay.
4. The RT signal serves as the second function selection signal and makes the
other second functions valid. Refer to page 171 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input
terminal function selection).
98
PARAMETERS
4.2.7
DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)
Pr. 10 "DC injection brake operation frequency"
Pr. 11 "DC injection brake operation time"
Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage"
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
Setting
Range
10
3Hz
0 to 120Hz
11
0.5s
0 to 10s
12
6%
0 to 30%
Output frequency (Hz)
By setting the DC injection brake voltage (torque), operation time and operation starting
frequency, the stopping accuracy of positioning operation, etc. or the timing of operating
the DC injection brake to stop the motor can be adjusted according to the load.
Pr.10
Pr.12
DC injection
brake voltage Operation
voltage
Pr.11
Operation
frequency
Time
Time
Operation time
<Setting>
•
•
•
•
Use Pr. 10 to set the frequency at which the DC injection brake operation is started.
Use Pr. 11 to set the period during when the brake is operated.
Use Pr. 12 to set the percentage of the power supply voltage.
Change the Pr. 12 setting when using the inverter-dedicated motor (constant-torque
motor).
FR-E520 (S)-0.1K to 7.5K, FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K ......................... 4% (Note)
FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K .......................................................................... 6%
Note: When the Pr. 12 value is as factory-set, changing the Pr. 71 value to the setting
for use of a constant-torque motor changes the Pr. 12 value to 4%
automatically.
CAUTION
Install a mechanical brake. No holding torque is provided.
99
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.8
Starting frequency (Pr. 13)
Pr. 13 "starting frequency"
Related parameters
Pr. 2 "minimum frequency"
You can set the starting frequency between 0 and 60Hz.
• Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is switched on.
Factory
Setting
Setting
Range
13
0.5Hz
0 to 60Hz
Output frequency
(Hz)
60
Setting range
Parameter
Number
Pr.13
0
Foward rotation
Time
Frequency setting signal(V)
ON
Note: The inverter will not start if the frequency setting signal is less than the value
set in Pr. 13 "starting frequency".
For example, when 5Hz is set in Pr. 13, the motor will not start running until the
frequency setting signal reaches 5Hz.
CAUTION
Note that when Pr. 13 is set to any value lower than Pr. 2 "minimum
frequency", simply turning on the start signal will run the motor at the
preset frequency if the command frequency is not input.
100
PARAMETERS
4.2.9
Load pattern selection (Pr. 14)
Pr. 14 "load pattern selection"
Related parameters
Pr. 0 "torque boost"
Pr. 46 "second torque boost"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183
(input terminal function
selection)
You can select the optimum output characteristic (V/F characteristic) for the application
and load characteristics.
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
Setting
Range
14
0
0 to 3
Pr.14=0
For constant-torque loads
(e.g. conveyor, cart)
Pr.14=1
For variable-torque loads
(Fan, pump)
100%
Output
voltage
100%
Output
voltage
Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)
Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.14=2
For lift
Boost for forward rotation...Pr. 0 (Pr.46) setting
Boost for reverse rotation...0%
Pr.14=3
For lift
Boost for forward rotation...0%
Boost for reverse rotation...Pr. 0 (Pr.46) setting
100%
Forward
Output rotation
voltage
100%
Reverse
Output rotation
voltage
Pr.0
Pr.46
Reverse
rotation
Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.0
Pr.46
Forward
rotation
Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)
Note: 1. This parameter setting is ignored when the general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control mode has been selected.
2. Pr. 46 "second torque boost" is made valid when the RT signal turns on.
The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the
other second functions valid.
Refer to page 171 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection).
101
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.10 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16)
Pr. 15 "jog frequency"
Related parameters
Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency"
Pr. 21 "acceleration/deceleration
time increments"
Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/
deceleration time"
Jog operation can be started and stopped by selecting the jog mode from the operation
panel and pressing and releasing the RUN key ( FWD , REV key).
• Set the frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation.
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
Setting
Range
15
5Hz
0 to 400Hz
16
0.5s
Remarks
0 to 3600s
When Pr. 21 = 0
0 to 360s
When Pr. 21 = 1
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.15
Pr.20
Jog frequency
setting range
Forward
rotation
Reverse
rotation
Time
Pr.16
FWD
key
REV
key
ON
ON
Note: 1. In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A, the acceleration/
deceleration time is the period of time required to reach Pr. 3 "base
frequency", not Pr. 20.
2. The acceleration time and deceleration time cannot be set separately for jog
operation.
3. The value set in Pr. 15 "jog frequency" should be equal to or greater than
the Pr. 13 "starting frequency" setting.
4. When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection="4", pressing FWD / REV of the PU
STOP
(operation panel FR-PU04) starts the inverter and pressing RESET
stops the
inverter.
Pr. 18 Î Refer to Pr. 1, Pr. 2.
Pr. 19 Î Refer to Pr. 3.
Pr. 20, Pr. 21 Î Refer to Pr. 7, Pr. 8.
102
PARAMETERS
4.2.11 Stall prevention and current limit (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 156)
Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level"
Pr. 23 "stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed"
Pr. 66 "stall prevention operation level reduction starting frequency"
Pr. 156 "stall prevention operation selection"
• Stall prevention............If the current exceeds the stall prevention operation level, the
output frequency of the inverter is automatically varied to
reduce the current.
• Fast-response current limit.......... If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of
the inverter is shut off to prevent an overcurrent.
• Set the output current level (% to the rated inverter output current) at which the output
frequency will be adjusted to prevent the inverter from stopping due to overcurrent etc.
• For high-speed operation at or over the motor base frequency, acceleration may not
be made because the motor current does not increase.
To improve the operation characteristics of the motor in such a case, the stall
prevention level in the high-frequency range can be reduced. This is effective for
operation of a centrifugal separator up to the high-speed range. Normally, set 60Hz in
Pr. 66 and 100% in Pr. 23.
• For operation in the high-frequency range, the current in the locked motor state is
smaller than the rated output current of the inverter and the inverter does not result in
an alarm (protective function is not activated) if the motor is at a stop. To improve this
and activate the alarm, the stall prevention level can be reduced.
• You can make setting to prevent stall caused by overcurrent and/or to prevent the
inverter from resulting in an overcurrent trip (to disable fast-response current limit that
limits the current) when an excessive current flows due to sudden load fluctuation or
ON-OFF on the output side of a running inverter.
Parameter Number
22
Factory Setting
150%
23
9999
66
156
60Hz
0
Setting Range
0 to 200%
0 to 200%,
9999
0 to 400Hz
0 to 31, 100
Reduction ratio
compensation
factor (%)
Pr.23
Pr.66
9999: Constant
according to Pr. 22
Setting example
(Pr.22=150%, Pr.23=100%, Pr.66=60Hz)
Pr.23 =9999
Current limit
operation level (%)
Stall prevention
operation level (%)
Pr.22
Remarks
150
90
60
45
30
22.5
0
400Hz
Output frequency (Hz)
60 100
200
300
400
Output frequency (Hz)
103
4
PARAMETERS
<Setting of stall prevention operation level>
• In Pr. 22, set the stall prevention operation level. Normally set it to 150% (factory
setting). Set "0" in Pr. 22 to disable the stall prevention operation.
• To reduce the stall prevention operation level in the high-frequency range, set the
reduction starting frequency in Pr. 66 and the reduction ratio compensation factor in
Pr. 23.
Formula for stall prevention operation level
Stall prevention operation level (%) = A + B × [
where, A =
Pr. 66 (Hz) × Pr. 22 (%)
output frequency (Hz)
Pr. 22-A
Pr. 23-100
]×[
]
Pr. 22-B
100
Pr. 66 (Hz) × Pr. 22 (%)
400Hz
,B=
• By setting "9999" (factory setting) in Pr. 23, the stall prevention operation level is
constant at the Pr. 22 setting up to 400Hz.
<Setting of stall prevention operation selection>
Refer to the following table and set the parameter.
{
z
{
z
{
z
{
z
{
z
{
z
{
z
{
z
{
{
z
z
{
{
z
z
{
{
z
z
{
{
z
z
z
z
z
z
{
{
{
{
z
z
z
z
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
— (Note2)
100
104
{
z
{
z
{
z
{
z
{
{
z
z
{
{
z
z
{
{
{
{
z
z
z
z
Deceleration
Constant
speed
Pr. 156
Setting
Stall Prevention
Operation
Selection
Fast{: Activated
Response
z: Not activated
Current
Limit
{: Activated
z: Not
activated
Acceleration
Deceleration
Constant
speed
{
{
{
{
OL Signal
Output
{:
Operation
continued
z:
Operation
not
continued
(Note 1)
Regenerative Driving
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Stall Prevention
Operation
Selection
{: Activated
z: Not activated
Acceleration
Pr. 156
Setting
FastResponse
Current
Limit
{: Activated
z: Not
activated
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
OL Signal
Output
{:
Operation
continued
z:
Operation
not
continued
(Note 1)
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
— (Note2)
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
{
{
{
{
{
z
z
z
z
— (Note2)
{
z
{
z
{
z
{
{
{
z
z
{
{
{
{
{
{
PARAMETERS
Note: 1. When "Operation not continued for OL signal output" is selected using
Pr.156, the "E.OLT" alarm code (stopped by stall prevention) is displayed
and operation stopped.
(Alarm stop display "E.OLT")
2. Since both fast-response current limit and stall prevention are not activated,
OL signal and E.OLT are not output.
3. If the load is heavy, the lift is predetermined, or the acceleration/deceleration
time is short, the stall prevention may be activated and the motor not
stopped in the preset acceleration/deceleration time. Therefore, set
optimum values to the Pr. 156 and Pr. 22 (Pr. 23).
4. When the fast-response current limit has been set in Pr. 156 (factory setting
has the current limit activated), do not set the Pr. 22 value to 170% or more.
Torque will not be developed by doing so.
5. In vertical lift applications, make setting so that the fast-response current
limit is not activated. Torque may not be produced, causing a gravity drop.
CAUTION
Do not set a small value as the stall prevention operation current.
Otherwise, torque generated will reduce.
Test operation must be performed.
Stall prevention operation during acceleration may increase the
acceleration time.
Stall prevention operation during constant speed may change the speed
suddenly.
Stall prevention operation during deceleration may increase the
deceleration time, increasing the deceleration distance.
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 ÎRefer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6.
105
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.12 Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29)
Set the acceleration/deceleration pattern.
Factory
Setting
0
Setting
Range
0, 1, 2
Output
frequency(Hz)
Set value 0
[Linear acceleration/deceleration]
Time
Set value 1
[S-shaped
acceleration/deceleration A]
Output
frequency(Hz)
Parameter
Number
29
Related parameters
Pr. 3 "base frequency"
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency"
Pr. 44 "second
acceleration/deceleration time"
Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"
fb
Time
Set value 2
[S-shaped
acceleration/deceleration B]
Output
frequency(Hz)
Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration
pattern"
f1
f2
Time
<Setting>
Pr. 29 Setting
0
Function
Linear
acceleration/
deceleration
1
S-shaped
acceleration/
deceleration
A
(Note)
2
S-shaped
acceleration/
deceleration
B
Description
Linear acceleration/deceleration is made up/down to the
preset frequency (factory setting).
For machine tool spindles
This setting is used when it is necessary to make
acceleration/deceleration in a short time up to the base
frequency or higher speed range.
In this acceleration/deceleration pattern, fb (base
frequency) is always the inflection point of an S shape,
and you can set the acceleration/deceleration time
according to the reduction in motor torque in the base
frequency or higher constant-output operation range.
For prevention of cargo collapse on conveyor, etc.
This setting provides S-shaped acceleration/deceleration
from f2 (current frequency) to f1 (target frequency),
easing an acceleration/deceleration shock. This pattern
has an effect on the prevention of cargo collapse, etc.
Note: For the acceleration/deceleration time, set the time required to reach the "base
frequency" in Pr. 3, not the "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency" in
Pr. 20.
106
PARAMETERS
4.2.13 Regenerative brake duty (Pr. 30, Pr. 70)
Pr. 30 "regenerative function selection"
Pr. 70 "special regenerative brake duty"
• When making frequent starts/stops, use the optional "brake resistor" to increase the
regenerative brake duty. (0.4K or more)
Parameter
Number
30
70
Factory
Setting
0
0%
Setting
Range
0,1
0 to 30%
<Setting>
(1) When using the brake resistor (MRS), BU type brake unit, high power
factor converter (FR-HC), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
• Set "0" in Pr. 30.
• The Pr. 70 setting is made invalid.
(2) When using the brake resistors (2 MYSs in parallel) (3.7K is only
allowed)
• Set "1" in Pr. 30.
• Set "6%" in Pr. 70.
(3) When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
• Set "1" in Pr. 30.
• Set "10%" in Pr. 70.
4
Note: 1. Pr. 70 "special regenerative brake duty" indicates the %ED of the built-in
brake transistor operation. The setting should not be higher than the
permissible value of the brake resistor used. Otherwise, the resistor can
overheat.
2. When Pr. 30 = "0", Pr. 70 is not displayed but the brake duty is fixed at 3%.
(Fixed at 2% for 5.5K, 7.5K)
3. The brake resistor cannot be connected to 0.1K and 0.2K inverters.
WARNING
The value set in Pr. 70 should not exceed the value set to the brake
resistor used.
Otherwise, the resistor can overheat.
107
PARAMETERS
4.2.14 Frequency jump (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36)
Pr. 31 "frequency jump 1A"
Pr. 32 "frequency jump 1B"
Pr. 33 "frequency jump 2A"
Pr. 34 "frequency jump 2B"
Pr. 35 "frequency jump 3A"
Pr. 36 "frequency jump 3B"
• When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a
mechanical system, these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped. Up to
three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to either the top or bottom point
of each area.
• The value set to 1A, 2A or 3A is a jump point and operation is performed at this
frequency.
Factory
Setting
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
Running frequency (Hz)
Parameter
Number
31
32
33
34
35
36
Pr.36
Pr.35
Setting Range
Remarks
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
9999: Function invalid
9999: Function invalid
9999: Function invalid
9999: Function invalid
9999: Function invalid
9999: Function invalid
Frequency jump
Pr.34
Pr.33
Pr.32
Pr.31
<Setting>
• To fix the frequency at 30Hz between Pr. 33 and Pr.
34 (30Hz and 35Hz), set 35Hz in Pr. 34 and 30Hz in
Pr. 33.
• To jump to 35Hz between 30 and 35Hz, set 35Hz in
Pr. 33 and 30Hz in Pr. 34.
Pr.34:35Hz
Pr.33:30Hz
Pr.33:35Hz
Pr.34:30Hz
Note: During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the set area is
valid.
108
PARAMETERS
4.2.15 Speed display (Pr. 37)
Pr. 37 "speed display"
Related parameter
Pr. 52 "operation panel/PU main
display data selection"
The unit of the output frequency display of the operation panel and PU (FR-PU04) can
be changed from the frequency to the motor speed or machine speed.
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
37
0
Setting
Range
0, 0.01 to
9998
Remarks
0: Output
frequency
* The maximum value of setting range deffers according to the Pr. 1 “maximum
frequency” and it can be calculated from the following formula.
Maximum setting value of Pr. 37 <
16777.215 × 60 (Hz)
Pr. 1 setting (Hz)
Note that the maximum setting value of Pr. 37 is 9998 if the result of the above formula
exceeds 9998.
<Setting>
• To display the machine speed, set in Pr. 37 the machine speed for 60Hz operation.
Note: 1. The motor speed is converted into the output frequency and does not match
the actual speed.
2. To change the operation panel monitor (PU main display), refer to Pr. 52.
3. As the operation panel display is 4 digits, "----" is displayed when the
monitored value exceeds "9999".
4. Only the PU monitor display uses the unit set in this parameter. Set the
other speed-related parameters (e.g. Pr. 1) in the frequency unit.
5. Due to the restrictions of the resolution of the set frequency, the displayed
value may be different from the setting for the second decimal place.
CAUTION
Make sure that the running speed setting is correct.
Otherwise, the motor might run at extremely high speed, damaging the
machine.
109
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.16 Frequency at 5V (10V) input (Pr. 38)
Pr. 38 "frequency at 5V (10V) input"
Parameter
Number
38
Output frequency(Hz)
• You can set the frequency
provided when the frequency
setting signal from the
potentiometer connected
across terminals 2-5
(frequency setting
potentiometer) is 5VDC (or
10VDC).
Related parameters
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 902 "frequency setting voltage bias"
Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain"
fm1
Pr.38
Output frequency
range
fm2
Frequency setting signal
Factory
Setting
60Hz
5V (10V)
Setting Range
1 to 400Hz
Note: For the frequency setting of the built-in frequency setting potentiometer, refer to
Pr. 922 and Pr. 923. (Page 186)
4.2.17 Frequency at 20mA input (Pr. 39)
Pr. 39 "frequency at 20mA
input"
Output frequency(Hz)
• You can set the frequency
provided when the frequency
setting signal input across
terminals 4-5 is 20mA.
Related parameters
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 904 "frequency setting current bias"
Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain"
Pr.39
fm1
Output frequency
range
fm2
Frequency setting signal
Parameter
Number
39
Factory
Setting
60Hz
Setting Range
1 to 400Hz
110
20mA
PARAMETERS
4.2.18 Up-to-frequency sensitivity (Pr. 41)
Pr. 41 "up-to-frequency sensitivity"
Related parameters
Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal function
selection)
Parameter
Number
41
Factory
Setting
10%
Output frequency (Hz)
The ON range of the up-to-frequency signal (SU) output when the output frequency
reaches the running frequency can be adjusted between 0 and ±100% of the running
frequency.
This parameter can be used to ensure that the running frequency has been reached or
used as the operation start signal etc. for related equipment.
Setting
Range
0 to 100%
Output signal
SU
OFF
Running frequency
Adjustable range Pr.41
Time
ON
OFF
• Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 to allocate the terminal used for SU signal output.
Refer to page 173 for Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection).
Note: Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal
function selection) may affect the other functions. Check the functions of the
corresponding terminals before making settings.
4
111
PARAMETERS
4.2.19 Output frequency detection (Pr. 42, Pr. 43)
Pr. 42 "output frequency detection"
Related parameters
Pr. 43 "output frequency detection Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal function
selection)
for reverse rotation"
The output frequency detection signal (FU) is output when the output frequency reaches
or exceeds the setting. This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation,
open signal etc.
• You can also set the frequency detection used exclusively for reverse rotation. This
function is effective for switching the timing of electromagnetic brake operation
between forward rotation (rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during vertical lift operation
etc.
Parameter
Number
42
43
Factory
Setting
6Hz
9999
Setting Range
Remarks
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz, 9999
9999: Same as Pr. 42 setting
<Setting>
Output
frequency (Hz)
Refer to the figure below and set the corresponding parameters:
• When Pr. 43 ≠ 9999, the Pr. 42 setting applies to forward rotation and the Pr. 43
setting applies to reverse rotation.
• Assign the terminal used for FU signal output with any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output
terminal function selection).
Refer to page 173 for Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection).
Output signal
FU
Pr.42
Forward
rotation
Reverse
rotation
ON
OFF
Time
Pr.43
ON
OFF
OFF
Note: Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Pr. 44, Pr. 45 ÎRefer to Pr. 7.
Pr. 46 ÎRefer to Pr. 0.
Pr. 47 ÎRefer to Pr. 3.
Pr. 48 ÎRefer to Pr. 9.
112
PARAMETERS
4.2.20 Monitor display (Pr. 52, Pr. 54)
Pr. 52 "operation panel/PU main display
data selection"
Pr. 54 "FM terminal function selection"
Related parameters
Pr. 37 "speed display"
Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring
reference"
Pr. 56 "current monitoring
reference"
Pr. 171 "actual operation hour
meter clear"
Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration"
You can select the signals shown on the operation panel/parameter unit (FR-PU04)
main display screen and the signal output to the FM terminal .
•There is a pulse train output terminal FM. Select the signal using Pr. 54.
Parameter
Number
52
54
Factory Setting
Setting Range
0
0
0, 23, 100
0, 1, 2
<Setting>
Set Pr. 52 and Pr. 54 in accordance with the following table:
Signal Type
Output
frequency
Output
current
Output
voltage
Alarm
display
Actual
operation
time
Unit
Parameter Setting
Pr. 52
Pr. 54
Operation
PU main
FM
panel LED
monitor
terminal
Full-Scale Value of
FM Level Meter
Hz
0/100
0/100
0
Pr. 55
A
0/100
0/100
1
Pr. 56
⎯⎯
0/100
0/100
2
400V or 800V
⎯⎯
0/100
0/100
×
⎯⎯
10h
23
23
×
⎯⎯
113
4
PARAMETERS
When 100 is set in Pr. 52, the monitor value is different depending on whether the
inverter is at a stop or running: (LED of Hz flickers during stop and is lit during
operation.)
Pr. 52
Output frequency
Output current
Output voltage
Alarm display
0
During operation/
during stop
Output frequency
100
During stop
During operation
Set frequency
Output current
Output voltage
Alarm display
Output frequency
Note:1. During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence is displayed.
2. During MRS, the values are the same as during a stop.
During offline auto tuning, the tuning status monitor has priority.
Note: 1. The monitoring of items marked × cannot be selected.
2. By setting "0" in Pr. 52, the monitoring of "output frequency to alarm display"
can be selected in sequence by the SET key.
3. Running speed on the PU main monitor is selected by "other monitor
selection" of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).
4. The actual operation time displayed by setting "23" in Pr. 52 is calculated
using the inverter operation time. (Inverter stop time is not included.) Set "0"
in Pr. 171 to clear it.
5. The actual operation time is calculated from 0 to 99990 hours, then cleared,
and recalculated from 0. If the operation time is less than 10 hours there is
no display.
6. The actual operation time is not calculated if the inverter has not operated
for more than 1 hour continuously.
7. When the operation panel is used, the display unit is Hz or A only.
114
PARAMETERS
4.2.21 Monitoring reference (Pr. 55, Pr. 56)
Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring reference"
Pr. 56 "current monitoring reference"
Related parameters
Pr. 54 "FM terminal function
selection"
Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration"
Set the frequency or current which is referenced when the output frequency or output
current is selected for the FM terminal.
Parameter
Number
55
56
Factory
Setting
60Hz
Rated current
Setting
Range
0 to 400Hz
0 to 500A
1440pulses/s (terminal FM)
Output or display
Output or display
1440pulses/s (terminal FM)
Output frequency Pr.55
Output current
Pr.56
<Setting>
Refer to the above diagrams and set the frequency monitoring reference value in
Pr. 55 and the current monitoring reference value in Pr. 56.
Pr. 55 is set when Pr. 54 = 0 and Pr. 56 is set when Pr. 54 = 1.
Set the Pr. 55 and Pr. 56 values so that the output pulse train output of terminal FM is
1440pulses/s.
Note: The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400pulses/s. If Pr. 55 is not
adjusted, the output of terminal FM will be filled to capacity. Therefore, adjust Pr. 55.
115
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.22 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
(Pr. 57, Pr. 58)
Pr. 57 "restart coasting time"
Pr. 58 "restart cushion time"
• You can restart the inverter without stopping the motor (with the motor coasting) when
power is restored after an instantaneous power failure.
Parameter
Number
57
58
Factory
Setting
9999
1.0 s
Setting Range
0 to 5 s, 9999
0 to 60 s
Remarks
9999: No restart
<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameters:
Parameter
Number
Setting
0
57
0.1 to 5 s
9999
58
0 to 60 s
Description
0.1K to 1.5K
0.5s coasting time
Generally use this
setting.
2.2K to 7.5K
1.0s coasting time
Waiting time for inverter-triggered restart after power is restored
from an instantaneous power failure. (Set this time between 0.1s
and 5s according to the magnitude of the moment (J) of inertia of
the load and torque.)
No restart
Normally the inverter may be run with the factory settings. These
values are adjustable to the load (moment of inertia, torque).
Instantaneous power
failure (power failure) time
Power supply
(R, S, T)
STF(STR)
Motor speed
(r/min)
Inverter output
frequency
(Hz)
*
Inverter output
voltage
(V)
Coasting time
Pr. 57 setting
Restart
voltage
cushion time
Pr. 58 setting
*The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.
116
PARAMETERS
Note: 1. Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure uses a reduced-voltage
starting system in which the output voltage is raised gradually with the
preset frequency unchanged, independently of the coasting speed of the
motor.
As in the FR-A024/044, a motor coasting speed detection system (speed
search system) is not used but the output frequency before an
instantaneous power failure is output. Therefore, if the instantaneous power
failure time is longer than 0.2s, the frequency before the instantaneous
power failure cannot be stored and the inverter will start at 0Hz.
2. The SU and FU signals are not output during restart but are output after the
restart cushion time has elapsed.
CAUTION
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been
selected, the motor and machine will start suddenly (after the reset time
has elapsed) after occurrence of an instantaneous power failure.
Stay away from the motor and machine.
When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure, apply the supplied CAUTION seals in easily visible places.
STOP
When the start signal is turned off or the RESET
key is pressed during the
cushion time for automatic restart after instantaneous power failure,
deceleration starts after the automatic restart cushion time set in Pr. 58
"cushion time for automatic restart after instantaneous power failure" has
elapsed.
4
117
PARAMETERS
4.2.23 Remote setting function selection (Pr. 59)
Pr. 59 "remote setting function selection"
Related parameters
Pr. 1 "maximum frequency"
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Pr. 18 "high-speed maximum
frequency"
Pr. 44 "second acceleration/
deceleration time"
Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"
If the operator panel is located away from the
control box, you can use contact signals to
perform continuous variable-speed operation,
without using analog signals.
• By merely setting this parameter, you can use
the acceleration, deceleration and setting
clear functions of the motorized speed setter
(FR-FK).
• When the remote function is used, the output frequency of the inverter can be
compensated for as follows:
External operation mode Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus external analog
frequency command
PU operation mode
Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus PU's digitally-set
frequency or built-in frequency setting potentiometer
Output
frequency(Hz)
Parameter Number
59
Factory Setting
0
Setting Range
0, 1, 2
When Pr.59=1
(Note)
When Pr.59=2
0Hz
ON
Acceleration (RH)
Deceleration (RM)
Clear (RL)
Forward rotation (STF)
Power supply
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Note: External operation frequency or PU operation frequency other than multi-speed
Pr. 59
Setting
Remote setting function
0
1
2
No
Yes
Yes
Operation
Frequency setting storage function
(E2PROM)
—
Yes
No
• Use Pr. 59 to select whether the remote setting function is used or not and whether
the frequency setting storage function* in the remote setting mode is used or not.
When "remote setting function - yes" is selected, the functions of signals RH, RM and
RL are changed to acceleration (RH), deceleration (RM) and clear (RL). Use Pr. 180
to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection) to set signals RH, RM and RL.
* Frequency setting storage function
The remote setting frequency (frequency set by RH, RM operation) is stored into
memory. When power is switched off once, then on, operation is resumed with that
output frequency value. (Pr. 59 = 1)
118
PARAMETERS
<Frequency setting storage condition>
• Frequency at the time when the start signal (STF or STR) has switched off
• The remotely-set frequency is stored every one minute after one minute has
elapsed since turn off (on) of both the RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration)
signals. (The frequency is written if the present frequency setting compared with the
past frequency setting every one minute is different.) (The state of the RL signal
dose not affect writing.)
Note: 1. The range of frequency changeable by RH (acceleration) and RM
(deceleration) is 0 to maximum frequency (Pr. 1 or Pr. 18 setting). Note that
the maximum value of set frequency is (main speed + maximum frequency).
(Hz)
The set frequency is clamped at (main speed + Pr. 1 )
Output frequency is
clamped at Pr. 1
Pr. 1
Set frequency
Output frequency
Main speed setting
Time
0Hz
Acceleration(RH)
ON
ON
Deceleration(RM)
Forward rotation(STF)
ON
2. When the acceleration or deceleration signal switches on, the set frequency
varies according to the slope set in Pr. 44 or Pr. 45. The output frequency
acceleration/deceleration times are as set in Pr. 7 and Pr. 8, respectively.
Therefore, the longer preset times are used to vary the actual output
frequency.
3. If the start signal (STF or STR) is off, turning on the acceleration (RH) or
deceleration (RM) signal varies the set frequency.
4. When switching the start signal from ON to OFF, or changing frequency by
the RH or RM signal frequently, set the frequency setting value storage
function (E2PROM) invalid (Pr. 59 = "2").
If set invalid (Pr. 59 = "1"), frequency is written to E2PROM frequently, this
will shorten the life of the E2PROM.
119
4
PARAMETERS
REMARKS
This function is invalid during jog operation and PID control operation.
Setting frequency is "0"
• Even when the remotely-set frequency is cleared by turning on the RL (clear)
signal after turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals, the inverter operates at
the remotely-set frequency stored in the last operation if power is reapplied
before one minute has elapsed since turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals.
Remotely -set frequency
stored in the last operation
Within one minute
Remotely -set frequency
stored in the last operation
Output
frequency
(Hz)
Acceleration (RH)
Deceleration (RM)
ON
OFF
ON
Clear (RL)
Forward rotation (STF)
Power supply
ON
ON
ON
ON
• When the remotely-set frequency is cleared by turning on the RL (clear) signal
after turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals, the inverter operates at the
frequency in the remotely-set frequency cleared state if power is reapplied after
one minute has elapsed since turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals.
Remotely -set frequency
stored in the last operation
1 minute
More than
one minute
Output
frequency
(Hz)
Acceleration (RH)
Operation at a set
frequency of 0Hz
ON
Deceleration (RM) OFF
ON
Clear (RL)
Forward rotation (STF)
Power supply
ON
ON
ON
ON
CAUTION
When selecting this function, re-set the maximum frequency according to
the machine.
120
PARAMETERS
4.2.24 Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode (Pr. 60 to Pr. 63)
Pr. 60 "shortest acceleration/deceleration mode"
Pr. 61 "reference current"
Related parameters
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Pr. 62 "reference current for acceleration"
Pr. 63 "reference current for deceleration"
The inverter automatically sets the shortest time for acceleration/deceleration for
operation.
• If you do not set the acceleration and deceleration times and V/F pattern, you can run
the inverter as if appropriate values had been set in the corresponding parameters.
This operation mode is useful when you want to operate without fine parameter
setting.
Pr. 61 to Pr. 63 are valid only when Pr. 60 = "1, 2, 11,12".
When the shortest acceleration/deceleration mode is selected, the setting values of
Pr. 7 "acceleration time", Pr. 8 "deceleration time", Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation
level" are made invalid.
Parameter
Number
60
Factory
Setting
0
61
9999
0 to 500A, 9999
62
63
9999
9999
0 to 200%, 9999
0 to 200%, 9999
Setting Range
Remarks
0, 1, 2, 11, 12
9999: Referenced from
rated inverter current.
<Setting>
Pr. 60
Setting
0
1
11
2
12
Operation
Mode
Ordinary
operation
mode
Shortest
acceleration/
deceleration
mode I
Shortest
acceleration/
deceleration
mode II
Description
Invalid
parameter
⎯⎯⎯⎯
⎯⎯⎯⎯
Set to accelerate/decelerate the
motor in the shortest time.
The inverter makes acceleration/
deceleration in the shortest time
using its full capabilities.
Set "11" or "12" when using
brake resistance and the brake
unit.
Stall prevention
operation level
150%
Stall prevention
operation level
180%
Pr. 7, Pr. 8,
Pr. 22
Note: When the shortest acceleration/deceleration mode is selected, regenerative
over voltage (E.OV3) may occur if the regenerative brake does not have
enough capability at deceleration.
121
4
PARAMETERS
• Set the parameters when it is desired to improve the performance in the shortest
acceleration/deceleration mode.
(1) Pr. 61 "reference current"
Set the current value (A) that is referenced for stall prevention operation level.
Set this value when you want to use the motor rated current as reference such as
when capacities of the motor and inverter differ.
Setting
9999 (factory setting)
0 to 500A
Reference Current
Referenced from rated inverter current
Referenced from setting (rated motor current)
(2) Pr. 62 "reference current for acceleration"
Set the stall prevention operation level (%) at acceleration.
Set when you want to restrict torque at acceleration, etc.
The value set in Pr.61 "reference current" becomes the reference value (100%).
Setting
9999 (factory setting)
0 to 200%
Reference Current
150% (180%) is the limit value.
The setting of 0 to 200% is the limit value.
(3) Pr. 63 "reference current for deceleration"
Set the stall prevention operation level (%) at deceleration.
Set when you want to restrict torque at deceleration, etc.
The value set in Pr.61 "reference current" becomes the reference value (100%).
Setting
9999 (factory setting)
0 to 200%
Reference Current
150% (180%) is the limit value.
The setting of 0 to 200% is the limit value.
122
PARAMETERS
4.2.25 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69)
Pr. 65 "retry selection"
Pr. 67 "number of retries at alarm occurrence"
Pr. 68 "retry waiting time"
Pr. 69 "retry count display erasure"
When any protective function (major fault) is activated and the inverter stops its output,
the inverter itself resets automatically and performs retries. You can select whether retry
is made or not, alarms reset for retry, number of retries made, and waiting time.
Parameter
Number
65
67
68
69
Factory
Setting
0
0
1s
0
Setting Range
0 to 3
0 to 10, 101 to 110
0.1 to 360s
0
<Setting>
Use Pr. 65 to select the protective functions (major faults) which execute retry.
Errors Reset for
Retry
Display
E.OC1
E.OC2
E.OC3
E.OV1
E.OV2
E.OV3
E.THM
E.THT
E.FIN
E. BE
E. GF
E. LF
E.OHT
E.OLT
E.OPT
E. PE
E.PUE
E.RET
E.CPU
E.P24
E. 3
E. 6
E. 7
Setting
0
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
1
z
z
z
2
z
z
z
3
z
z
z
z
z
z
4
z
z
z
z
z
z
Note: z indicates the retry items selected.
123
PARAMETERS
Use Pr. 67 to set the number of retries at alarm occurrence.
Pr. 67 Setting
0
1 to 10
101 to 110
Number of Retries
Retry is not made.
1 to 10 times
1 to 10 times
Alarm Signal Output
⎯⎯⎯⎯
Not output.
Output.
• Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when an inverter alarm occurs until a restart in
the range 0.1 to 360s.
• Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restart times
made by retry. The cumulative number of time is cleared when setting value "0" is
written.
Note: 1. The cumulative number in Pr. 69 is incremented by "1" when retry operation
is regarded as successful, i.e. when normal operation is continued without
the protective function (major fault) activated during a period five times
longer than the time set in Pr. 68.
2. If the protective function (major fault) is activated consecutively within a
period five times longer than the above waiting time, the operation panel
may show data different from the most recent data or the parameter unit
(FR-PU04) may show data different from the first retry data. The data stored
as the error reset for retry is only that of the protective function (major fault)
which was activated the first time.
3. When an inverter alarm is reset by the retry function at the retry time, the
stored data of the electronic thermal relay function, etc. are not cleared.
(Different from the power-on reset.)
CAUTION
When you have selected the retry function, stay away from the motor and
machine unless required. They will start suddenly (after the reset time has
elapsed) after occurrence of an alarm.
When you have selected the retry function, apply the supplied CAUTION
stickers easily visible places.
Pr. 66 ÎRefer to Pr. 22.
Pr. 70 ÎRefer to Pr. 30.
124
PARAMETERS
4.2.26 Applied motor (Pr. 71)
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Related parameters
Pr. 0 "torque boost"
Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage"
Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 96 "auto-tuning setting/status"
Set the motor used.
• When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, set "1" in Pr. 71 for either V/F
control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
The electronic thermal relay function is set to the thermal characteristic of the
constant-torque motor.
• When you selected the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, the values of the following
parameters are automatically changed. (only for the factory setting value)
Pr. 0 "torque boost", Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage"
Parameter
Number
71
Factory
Setting
Setting Range
0
0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 13, 15, 16, 23, 100, 101, 103,
105, 106, 113, 115, 116, 123
<Setting>
• Refer to the following list and set this parameter according to the motor used.
Pr. 71
Setting
Thermal Characteristics of Electronic
Thermal Relay Function
0, 100
Thermal characteristics of a standard motor
Thermal characteristics of a Mitsubishi constant-torque
motor
Standard motor
Constant-torque motor
Select "offline auto tuning
Mitsubishi generalsetting".
purpose motor SF-JR4P
(1.5kW (2HP) or less)
Standard motor
Star
Motor
Constant-torque motor connection
constants can
be entered
Standard motor
Delta
directly.
Constant-torque motor connection
1, 101
3, 103
13, 113
23, 123
5, 105
15, 115
6, 106
16, 116
125
Applied Motor
ConstantTorque
{
Standard
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
4
PARAMETERS
By setting any of "100 to 123", thermal characteristic of electronic thermal relay function
(applied motor) can be changed as indicated below according to the ON/OFF status of
the RT signal:
RT Signal
OFF
ON
Thermal Characteristic of Electronic Thermal Relay Function (Applied Motor)
As indicated in the above table
Constant-torque motor
CAUTION
Set this parameter correctly according to the motor used.
Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat and burn.
Set the electronic thermal relay function to the thermal characteristic for the
constant-torque motor when using a geared motor (GM-G, GM-D, GM-SY,
GM-HY2 series) to perform general-purpose magnetic-flux vector control.
126
PARAMETERS
4.2.27 PWM carrier frequency and long wiring mode (Pr. 72, Pr. 240)
Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection"
Pr. 240 "Soft-PWM setting"
You can change the motor tone.
The long wiring mode can be set for the 400V class.
• By parameter setting, you can select Soft-PWM control which changes the motor
tone.
• Soft-PWM control is a control method that changes the motor noise from a metallic
tone into an unoffending complex tone.
• Surge voltage is suppressed regardless of wiring length in the long wiring mode.
(When operating a 400V motor with wiring length of 40m or longer, select long wiring
mode.)
Parameter
Number
Factory Setting
Setting Range
Remarks
72
1
0 to 15
0: 0.7kHz,
15: 14.5kHz
240
1
0, 1, 10, 11 (*)
—
*The setting values "10, 11" can be set for the 400V class only.
<Setting>
• Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Pr. 72 Setting
Setting
72
0 to 15
Description
PWM carrier frequency can be changed.
The setting displayed is in [kHz].
Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz and 15 indicates 14.5kHz.
Note: 1. Note that when the inverter is run at the ambient temperature above 40°C
with a 2kHz or higher value set in Pr. 72, the rated output current of the
inverter must be reduced. (Refer to page 228.)
2. An increased PWM frequency will decrease the motor sound but increase
noise and leakage currents. Therefore, perform the reduction techniques
(Refer to pages 43 to 47).
127
4
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
Pr. 240 Setting
Description
Soft-PWM
Long wiring mode
Remarks
0
invalid
invalid
—
1
valid
(when Pr. 72="0 to 5")
invalid
10 (Note)
invalid
valid
11 (Note)
valid
valid
—
Setting can be made
only for the 400V
class
Note: Note the following when Pr. 240="10 or 11"
1. When Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" = "2 or more", PWM carrier
frequency is 1kHz.
2. When "10 or 11" (long wiring mode) is set in Pr. 240, the output voltage at
the rated frequency drops by a maximum of 4V.
3. If you copied parameters to the previous version inverter (Pr. 240="10 or 11"
is not available), set Pr. 240 again.
4. For the 400V class, use an insulation-enhanced motor. (Using other motors
may result in insulation deterioration of motors due to surge voltage
independently of the Pr. 240 setting.)
5. Values exceeding 120Hz can not be written to Pr. 1 (Pr. 18) when Pr.
240="10 or 11". Similarly, "10 or 11" can not be written to Pr. 240 when the
value set in Pr. 1 (Pr. 18) exceeds 120Hz.
128
PARAMETERS
4.2.28 Voltage input (Pr. 73)
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"
Related parameters
Pr. 38 "frequency at 5V (10V) input"
• You can change the input (terminal 2) specifications in response to the frequency
setting voltage signal. When entering 0 to 10VDC, always make this setting.
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
73
0
Setting
Range
0, 1
Setting
Terminal 2 Input Voltage
0
For 0 to 5VDC input (factory setting)
1
For 0 to 10VDC input
Note: 1. To change the maximum output frequency at the input of the maximum
frequency command voltage, use Pr. 38. Also, the acceleration/deceleration
time, which is a slope up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency, is not affected by the change in Pr. 73 setting.
2. When connecting a frequency setting potentiometer across terminals 10-2-5
for operation, always set "0" in this parameter.
4.2.29 Input filter time constant (Pr. 74)
Pr. 74 "filter time constant"
You can set the input section's internal filter constant for an external voltage or current
frequency setting signal.
• Effective for eliminating noise in the frequency setting circuit.
• Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be performed due to noise.
A larger setting results in slower response. (The time constant can be set between
approximately 1ms to 1s with the setting of 0 to 8. A larger setting results in a larger
filter time constant.)
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
Setting
Range
74
1
0 to 8
129
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.30 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop
selection (Pr. 75)
Pr. 75 "reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection"
You can select the reset input acceptance, PU (operation panel/FR-PU04) connector
disconnection detection function and PU stop function.
• Reset selection
: You can select the reset function input timing.
• PU disconnection detection: When it is detected that the PU (operation panel/FRPU04) is disconnected from the inverter for more than
1s, the inverter outputs an alarm code (E.PUE) and
comes to an alarm stop.
• PU stop selection
: When an alarm occurs in any operation mode, you can
stop the inverter from the PU by pressing the
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
Setting Range
75
14
0 to 3, 14 to 17
STOP
RESET
key.
<Setting>
Pr. 75
Setting
0
PU Disconnection
Detection
Reset Selection
Reset input normally enabled.
1
If the PU is disconnected,
Reset input enabled only when the operation will be continued.
inverter is tripped.
2
Reset input normally enabled.
3
14
15
16
17
PU Stop
Selection
Pressing the
STOP
key
RESET
decelerates the
When the PU is
inverter to a stop
disconnected, an error is
Reset input enabled only when the displayed on the PU and the only in the PU
operation mode.
inverter is tripped.
inverter output is shut off.
Reset input normally enabled.
If the PU is disconnected,
Reset input enabled only when the operation will be continued.
inverter is tripped.
Pressing the
STOP
key
RESET
decelerates the
inverter
to a stop
Reset input normally enabled.
in any of the PU,
When the PU is
external and
disconnected, an error is
Reset input enabled only when the displayed on the PU and the communication
inverter is tripped.
operation
inverter output is shut off.
modes.
130
PARAMETERS
How to make a restart after a stop by the
STOP
RESET
key on the PU
(1) Operation panel
1) After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch off the STF or STR signal.
2) Press the MODE key two times* to display
.
Note: When Pr. 79 = 3, press the MODE key three times, to display
Then, press the
key and proceed to step 3).
.
(For the monitor screen) ......Refer to page 68 for the monitor display provided by
pressing the MODE key.
3) Press the SET key.
4) Switch on the STF or STR signal.
(2) Parameter unit (FR-PU04)
Speed
1) After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch off the STF or STR signal.
2) Press the SET key.
3) Switch on the STF or STR signal.
SET
Operation panel
STF
ON
(STR) OFF
STOP
RESET
key
Time
key
Stop and restart example for external operation
The other way of making a restart other than the above method is to perform a powerreset or to make a reset with the inverter reset terminal.
Note: 1. If the reset signal (RES) is provided during operation, the inverter shuts off its
output while it is reset, the data of the electronic thermal relay function and
regenerative brake duty are reset, and the motor coasts.
2. The PU disconnection detection function judges that the PU is disconnected
when it is removed from the inverter for more than 1s. If the PU had been
disconnected before power-on, it is not judged as an alarm.
3. To resume operation, reset the inverter after confirming that the PU is
connected securely.
4. The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. Also, if parameter (all) clear is
executed, this setting will not return to the initial value.
5. When the inverter is stopped by the PU stop function, PS is displayed but an
alarm is not output.
When the PU connector is used for RS-485 communication operation, the
reset selection and PU stop selection functions are valid but the PU
disconnection detection function is invalid.
CAUTION
Do not reset the inverter with the start signal on.
Otherwise, the motor will start instantly after resetting, leading to
potentially hazardous conditions.
131
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.31 Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77)
Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection"
Related parameters
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
You can select between write-enable and disable for parameters. This function is used
to prevent parameter values from being rewritten by incorrect operation.
Parameter Number
77
Factory Setting
0
Setting Range
0, 1, 2
<Setting>
Pr. 77
Setting
Function
0
Parameter values may only be written during a stop in the
PU operation mode. (Note 1)
1
Write disabled. (Note 2)
Values of Pr. 22, Pr. 75, Pr. 77 and Pr. 79 "operation
mode selection" can be written.
2
Write enabled even during operation. (Note 3)
Setting is enabled independently of the operation mode.
Note: 1. The shaded parameters in the parameter list (page 82) can be set at any
time.
2. By setting "1" in Pr. 77, the following clear operations can be inhibited:
• Parameter clear
• All parameter clear
3. If Pr. 77 = 2, the values of Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 71, Pr. 79, Pr. 80, Pr. 83, Pr. 84,
Pr. 96, Pr. 180 to Pr.183 and Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 cannot be written during
operation. Stop operation when changing their parameter settings.
132
PARAMETERS
4.2.32 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78)
Pr. 78 "reverse rotation prevention
selection"
Related parameters
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
This function can prevent any reverse rotation fault resulting from the incorrect input of
the start signal.
• Used for a machine which runs only in one direction, e.g. fan, pump.
(The setting of this function is valid for the combined, PU, external and
communication operations.)
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
Setting
Range
78
0
0, 1, 2
<Setting>
Pr. 78 Setting
Function
0
Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
1
Reverse rotation disallowed
2
Forward rotation disallowed
4.2.33 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Related parameters
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Used to select the operation mode of the inverter. Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
(multi-speed operation)
The inverter can be run from the operation panel or
Pr. 75 "reset selection/disconnected
parameter unit (PU operation), with external
PU detection/PU stop selection"
signals (external operation), or by combination of
PU operation and external operation (external/PU Pr. 146 "frequency setting command
selection"
combined operation).
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183
When power is switched on (factory setting), the
(input terminal function selection)
PU operation mode is selected.
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
Setting
Range
79
1
0 to 4, 6 to 8
133
4
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
In the following table, operation using the operation panel or parameter unit is
abbreviated to PU operation.
Pr. 79
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
Function
When power is switched on, the external operation mode is selected.
PU or external operation can be selected by pressing the keys of the operation panel or
parameter unit. (Refer to page 60) For these modes, refer to the setting 1 and 2 below.
Operation mode
Running frequency
Start signal
Digital setting using the built-in
RUN ( FWD , REV ) key of
PU operation
frequency setting potentiometer or
operation panel or FWD or
mode (*)
by the key operation of the
operation panel or parameter unit
External signal input (across
terminals 2 (4)-5, multi-speed
selection)
Digital setting using the built-in
External/PU
frequency setting potentiometer or by
combined
the key operation of the operation
operation mode 1
panel or parameter unit, or external
(*)
signal input (multi-speed setting only)
External
operation mode
External/PU
External signal input (across
combined
terminals 2 (4)-5, multi-speed
operation mode 2 selection)
REV
key of parameter unit
External signal input
(terminal STF, STR)
External signal input
(terminal STF, STR)
RUN
(
FWD
,
REV
) key of
operation panel or
REV
FWD
or
key of parameter unit
Switch-over mode
Switch-over between PU and external operation modes can be done while running.
External operation mode (PU operation interlock)
MRS signal ON ......... Able to be switched to PU operation mode (output stop
during external operation)
MRS signal OFF ........ Switching to PU operation mode inhibited
Switching to other than external operation mode (disallowed during operation)
X16 signal ON ........... Switched to external operation mode
X16 signal OFF.......... Switched to PU operation mode
* Use Pr. 146 "frequency setting command selection" to select whether operation is to
be performed with the built-in frequency setting potentiometer or
key.
/
Note: 1. Either "3" or "4" may be set to select the PU/external combined operation.
These settings differ in starting method.
STOP
2. The stop function (PU stop selection) activated by pressing RESET
of the PU
(operation panel/FR-PU04) is valid even in other than the PU operation mode
when shipped from the factory. (Refer to page 130.)
134
PARAMETERS
(1) Switch-over mode
During operation, you can change the current operation mode to another operation
mode.
Operation Mode
Switching
Switching Control/Operating Status
External operation to PU
operation
1) Operate the operation panel keys to select the PU operation
mode.
• Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation.
• Set frequency is the same as the external frequency
setting signal value. (Note that the setting will disappear
when power is switched off or the inverter is reset.)
PU operation to external
operation
1) Operate the operation panel keys to select the external
operation mode.
• Rotation direction is determined by the external operation
input signal.
• Set frequency is determined by the external frequency
setting signal.
Note: When the switch-over mode is selected, the operation panel's potentiometer
setting is made invalid even if the Pr. 146 "built-in potentiometer switching" setting
is 0 or 9999.
(2) PU operation interlock
The PU operation interlock function is designed to forcibly change the operation mode
to external operation mode when the MRS signal switches off. This function prevents
the inverter from being inoperative by the external command if the mode is accidentally
left unswitched from PU operation mode.
1)Preparation
• Set "7" in Pr. 79 (PU operation interlock).
• Set the terminal used for MRS signal input with any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input
terminal function selection).
Refer to page 171 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection).
Note: Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal
function selection) may affect the other functions.
Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.
2)Function
MRS Signal
Function/Operation
ON
Output stopped during external operation.
Operation mode can be switched to PU operation mode.
Parameter values can be rewritten in PU operation mode.
PU operation allowed.
OFF
Forcibly switched to external operation mode.
External operation allowed.
Switching to PU operation mode inhibited.
135
4
PARAMETERS
<Function/operation changed by switching on-off the MRS signal>
Operating
Condition
Operation
mode
Status
During
stop
PU
During
operation
During
stop
Operating Status
Parameter
Write
Switching to
PU
Operation
Mode
ON → OFF
(Note 3)
During stop
Enabled →
disabled
Disabled
ON → OFF
(Note 3)
If external operation
frequency setting and
start signal are entered,
operation is performed
in that status.
Enabled →
disabled
Disabled
MRS
Signal
Operation
Mode
(Note 4)
External
OFF → ON
During stop
ON → OFF
External
External
During
operation
OFF → ON
ON → OFF
During operation →
output stop
Output stop →
operation
Disabled →
disabled
Disabled →
disabled
Disabled →
disabled
Disabled →
disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Note: 1. If the MRS signal is on, the operation mode cannot be switched to the PU
operation mode when the start signal (STF, STR) is on.
2. The operation mode switches to the external operation mode independently
of whether the start signal (STF, STR) is on or off.
Therefore, the motor is run in the external operation mode when the MRS
signal is switched off with either of STF and STR on.
3. When the protective function (major fault) is activated, the inverter can be
STOP
reset by pressing the RESET
key of the operation panel.
4. Switching the MRS signal on and rewriting the Pr. 79 value to other than "7"
in the PU operation mode causes the MRS signal to provide the ordinary
MRS function (output stop). Also as soon as "7" is set in Pr. 79, the operation
mode is switched to PU operation mode.
(3) Operation mode switching by external signal
1) Preparation
Set "8" (switching to other than external operation mode) in Pr. 79.
Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection) to set the terminal
used for X16 signal input.
Refer to page 171 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection).
Note: Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal
function selection) may affect the other functions.
Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.
2) Function
This switching is enabled during an inverter stop only and cannot be achieved
during operation.
X16 Signal
Operation Mode
ON
External operation mode (cannot be changed to PU operation mode)
OFF
PU operation mode (cannot be changed to external operation mode)
136
PARAMETERS
4.2.34 General-purpose magnetic flux vector control selection (Pr. 80)
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Related parameters
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage"
Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency"
Pr. 96 "auto-tuning setting/status"
You can set the general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
z General-purpose magnetic flux vector control
Provides large starting torque and sufficient low-speed torque.
If the motor constants vary slightly, stable, large low-speed torque is provided without
specific motor constant setting or tuning.
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
Setting Range
Remarks
80
9999
0.1kW to 7.5kW,
9999 (Note)
9999: V/F control
Note: The setting range changes with the inverter: 0.2kW to 7.5kW, 9999 for the 400V
class.
If any of the following conditions are not satisfied, faults such as torque shortage and
speed fluctuation may occur. In this case, select V/F control.
<Operating conditions>
• The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity.
• The number of motor poles is any of 2, 4, and 6. (4 poles only for the constant-torque
motor)
• Single-motor operation (one motor for one inverter) is performed.
• The wiring length between the inverter and motor is within 30m. (If the length is over
30m, perform offline auto tuning with the cables wired.)
<Setting>
(1) General-purpose magnetic flux vector control
• The general-purpose magnetic flux vector control can be selected by setting the
capacity of the motor used in Pr. 80.
Parameter
Number
Setting
9999
80
Description
V/F control
0.1 to 7.5/
General-purpose magnetic
Set the motor capacity applied.
0.2 to 7.5 (Note)
flux vector control
Note: The setting range changes with the inverter: 0.2kW to 7.5kW, 9999 for the 400V class.
• When using Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA), set "1" in Pr. 71. (When
using the SF-HRCA, perform the offline auto tuning.)
137
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.35 Offline auto tuning function (Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96)
Pr. 82 "motor excitation current"
Related parameters
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay "
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage"
Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency"
Pr. 90 "motor constant (R1)"
Pr. 96 "auto-tuning setting/status"
What is auto tuning?
(1) The general-purpose magnetic flux vector control system gets the best
performance from the motor for operation.
(2) Using the offline auto tuning function to improve the operational performance of
the motor.
When you use the general-purpose magnetic flux vector control, you can perform the
offline auto tuning operation to calculate the motor constants automatically.
z Offline auto tuning is made valid only when Pr. 80 is set to other than "9999" to select
the general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
z The Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR0.4kW or more) or Mitsubishi constant-torque
motor (SF-JRCA 200V class and 4-pole motor of 0.4kW to 7.5kW) allows generalpurpose magnetic flux vector control operation to be performed without using the
offline auto tuning function. However, if any other motor (Motor made of the other
manufacturers or SF-JRC, etc.) is used or the wiring distance is long, using the offline
auto tuning function allows the motor to be operated with the optimum operational
characteristics.
z Offline auto tuning
Automatically measures the motor constants used for general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control.
• Offline auto tuning can be performed with the load connected.
• The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the operation panel or
parameter unit (FR-PU04).
• Offline auto tuning is available only when the motor is at a stop.
z Tuning data (motor constants) can be copied to another inverter with the parameter unit
(FR-PU04).
• You can read, write and copy the motor constants tuned by the offline auto tuning.
Parameter
Number
82
83
84
90
96
Factory
Setting
9999
200V/400V
60Hz
9999
0
Setting Range
0 to 500A, 9999
0 to 1000V
50 to 120Hz
0 to 50Ω, 9999
0, 1
138
Remarks
9999: Mitsubishi standard motor
Rated inverter voltage
9999: Mitsubishi standard motor
0: No tuning
PARAMETERS
<Operating conditions>
•
•
•
•
The motor is connected.
The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity.
Special motors such as high-slip motors and high-speed motors cannot be tuned.
The motor may move slightly. Therefore, fix the motor securely with a mechanical
brake, or before tuning, make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor
runs.
*This instruction must be followed especially for vertical lift applications.
If the motor runs slightly, tuning performance is unaffected.
• Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is started when a reactor or
surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) is connected between the inverter and
motor. Remove it before starting tuning.
<Setting>
(1) Parameter setting
• Set the motor capacity (kW) in Pr. 80 and select the general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control.
• Refer to the parameter details list and set the following parameters:
1) Set "1" in Pr. 96.
2) Set the rated motor current (A) in Pr. 9.
3) Set the rated motor voltage (V) in Pr. 83.
4) Set the rated motor frequency (Hz) in Pr. 84.
5) Select the motor using Pr. 71.
• Standard motor .....................................................................Pr. 71 = "3" or "103"
• Constant-torque motor ..........................................................Pr. 71 = "13" or "113"
• Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR 4 poles (1.5kW or less)........... Pr. 71 = "23" or "123"
Note: Pr. 83 and Pr. 84 are only displayed when the general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control is selected.
In these parameters, set the values given on the motor plate. Set 200V/60Hz or
400V/60Hz if the standard or other motor has more than one rated value.
After tuning is over, set the Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay" value to the rated
current at the operating voltage/frequency.
139
4
PARAMETERS
„ Parameter details
Parameter
Number
9
Setting
0 to 500A
0, 100
1, 101
3, 103
13, 113
23, 123
71 (Note)
83
84
90
96
5, 105
15, 115
6, 106
16, 116
0 to 1000V
50 to 120Hz
0 to 50Ω,
9999
0
1
Description
Set the rated motor current (A).
Thermal characteristics suitable for standard motor
Thermal characteristics suitable for Mitsubishi's constanttorque motor
Standard motor
Select "offline
Constant-torque motor
auto tuning
Mitsubishi's SF-JR4P standard motor
setting"
(1.5kW or less)
Standard motor
Star
Direct input of
connection
Constant-torque motor
motor constants
Standard motor
Delta
enabled
connection
Constant-torque motor
Set the rated motor voltage (V).
Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
Tuning data
(Values measured by offline auto tuning are set automatically.)
Offline auto tuning is not performed.
Offline auto tuning is performed.
Note: The electronic thermal relay function characteristics are also selected
simultaneously. By setting any of "100 to 123", the electronic thermal relay
function changes to the thermal characteristic of the constant-torque motor
when the RT signal switches on.
(2) Tuning execution
• For PU operation or combined operation 2, press the FWD or REV key.
• For external operation or combined operation 1, switch on the run command.
Note: 1. To force tuning to end
STOP
• Switch on the MRS or RES signal or press the RESET
key to end.
• Switch off the tuning start command to make a forced end.
2. During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid:
• Input signals
<Valid signals>
MRS, RES, STF, STR
• Output signals
RUN, FM, A, B, C
3. Special caution should be exercised when a sequence has been designed to
open the mechanical brake with the RUN signal.
140
PARAMETERS
(3) Monitoring the offline tuning status
When the parameter unit (FR-PU04) is used, the Pr. 96 value is displayed during tuning
on the main monitor as shown below. When the operation panel is used, the same value
as on the FR-PU04 is only displayed:
• Operation panel display
1. Setting
Displayed
value
(For inverter trip)
2. Tuning in
progress
1
3. Completion
2
3
• Parameter unit (FR-PU04) main monitor
1. Setting
Display
1
STOP PU
2. Tuning in
progress
TUNE
2
STF FWD PU
4. Erroractivated end
9
(For inverter trip)
3. Completion
TUNE
3
COMPLETION
STF STOP PU
4. Erroractivated end
TUNE
ERROR 9
STF STOP PU
• Reference: Offline auto tuning time (factory setting) is about 10s.
(4) Ending the offline auto tuning
1) Confirm the Pr. 96 value.
• Normal end: "3" is displayed.
• Abnormal end: "9", "91", "92" or "93" is displayed.
• Forced end: "8" is displayed.
2) When tuning ended normally
4
STOP
For PU operation or combined operation 2, press the RESET
key. For external
operation or combined operation 1, switch off the start signal (STF or STR) once.
This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to
the ordinary indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be done.)
Do not change the Pr.96 setting after completion of tuning (3). If the Pr.96 setting is
changed, tuning data is made invalid. If the Pr.96 setting is changed, tuning must be
performed again.
3) When tuning was ended due to an error
Offline auto tuning did not end normally. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Reset the inverter and start tuning all over again.
141
PARAMETERS
4) Error display definitions
Error Display
Error Cause
Remedy
9
Inverter trip
Make setting again.
91
Current limit (stall prevention) function was
activated.
Increase
acceleration/deceleration time.
Set "1" in Pr. 156.
92
Converter output voltage reached 75% of
rated value.
Check for fluctuation of power
supply voltage.
93
Calculation error
Check the motor wiring and
make setting again.
No connection with motor will result in a calculation (93) error.
5) When tuning was forced to end
An forced end occurs when you forced the tuning to end by pressing the
or switching off the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning.
In this case, the offline auto tuning has not ended normally.
(The motor constants are not set.)
Reset the inverter and restart the tuning.
STOP
RESET
key
Note: 1. The R1 motor constant measured during the offline auto tuning is stored as a
parameter and its data is held until the offline auto tuning is performed again.
2. An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning
error.
After power is restored, the inverter goes into the ordinary operation mode.
Therefore, when STF (STR) is on, the motor runs in forward (reverse)
rotation.
3. Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note
that if an error retry has been set, retry is ignored.
4. The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0Hz.
CAUTION
When the offline auto tuning is used for an elevating machine, e.g. a lifter,
it may drop due to insufficient torque.
142
PARAMETERS
<Setting the motor constant as desired>
z To set the motor constant without using the offline auto tuning data
<Operating procedure>
1. Set any of the following values in Pr. 71:
Star Connection
Motor
Setting
Delta Connection
Motor
Standard motor
5 or 105
6 or 106
Constant-torque motor
15 or 115
16 or 116
By setting any of "105 to 116", the electronic thermal relay function changes to the
thermal characteristics of the constant-torque motor when the RT signal switches on.
2. Set "801" in Pr. 77.
(Only when the Pr. 80 setting is other than "9999", the parameter values of the
motor excitation current (Pr. 82) and motor constant (Pr. 90) can be displayed.
Though the parameters other than Pr. 82 and Pr. 90 can also be displayed, they
are parameters for manufacturer setting and their values should not be changed.)
3. In the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired
values:
Parameter
Number
Name
Setting Range
Setting
Increments
Factory
Setting
82
Motor excitation
current
0 to 500A, 9999
0.01A
9999
90
Motor constant
(R1)
0 to 50Ω, 9999
0.001Ω
9999
4. Return the Pr. 77 setting to the original value.
5. Refer to the following table and set Pr. 84:
Parameter
Number
Name
Setting Range
Setting
Increments
Factory
Setting
84
Rated motor
frequency
50 to 120Hz
0.01Hz
60Hz
Note: 1. The Pr. 90 value may only be read when general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control has been selected.
2. Set "9999" in Pr. 90 to use the standard motor constant (including that for the
constant-torque motor).
3. If "star connection" is mistaken for "delta connection" or vice versa during
setting of Pr. 71, general-purpose magnetic flux vector control cannot be
exercised normally.
143
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.36 Computer link operation (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 342)
Pr. 117 "communication station number"
Related parameter
Pr. 118 "communication speed"
Pr. 146 "frequency setting
Pr. 119 "stop bit length"
command selection"
Pr. 120 "parity check presence/absence"
Pr. 121 "number of communication retries"
Pr. 122 "communication check time interval"
Pr. 123 "waiting time setting"
Pr. 124 "CR/LF selection"
Pr. 342 "E 2 PROM write selection"
Used to perform required settings for RS-485 communication between the inverter and
personal computer.
Using the inverter setup software (FR-SW†-SETUP-WE (or -WJ for Japanese
version)), parameter setting, monitoring, etc. can be done efficiently.
z The motor can be run from the PU connector of the inverter using RS-485
communication.
Communication specifications
Communication
specifications
Conforming standard
Number of inverters connected
Communication speed
Control protocol
Communication method
Character system
Stop bit length
Terminator
Parity check
Check
system Sum check
Waiting time setting
EIA-485 (RS-485)
1:N (maximum 32 inverters)
Selectable between 19200, 9600 and 4800bps
Asynchronous
Half-duplex
ASCII (7 bits/8 bits) selectable
Selectable between 1 bit and 2 bits.
CR/LF (presence/absence selectable)
Selectable between presence (even/odd) and absence
Present
Selectable between presence and absence
z For the instruction codes of the parameters, refer to Appendix 1 "Instruction
Code List" (page 242).
REMARKS
For computer link operation, set 65520 (HFFF0) as the value "8888" and 65535
(HFFFF) as the value "9999".
144
PARAMETERS
*
Parameter Number
117
118
Factory Setting
0
192
119
1
120
121
122*
123
124
342
2
1
0
9999
1
0
Setting Range
0 to 31
48, 96, 192
Data length 8
0, 1
Data length 7
10, 11
0, 1, 2
0 to 10ms, 9999
0, 0.1 to 999.8 s, 9999
0 to 150ms, 9999
0, 1, 2
0, 1
When making communication, set any value other than 0 in Pr. 122 "communication
check time interval".
<Setting>
To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, initialization of
the communication specifications must be made to the inverter. If initial setting is not
made or there is a setting fault, data transfer cannot be made.
Note: After making the initial setting of the parameters, always reset the inverter. After
you have changed the communication-related parameters, communication
cannot be made until the inverter is reset.
Parameter
Number
Name
117
Communication
station number
118
Communication
speed
119
Stop bit length
120
Parity check
presence/
absence
121
Number of
communication
retries
Setting
Description
Station number specified for communication from the
PU connector.
0 to 31
Set the inverter station numbers when two or more
inverters are connected to one personal computer.
48
4800bps
96
9600bps
192
19200bps
0 Stop bit length 1 bit
8 bits
1 Stop bit length 2 bits
10 Stop bit length 1 bit
7 bits
11 Stop bit length 2 bits
0
Absent
1
Odd parity present
2
Even parity present
Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of
a data receive error.
0 to 10 If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the
permissible value, the inverter will come to an alarm
stop.
If a communication error occurs, the inverter will not
come to an alarm stop. At this time, the inverter can be
9999
coasted to a stop by MRS or RES input.
(65535) During a communication error (H0 to H5), the minor fault
signal (LF) is switched on. Allocate the used terminal
with any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (multi-function outputs).
145
4
PARAMETERS
Parameter
Number
Name
122
Communication
check time
interval
123
Waiting time
setting
124
CR/LF
selection
342*
E2PROM write
selection
Setting
Description
0
No communication
Set the communication check time [seconds] interval.
If a no-communication state persists for longer than the
permissible time, the inverter will come to an alarm stop.
Communication check suspension
Set the waiting time [ms] between data transmission to
the inverter and response.
Set with communication data.
Without CR/LF
With CR, without LF
With CR/LF
When parameter write is performed from the
computer, parameters are written to E2PROM.
When parameter write is performed from the
computer, parameters are written to RAM.
0.1 to
999.8
9999
0 to 150
9999
0
1
2
0
1
* When you have set write to RAM, powering off the inverter clears the parameter values that
have been changed. Therefore the parameter values available when power is switched on
again are those stored previously in E2PROM.
When the parameter values will be changed frequently, set "1" in Pr. 342 to choose write to
RAM. Performing frequent parameter write with "E2PROM write" set will shorten the life of the
E2PROM.
The Pr. 342 " E2PROM write selection" setting is also valid when the communication option is
fitted.
• Set "1" or "9999" in Pr. 146 "frequency setting command selection" .
REMARKS
When parameter is set to without E2PROM write (Pr.342="1"), performing power
reset or terminal reset returns the setting value to the original value (value stored in
E2PROM).
<Computer programming>
(1) Communication protocol
Data communication between the computer and inverter is performed using the
following procedure:
Data read
Computer
↓ (Data flow)
Inverter
Inverter
↓ (Data flow)
Computer
*2
1)
2)
*1
4)
3)
5)
Time
Data write
*1. If a data error is detected and a retry must be made, execute retry operation with the
user program. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive
retries exceeds the parameter setting.
*2. On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns "reply data 3)" to the
computer again. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive
data errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting.
146
PARAMETERS
(2) Communication operation presence/absence and data format types
Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows:
No.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Operation
Run
Running Parameter
Command Frequency
Write
Communication request is
sent to the inverter in
A'
accordance with the user
program in the computer.
Inverter data processing
Present
time
No error*
Reply data
(Request
C
from the
accepted)
inverter
(Data 1) is
With error
checked for
(request
D
error.
rejected)
Computer processing delay
Absent
time
Answer from No error*
(No inverter Absent
computer in
processing)
response to
reply data 3). With error.
(Data 3) is
(Inverter
Absent
checked for
outputs 3)
error)
again)
Inverter
Reset
Monitoring
Parameter
Read
A
(A")
Note 1
A
(A")
Note 2
A
B
B
Present
Present
Absent
Present
Present
E
(E")
Note 2
C
C
Absent
E,E'
(E")
Note 1
D
D
Absent
F
F
Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent
G
G
Absent
Absent
Absent
H
H
* In the communication request data from the computer to the inverter, 10ms or more is
also required after "no data error (ACK)". (Refer to page 150.)
Note: 1. Setting any of "0.01 to 9998" in Pr. 37 "speed display" and "1" in instruction
code "HFF" changes the data format to A" or E" (400V class). Regardless of
the instruction code "HFF" setting, the data format for 200V or 100V class is
always A" or E". The output frequency is the value of the speed display and its
unit is 0.001r/min. If the instruction code FF is not 1, the unit is 1r/min and the
4-digit data format can be used.
2. The read/write data format of Pr. 37 "speed display" is always E"/A".
147
4
PARAMETERS
(3) Data format
Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in ASCII code
(hexadecimal code).
• Data format types
1) Communication request data from computer to inverter
[Data write]
Format A
*1
ENQ
1
Format A'
2
*1
ENQ
1
Format A''
*3
*2 Inverter
Instruction
Waiting
station
code
time
number
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
5
6
8
9
Sum
check
Data
7
8
9
*3
*2 Inverter
Instruction
*1
Waiting
station
code
ENQ
time
number
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
*4
13 ←Number of
12
characters
*2 Inverter
*3
Instruction
Waiting
station
code
number
time
2
Sum
check
Data
10
*4
Number of
11 ←characters
Sum
check
Data
7
8
9
Sum
check
*4
10
11
12
13
*4
15 ←Number of
characters
14
[Data read]
Format B
*1
ENQ
1
*3
*2 Inverter
Instruction
Waiting
station
code
time
number
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Number of
9 ←characters
2) Reply data from inverter to computer during data write
[No data error detected]
[Data error detected]
*2 Inverter
*2 Inverter
*1
*1
Error
*4
Format D
Format C
station
station
ACK
NAK
code
number
number
Number of
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4 ←characters
*4
Number of
5 ←characters
3) Reply data from inverter to computer during data read
[No data error detected]
[Data error detected]
*2 Inverter
station
number
Format E
*1
STX
Format E'
1
2
3
*1 *2 Inverter
STX station
number
1
2
3
*1
Format E''
STX
1
4
5
Read
data
4
3
6
*1
ETX
5
*2 Inverter
station
number
2
*1
ETX
Read data
6
7
Sum
check
8
9
Sum
check
*4
7
9 ←Number of
characters
8
*1
ETX
Read data
4
5
6
7
10
*4
8
9
10
Format F
11
*1 *2 Inverter Error
NAK station
code
number
1
2
3
4
Sum
check
11
*4
5
*4
12
13
4) Send data from computer to inverter during data read
[No data error detected]
(can be skipped)
*2 Inverter
*1
Format G
station
ACK
number
1
2
3
[Data error detected]
Format H
*4
4 ←Number of characters
148
*1
NAK
1
*2 Inverter
station
number
2
3
*4
4
Number of
← characters
PARAMETERS
*1. Indicate a control code. (Refer to (4) Data definitions.)
*2. The inverter station numbers may be set between H00 and H1F (stations 0 and 31)
in hexadecimal.
*3. When the Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" setting is other than "9999", create the
communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number
of characters is decremented by 1.)
*4. CR, LF code
When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, CR (carriage return) and LF
(line feed) (codes) are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers.
In this case, setting must also be made on the inverter according to the computer. Also,
the presence or absence of the CR and LF codes can be selected using Pr. 124.
(4) Data definitions
1)Control codes
Signal
ASCII Code
STX
H02
Description
Start of Text (Start of data)
ETX
H03
End of Text (End of data)
ENQ
H05
Enquiry (Communication request)
ACK
H06
Acknowledge (No data error detected)
LF
H0A
Line Feed
CR
H0D
Carriage Return
NAK
H15
Negative Acknowledge (Data error detected)
2)Inverter station number
Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer.
3)Instruction code
Specify the processing request, e.g. operation or monitoring, given by the
computer to the inverter. Hence, the inverter can be run and monitored in various
ways by specifying the instruction code as appropriate. (Refer to page 242.)
4)Data
Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the
inverter. The definitions and ranges of set data are determined in accordance with
the instruction codes. (Refer to page 242.)
5)Waiting time
Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data at the inverter from the
computer and the transmission of reply data. Set the waiting time in accordance
with the response time of the computer between 0 and 150ms in 10ms increments
(e.g. 1 = 10ms, 2 = 20ms).
Computer
↓
Inverter
Inverter
↓
Computer
Inverter data processing time
= waiting time + data check time
(setting×10ms) (12ms)
Note: When the Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" setting is other than "9999", create the
communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The
number of characters is decremented by 1.)
149
4
PARAMETERS
6)Response time
Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
Inverter data processing time = waiting time + data check time
(set value 10ms)
(12ms)
Computer
Inverter
STX
Inverter
Computer
ACK
ENQ
10ms or
more required
10ms or
more required
Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
Inverter data processing time = waiting time + data check time
(set value 10ms)
(12ms)
Computer
Inverter
Inverter
ENQ
10ms or
more required
Computer
Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
[Formula for data sending time]
Communication
Number of data
Data
1
x
characters
x (Totalspecification
number of bits) = sending
Communication speed (bps) (Refer to page 148)
time (s)
(See below)
zCommunication specification
Name
Stop bit length
Data length
Parity
check
Yes
No
Number of Bits
1 bit
2 bits
7 bits
8 bits
1 bit
0 bit
In addition to the bits in the above table, 1 bit is required for the start bit.
Minimum total number of bits....... 9 bits
Maximum total number of bits...... 12 bits
150
PARAMETERS
(Example 1)
Computer → inverter
ASCII code →
E
N
Q
H05
Station Instruction
number code
Waiting
time
7)Sum check code
The sum check code is 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte
(8 bits) of the sum (binary) derived from the checked ASCII data.
Data
Sum
check
code
1
0
1
E
1
0
7
A D F
4 ←Binary
H30 H31 H45 H31 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H46 H34
code
H
H H
H
H
H
H H
H
30 + 31 + 45 + 31 + 31 + 30 + 37 + 41 + 44
H
=1F4
Sum
(Example 2)
inverter → Computer
ASCII code →
S
T
X
H02
Station
number
Read time
E
T
X
Sum
check
code
0
1
1
7
7
0
3
0 ←Binary code
H30 H31 H31 H37 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30
H H
H
H
H
H
30 + 31 + 31 + 37 + 37 + 30
H
=130
Sum
8)Error code
If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its definition is sent back to
the computer together with the NAK code. (Refer to page 155.)
Note: 1. When the data from the computer has an error, the inverter will not accept
that data.
2. Any data communication, e.g. run command, monitoring, is started when the
computer gives a communication request. Without the computer's command,
the inverter does not return any data. For monitoring, therefore, design the
program to cause the computer to provide a data read request as required.
3. When the parameter setting is read or written, the data of the link parameter
expansion setting changes depending on the parameter. For the data, refer to
the parameter instruction code list on page 242.
CAUTION
When the inverter's permissible communication check time interval is not
set, interlocks are provided to disable operation to prevent hazardous
conditions. Always set the communication check time interval before
starting operation.
Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once
when the computer provides a communication request. If communication
is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc, the inverter
cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has
elapsed, the inverter will come to an alarm stop (E.PUE).
The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching on its RES signal or by
switching power off.
If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault
etc, the inverter does not detect such a fault. This should be fully noted.
151
4
PARAMETERS
<Setting items and set data>
After completion of parameter settings, set the instruction codes and data then start
communication from the computer to allow various types of operation control and monitoring.
1
Instruction
Code
Item
No.
Operation
mode
Read
H7B
Write
HFB
Output
frequency
[speed]
Output
current
Output
voltage
H6F
H70
H71
Number of
Data Digits
(Instruction
code
FF=1)
Description
H0001: External operation
H0002: Communication operation
H0001: External operation
H0002: Communication operation
H0000 to HFFFF:Output frequency (hexadecimal)
in 0.01Hz increments
[Speed (hexadecimal) in r/min
increments if Pr. 37 = 1 to 9998]
H0000 to HFFFF:Output current (hexadecimal) in
0.01A increments
H0000 to HFFFF:Output voltage (hexadecimal) in
0.1V increments
H0000 to HFFFF:Two most recent alarm
definitions
Alarm definition display
example (instruction code H74)
b15
4 digits
4 digits
(6 digits)
4 digits
4 digits
b0
b8b7
2
Monitoring
00 11 000 01 010 0 000
Previous alarm Most recent alarm
(H30)
(HA0)
Alarm data
Alarm
definition
H74 to
H77
Data
Description
Data
H00
No alarm
H80
Description
GF
H10
OC1
H81
LF
H11
OC2
H90
OHT
H12
OC3
HA0
OPT
H20
OV1
HB0
PE
H21
OV2
HB1
PUE
H22
OV3
HB2
RET
H30
THT
HC2
P24
H31
THM
HF3
E. 3
H40
FIN
HF6
E. 6
H60
OLT
HF7
E. 7
H70
BE
152
4 digits
PARAMETERS
No.
Item
Instruction
Code
b7
0 0
3
Run command
HFA
5
Inverter status
monitor
Set frequency
read (RAM)
Set frequency
read (E2PROM)
Set frequency
write (RAM)
H7A
H6D
H6E
HED
Set frequency
write (E2PROM)
HEE
6
Inverter reset
HFD
7
Alarm definition
batch clear
HF4
b0 b0 :
0 b1 : Forward rotation (STF)
0 0 0 0 1
[For example 1]
b2 : Reverse rotation (STR)
b3 :
b4 :
b5 :
b6 :
b7 :
[Example 1] H02 ... Forward
rotation
[Example 2] H00 ... Stop
b7
0 0
4
Number of
Data Digits
(Instruction
code
FF=1)
Description
b0
0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
[Example 1] H02 ... During forward b4:
rotation
b5:
[Example 2] H80 ... Stop due to
b6:
alarm
b7:
0
0
0
0
1
(For example 1)
Inverter running (RUN)
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Up to frequency (SU)
Overload (OL)
2 digits
2 digits
Frequency detection (FU)
Alarm occurrence
Reads the set frequency (RAM or E 2PROM).
H0000 to H9C40: 0.01Hz increments
(hexadecimal)
H0000 to H9C40: 0.01Hz increments (hexadecimal)
(0 to 400.00Hz)
To change the set frequency consecutively,
write data to the inverter RAM.
(Instruction code: HED)
H9696: Resets the inverter.
As the inverter is reset on start of
communication by the computer, the inverter
cannot send reply data back to the computer.
H9696: Batch clear of alarm history
4 digits
(6 digits)
4 digits
(6 digits)
4 digits
4 digits
All parameters return to the factory settings.
Any of four different all clear operations is
performed according to the data.
Data
8
All parameter
clear
HFC
Pr. CommuCalibranication
tion
Pr.
H9696
H9966
H5A5A
H55AA
{
{
×
×
×
{
×
{
Other
Pr.*
HEC
HFF
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
When all parameter clear is executed for H9696
or H9966, communication-related parameter
settings also return to the factory settings.
When resuming operation, set the parameters
again.
* Pr. 75 and Pr. 146 are not cleared.
153
4 digits
4
PARAMETERS
No.
Item
9
Parameter write
10 Parameter read
Link
parameter
expansion
setting
Second
parameter
changing
12
(Instruction
code
HFF = 1)
Instruction
Code
Description
H80 to
HFD
H00 to
H7B
Refer to the "Instruction Code List" (page 242)
and write and/or read the values as required.
When setting Pr. 100 and later, link parameter
extended setting must be set.
Parameter description is changed according to
the H00 to H09 setting.
For details of the settings, refer to the
parameter instruction code list (page 242).
When setting the bias/gain (instruction codes
H5E to H61, HDE to HE1)
parameters
H00: Offset/gain
H01: Analog
H02: Analog value of terminal
Read
H7F
Write
HFF
Read
H6C
Write
HEC
11
Number of
Data Digits
(Instruction
code
FF=1)
4 digits
2 digits
2 digits
REMARKS
For the instruction codes HFF, HEC, their set values are held once they are written,
but changed to 0 when the inverter is reset or all clear is performed.
154
PARAMETERS
<Error Code List>
The corresponding error code in the following list is displayed if an error is detected in
any communication request data from the computer:
Error
Code
Item
Definition
H0
Computer NAK
error
The number of errors consecutively detected
in communication request data from the
computer is greater than allowed number of
retries.
H1
Parity error
The parity check result does not match the
specified parity.
H2
Sum check
error
The sum check code in the computer does
not match that of the data received by the
inverter.
H3
Protocol error
H4
Framing error
The stop bit length is not as specified by
initialization.
H5
Overrun error
New data has been sent by the computer
before the inverter completes receiving the
preceding data.
H6
⎯
Inverter Operation
Brought to an
alarm stop (E.PUE)
if error occurs
continuously more
Data received by the inverter is in wrong
protocol, data receive is not completed within than the allowable
given time, or CR and LF are not as set in the number of retries.
parameter.
⎯
⎯
Does not accept
The character received is invalid (other than 0 received data but is
to 9, A to F, control code).
not brought to an
alarm stop.
H7
Character error
H8
⎯
⎯
⎯
H9
⎯
⎯
⎯
Parameter write was attempted in other than
the computer link operation mode or during
inverter operation.
HA
Mode error
HB
Instruction code
The specified command does not exist.
error
HC
Data range
error
Invalid data has been specified for parameter
write, frequency setting, etc.
Does not accept
received data but is
not brought to an
alarm stop.
HD
⎯
⎯
⎯
HE
⎯
⎯
⎯
HF
⎯
⎯
⎯
155
4
PARAMETERS
(5) Communication specifications for RS-485 communication
Operation Mode
Operation
Location
Communication
Operation from PU
Connector
Item
Run command (start)
Computer
user program
via PU
connector
Control circuit
terminal
Enabled
External Operation
Disabled
Running frequency setting Enabled
Enabled
(Combined operation
mode)
Monitoring
Enabled
Enabled
Parameter write
Enabled (*2)
Disabled (*2)
Parameter read
Enabled
Enabled
Inverter reset
Enabled
Enabled
Stop command (*1)
Enabled
Enabled
Inverter reset
Enabled
Enabled
Run command
Disabled
Enabled
Running frequency setting Disabled
Enabled
*1. As set in Pr. 75 "reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection".
*2. As set in Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection".
Note: At occurrence of RS-485 communication fault, the inverter cannot be reset from
the computer.
(6) Operation at alarm occurrence
Operation Mode
Fault Location
Inverter fault
Communication
Operation
(PU connector)
Status
Inverter operation
Communication
Communication error Inverter operation
(Communication from
Communication
PU connector)
External
Operation
Stop
Stop
Continued
Continued
Stop/continued (*3)
Continued
Stop
Stop
PU connector
PU connector
*3. Can be selected using the corresponding parameter (factory-set to stop).
(7) Communication error
Fault Location
Error Message
Communication error
Not displayed
(Error in communication from PU connector)
156
Remarks
Error code is E.PUE
PARAMETERS
4.2.37 PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)
Pr. 128 "PID action selection"
Related parameters
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input
terminal function selection)
Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal
function selection)
Pr. 902 to Pr. 905 (frequency
setting voltage (current)
biases and gains)
Pr. 129 "PID proportional band"
Pr. 130 "PID integral time"
Pr. 131 "upper limit"
Pr. 132 "lower limit"
Pr. 133 "PID action set point for PU
operation"
Pr. 134 "PID differential time"
The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate, air volume or
pressure.
• The voltage input signal (0 to ±5V or 0 to ±10V) or Pr. 133 setting is used as a set
point and the 4 to 20mA DC current input signal used as a feedback value to
constitute a feedback system for PID control.
Parameter
Number
128
Factory
Setting
0
0, 20, 21, 50, 51, 60, 61 *
129
100%
0.1 to 1000%, 9999
130
131
132
133
134
1s
9999
9999
0%
9999
0.1 to 3600s, 9999
0 to 100%, 9999
0 to 100%, 9999
0 to 100%
0.01 to 10.00s, 9999
Setting Range
Remarks
9999: No proportional
control
9999: No integral control
9999: Function invalid
9999: Function invalid
9999: No differential control
* "50, 51, 60, 61" can be set when used with the FR-E5NL.
<Setting>
(1) Basic PID control configuration
Inverter circuit :
Pr. 133 or Treminal 2
Set point
0 to ±5 (0 to ±10) VDC
PID operation
+-
1
Kp 1+ Ti S +Td S
Motor
Manipulated
variable
IM
Terminal 4
Feedback signal (Process value)
Kp: Proportion constant
Ti: Integral time
157
4 to 20mADC
S: Operator
Td: Differential time
4
PARAMETERS
(2) PID action overview
1) PI action
A combination of proportional control action (P) and integral control action (I) for
providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation and changes with
time.
[Operation example for stepped changes of process value]
Deviation
Set point
Note: PI action is the sum of P and I actions.
Process value
P action
Time
I action
Time
PI action
Time
2) PD action
A combination of proportional control action
(P) and differential control action (D) for providing a manipulated variable in
response to deviation speed to improve the transient characteristic.
[Operation example for proportional changes of process value]
Set point
Note: PD action is the sum of P and D
actions.
Deviation
Process
value
P action
Time
D action
Time
PD action
Time
3) PID action
The PI action and PD action are combined
to utilize the advantages of both actions for control.
Set point
Note: The PID action is the sum of the P,
I and D actions.
Process
value
P action
I action
D action
Deviation
Time
Time
Time
y=at2+bt+c
PID action
158
Time
PARAMETERS
4) Reverse action
Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point
- process value) is positive, and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation
is negative.
Set point
Deviation
[Heating]
Set point
X>0
X<0
+
−
Cold → up
Hot → down
Process value
Feedback signal
(Process value)
5) Forward action
Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point
- process value) is negative, and decreases the manipulated variable if
deviation is positive.
Process value
[Cooling]
Set point
+
−
X>0
X<0
Set point
Too cold → down
Hot → up
Feedback signal
(Process value)
Deviation
Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable (output frequency)
Deviation
Positive
Negative
Reverse
action
Forward
action
Ò
Ô
Ô
Ò
4
159
PARAMETERS
(3) Wiring example
Pr. 128 = 20
Pr. 190 = 14
Pr. 191 = 15
Pr. 192 = 16
Inverter
MCCB
Power supply
R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
Forward rotation
STF
Reverse rotation
STR
SD
10
Setting potentiometer
(Set point setting)
2
5
U
V
W
Pump
IM
P
For 2-wire
For 3-wire
type
type
(Note 2)
Detector
Upper limit
SU
Lower limit
RUN
+
+ +
SE Limit signal common
A
C
4
Motor
Forward rotation output
Reverse rotation output
(OUT)
(COM)
(24V)
•
•
•
•
Forward (reverse)
rotation output
signal common
(Process value) 4 to 20mADC
0
24V
DC power
(Note 1)
supply
AC1φ
200/220V 50/60Hz
Note: 1. The power supply must be selected in accordance with the power
specifications of the detector used.
2. The output signal terminals used depends on the Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 settings.
160
PARAMETERS
(4) I/O signals
2
Terminal
Used
2
4
4
Input
Signal
Upper limit output
Output
FUP
FDN
Function
Set point input
Process value
input
Depending on
Pr. 190 to
Pr. 192
RL
Lower limit output
Forward (reverse)
rotation direction
output
Description
Enter the set point for PID control.
Enter the 4 to 20mA process value
signal from the detector.
Output to indicate that the process value
signal exceeded the upper limit value.
Output to indicate that the process value
signal exceeded the lower limit value.
"Hi" is output to indicate that the output
indication of the parameter unit is
forward rotation (FWD) or "Low" to
indicate that it is reverse rotation (REV)
or stop (STOP).
z Enter the set point across inverter terminals 2-5 or in Pr. 133 and enter the process
value signal across inverter terminals 4-5. At this time, set "20" or "21" in Pr. 128.
Item
Entry
Set point
Across terminals
2-5
Process
value
Pr. 133
Across terminals
4-5
Description
When "0" is set in Pr. 73 (5V
Set 0V as 0% and
5V as 100%.
selected for terminal 2).
Set 0V as 0% and
When "1" is set in Pr. 73 (10V
10V as 100%.
selected for terminal 2).
Set the set point (%) in Pr. 133.
4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.
4
161
PARAMETERS
(5) Parameter setting
Parameter
Number
Setting
128
0
20
21
50
51
60
61
Name
PID action
selection
0.1 to
1000%
130
0.1 to
3600s
PID
proportional
band
9999
PID integral
time
9999
0 to
100%
Upper limit
9999
132
0 to
100%
Lower limit
9999
133
134
PID reverse action
PID forward action
Refer to the E5NL instruction manual for details.
129
131
Description
No PID action
For heating, pressure control, etc.
For cooling, etc.
PID action
set point for
PU
operation
0 to
100%
0.01 to
10.00 s
PID
differential
time
9999
If the proportional band is narrow (parameter setting is
small), the manipulated variable varies greatly with a
slight change of the process value. Hence, as the
proportional band narrows, the response sensitivity
(gain) improves but the stability deteriorates, e.g.
hunting occurs.
Gain K = 1/proportional band
No proportional control
Time required for the integral (I) action to provide the
same manipulated variable as that for the proportional
(P) action. As the integral time decreases, the set point
is reached earlier but hunting occurs more easily.
No integral control.
Set the upper limit. If the feedback value exceeds the
setting, the FUP signal is output. (Process value of 4mA
is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.)
No function
Set the lower limit. (If the feedback value falls below the
setting, the FDN signal is output. Process value of 4mA
is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.)
No function
Only valid for the PU command in the PU operation or
PU/external combined operation mode.
For external operation, the voltage across 2-5 is the
set point.
(Pr. 902 value is equivalent to 0% and Pr. 903 value to
100%.)
Time required for the differential (D) action to provide the
same process value as that for the proportional (P)
action. As the differential time increases, greater
response is made to the deviation change.
No differential control.
(6) Adjustment procedure
Parameter setting
Adjust the PID control parameters, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134.
Terminal setting
Set the output terminal functions. (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192)
Run
162
PARAMETERS
(7) Calibration example
(A detector of 4mA at 0°C and 20mA at 50°C is used to adjust the room temperature to
25°C under PID control. The set point is given to across inverter terminals 2-5 (0-5V).)
START
Convert the set point into %.
Calculate the ratio of the set point
to the detector output.
…… Detector specifications
When the detector used has the specifications that 0°C is
equivalent to 4mA and 50°C to 20mA, the set point of 25°C is
50% because 4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.
…… When the set point setting input (0 to 5V) and detector output
(4 to 20mA) must be calibrated, make the following calibration∗.
Calibration.
…… Set point = 50%
Set the set point.
Since the specifications of terminal 2 are such that 0% is
Enter a voltage to across
equivalent to 0V and 100% to 5V, enter 2.5V into terminal 2.
terminals 2-5 according to the set
point (%).
Determine the set point.
Determine the set point of the item
to be adjusted.
Operation
Set the proportional band and
integral time to slightly higher
values and the differential time to
9999 (No control), and switch on
the start signal.
Is the process
value steady?
…… Set the room temperature to 25°C
Set "20" or "21" in Pr. 128 to enable PID control.
…… For PU operation, set the set point (0 to 100%) in Pr. 133.
During operation, set the proportional band and integral time to
slightly higher values and set the differential time to 9999 (No
control). In accordance with the system operation, reduce the
proportional band and integral time. For slow response system
where a deadband exists, differential control shuold be turned
on and increased slowly.
Yes
No
Adjust parameters.
Set the proportional band and integral
time to slightly higher values and set
the differential time to a slightly lower
value to stabilize the process value.
Optimize parameters.
While the process value is steady, the
proportional band and integral time may
be reduced and the differential time
increased throughout the operation.
END
∗ When calibration is required, use Pr. 902 and Pr. 903 (terminal 2) or
Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 (terminal 4) to calibrate the detector output and
set point setting input in the PU mode during an inverter stop.
163
4
PARAMETERS
<Set point input calibration>
1. Apply the input voltage of 0% set point setting (e.g. 0V) to across terminals 2-5.
2. Make calibration using Pr. 902. At this time, enter the frequency which should be
output by the inverter at the deviation of 0% (e.g. 0Hz).
3. Apply the voltage of 100% set point setting (e.g. 5V) to across terminals 2-5.
4. Make calibration using Pr. 903. At this time, enter the frequency which should be
output by the inverter at the deviation of 100% (e.g. 60Hz).
<Detector output calibration>
1. Apply the output current of 0% detector setting (e.g. 4mA) across terminals 4-5.
2. Make calibration using Pr. 904.
3. Apply the output current of 100% detector setting (e.g. 20mA) across terminals 4-5.
4. Make calibration using Pr. 905.
Note: The frequencies set in Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 should be the same as set in Pr. 902
and Pr. 903.
The results of the above calibration are as shown below:
[Set point setting]
0
Manipulated
variable(Hz)
(%)
100
0
0
5
[Manipulated variable]
[Detection value]
(%)
100
(V)
60
0
0 4
20 (mA)
164
0
100
Deviation
(%)
PARAMETERS
Note: 1. Entering multi-speed (RH, RM, RL signal) or JOG operation will stop PID
control and start multi-speed or JOG operation.
2. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal
function selection) may affect the other functions. Confirm the functions of
the corresponding terminals before making settings.
3. When you have chosen the PID control, the minimum frequency is as set in
Pr. 902 and the maximum frequency is as set in Pr. 903.
(The settings of Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" and Pr. 2 "minimum frequency"
are also valid.)
4. When the control is switched to PID control during normal operation, the
frequency command value calculated by PID operation using 0Hz as
standard is used without the frequency during the operation.
PID set point
Frequency
command
PID action
Normal operation
Frequency command
during normal operation
ON
PID operation
Normal operation
Operation when control is switched to PID control during normal operation
4
165
PARAMETERS
4.2.38 Frequency setting command selection (Pr. 146)
Pr. 146 "frequency setting command
selection"
Related parameters
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
• Used to switch the frequency setting between the frequency setting using the built-in
frequency setting potentiometer and the digital frequency setting using the
/
key.
Parameter
Number
146
Factory
Setting
0
Setting
Range
0, 1, 9999
<Setting>
Pr. 146 Setting
0
1
Frequency Setting Command
Built-in frequency setting potentiometer valid
Frequency setting using the built-in frequency setting potentiometer
Built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid
Digital frequency setting using the
key
/
Using this method, the frequency is varied continuously by pressing
/
the
key.
The frequency is varied only while the
/
key is pressed.
• Frequency setting using the built-in frequency setting
potentiometer is made valid when the frequency setting using the
/
9999
key is "0Hz".
(When you press the
key during operation performed by
/
the frequency setting potentiometer, the digital frequency setting is
selected and the frequency setting using the potentiometer is made
invalid.)
• When power is switched on with "0" set in Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection", the PU operation mode is selected.
166
PARAMETERS
4.2.39 Output current detection function (Pr. 150, Pr. 151)
Pr. 150 "output current detection level"
Related parameters
Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
(output terminal function
selection)
Pr. 151 "output current detection period"
• If the output current remains higher than the Pr. 150 setting during inverter operation
for longer than the time set in Pr. 151, the output current detection signal (Y12) is
output from the inverter's open collector output terminal.
(Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 to assign the terminal used for Y12 signal output.)
Factory
Setting
150%
0s
Setting
Range
0 to 200.0%
0 to 10 s
Output current
detection signal (Y12) OFF
Output current
Parameter
Number
150
151
100ms
ON
OFF
Pr.150
Pr.151
Time
<Setting>
Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Parameter
Number
150
151
Description
Set the output current detection level.
100% is the rated inverter current.
Set the output current detection period. Set a period of time from when the
output current rises to or above the Pr. 150 setting to when the output current
detection signal (Y12) is output.
Note: 1. Once turned ON, when the output current has risen above the preset
detection level, the output current detection signal is held for at least 100ms
(approximately).
2. This function is also valid during execution of offline auto tuning.
3. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, the other
functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding
terminals before making settings.
167
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.40 Zero current detection (Pr. 152, Pr. 153)
Pr. 152 "zero current detection level"
Related parameters
Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output
terminal function selection)
Pr. 153 "zero current detection period"
When the inverter's output current falls to "0", torque will not be generated. This may
cause a gravity drop when the inverter is used in vertical lift application.
To prevent this, the output current "zero" signal can be output from the inverter to close
the mechanical brake when the output current has fallen to "zero".
• If the output current remains lower than the Pr. 152 setting during inverter operation
for longer than the time set in Pr. 153, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is output
from the inverter's open collector output terminal.
(Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 to assign the terminal used for Y13 signal output.)
Parameter
Number
152
153
Factory
Setting
5.0%
0.5 s
Start signal
Setting
Range
0 to 200.0%
0.05 to 1 s
OFF ON
Pr. 152 "zero current
detection level"
Zero current
detection signal
output (Y13)
Pr.152
OFF
ON
(Note)
100ms
OFF
Pr. 153 "detection time"
Output current 0 [A]
ON
Pr. 153 "detection time"
<Setting>
Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Parameter
Number
152
153
Description
Set the zero current detection level.
Set this parameter to define the percentage of the rated current at which the
zero current will be detected.
Set the zero current detection time.
Set a period of time from when the output current falls to or below the Pr. 152
setting to when the zero current detection signal (Y13) is output.
Note: 1. If the current rises above the preset detection level but the timing condition
is not satisfied, the zero current detection signal is held on for about 100ms.
2. This function is also valid during execution of offline auto tuning.
3. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, the other
functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding
terminals before making settings.
168
PARAMETERS
CAUTION
The zero current detection level setting should not be too high, and the
zero current detection time setting should not be too long. Otherwise, the
detection signal may not be output when torque is not generated at a low
output current.
To prevent the machine and equipment from resulting in hazardous
conditions by use of the zero current detection signal, install a safety
backup such as an emergency brake.
Pr. 156 ÎRefer to Pr. 22.
4.2.41 User group selection (Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 176)
Pr. 160 "user group read selection"
Pr. 173 "user group 1 registration"
Pr. 174 "user group 1 deletion"
Pr. 175 "user group 2 registration"
Pr. 176 "user group 2 deletion"
Among all parameters, a total of 32 parameters can be registered to two different user
groups. The registered parameters may only be accessed.
The other parameters cannot be read.
Parameter
Number
160
173
174
175
176
Factory
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
Setting Range
0, 1, 10, 11
0 to 999
0 to 999, 9999
0 to 999
0 to 999, 9999
169
Remarks
9999: Batch deletion
9999: Batch deletion
4
PARAMETERS
<Examples of use>
(1) Registration of parameter to user group (when registering Pr. 3 to
user group 1)
Flickering
Pr. 173 reading
The number of
parameters set and
registered by the
user appears.
Press the
/
key to select the
parameter number to
be registered.
‚‚‚
‚‚‚
1.5s
‚‚‚
SET
‚‚‚
SET
Pr. 3 is registered Press the
/
to user group 1. key to shift to the next
parameter to be
registered.
Press the SET key to
register the parameter.
(2) Deletion of parameter from the user group (when Pr. 5 is deleted from
user group 1)
Flickering
Pr. 174 reading
The number of
parameters set and
registered by the
user appears.
Press the
/
key to select the
parameter number to
be deleted.
‚‚‚
1.5s
‚‚‚
‚‚‚
SET
‚‚‚
SET
Pr. 5 is deleted
Press the
/
from user group 1. key to shift to the next
parameter to be
deleted.
Press the SET key to
delete the parameter.
(3) Set the required value in Pr. 160 to make the user group or groups
valid or invalid.
Pr. 160 Setting
0
1
10
11
Description
Accessible to all parameters.
Accessible to only the parameters
registered to user group 1.
Accessible to only the parameters
registered to user group 2.
Accessible to only the parameters
registered to user groups 1 and 2.
Note: 1. The Pr. 77, Pr. 160 and Pr. 991 values may always be read independently of
the user group setting.
2. The Pr. 173 or Pr. 174 value read indicates the number of parameters
registered to group 1, and the Pr. 175 or Pr. 176 value read indicates the
number of parameters registered to group 2.
3. If "0" is set in the second digit of two-digit Pr. 160, it is not displayed.
However, "0" is displayed when it is set in the first digit only.
4. When "9999" is set in Pr. 174 or Pr. 176, the parameters registered to the
corresponding user group are batch-deleted.
170
PARAMETERS
4.2.42 Actual operation hour meter clear (Pr. 171)
Pr. 171 "actual operation hour meter
clear"
Related parameter
Pr. 52 "operation panel/PU main
display data selection"
You can clear the monitor (actual operation hour) value which is selected when Pr. 52 is
"23".
Parameter
Number
171
Factory
Setting
0
Setting
Range
0
<Setting>
Write "0" in the parameter to clear the actual operation hour.
Pr. 173 to Pr. 176 ÎRefer to Pr. 160.
4.2.43 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183)
Pr. 180 "RL terminal function selection"
Pr. 181 "RM terminal function selection"
Pr. 182 "RH terminal function selection"
Pr. 183 "MRS terminal function selection"
Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal functions.
Parameter
Number
Terminal
Symbol
Factory
Setting
180
RL
0
181
RM
1
182
RH
2
183
MRS
6
171
Factory-Set Terminal
Function
Low-speed operation
command (RL)
Middle-speed operation
command (RM)
High-speed operation
command (RH)
Output shut-off (MRS)
Setting
Range
0 to 8, 16, 18
0 to 8, 16, 18
0 to 8, 16, 18
0 to 8, 16, 18
4
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
Refer to the following list and set the parameters.
Setting
Signal
Name
0
RL
1
RM
2
RH
3
4
5
6
RT
AU
STOP
MRS
7
OH
8
REX
16
X16
18
X18
Function
Pr. 59 = 0
Low-speed operation command
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 *
Remote setting (setting clear)
Pr. 59 = 0
Middle-speed operation
command
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 *
Remote setting (deceleration)
Pr. 59 = 0
High-speed operation command
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 * Remote setting (acceleration)
Second function selection
Current input selection (Note 6)
Start self-holding terminal
Output shut-off terminal
External thermal relay input **
The external thermal relay provided for overheat
protection or the embedded temperature relay
within the motor is activated to stop the inverter.
15-speed selection (combination with three
speeds of RL, RM, RH)
PU operation-external operation switch-over
General-purpose magnetic flux vector-V/F switchover (OFF: general-purpose magnetic flux vector
control, ON: V/F control) (Note 3)
Related
Parameters
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6,
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6,
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59
Pr. 44 to Pr. 48
Refer to page 203
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6,
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 79
Pr. 80
* : When Pr. 59 = "1" or "2", the functions of the RL, RM and RH signals change as
listed above.
**: Activated when the relay contact "opens".
Note: 1. One function can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the
terminal inputs are OR' ed.
2. The speed command priorities are higher in order of multi-speed setting
(RH, RM, RL, REX) and AU.
3. When V/F control is selected using the V/F-general-purpose magnetic flux
switch-over function, the secondary functions are also selected.
During operation, you cannot switch between V/F and general-purpose
magnetic flux. Should you switch between V/F and general-purpose
magnetic flux, only the second functions are selected.
4. Use common terminals to assign multi-speeds (7 speeds) and remote
setting. They cannot be set individually.
(Common terminals are used since these functions are designed for
multiple speed setting and need not be set at the same time.)
5. Functions are invalid if values other than the above are set to Pr. 180 to Pr.
183 (input terminal function selection).
6. Turning the AU signal on makes voltage input invalid.
172
PARAMETERS
4.2.44 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192)
Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function selection"
Pr. 191 "FU terminal function selection"
Pr. 192 "A, B, C terminal function selection"
You can change the functions of the open collector and contact output terminals.
Parameter
Number
190
191
192
Terminal
Symbol
RUN
FU
ABC
Factory
Setting
0
4
99
Factory-Set Terminal
Function
Inverter running
Output frequency detection
Alarm output
Setting
Range
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 99
<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameters:
Setting
Signal
Name
0
RUN
Inverter running
Function
1
SU
Up to frequency
3
OL
Overload alarm
4
FU
11
RY
12
Y12
13
Y13
14
15
FDN
FUP
16
RL
93
Y93
95
Y95
98
LF
99
ABC
Output frequency
detection
Inverter operation
ready
Output current
detection
Zero current
detection
PID lower limit
PID upper limit
PID forwardreverse rotation
output
Operation
Related
Parameters
Output during operation when the
inverter output frequency rises to or
above the starting frequency.
Refer to Pr. 41 "up-to-frequency
sensitivity". (Note 1)
Output while stall prevention
function is activated.
Refer to Pr. 42, Pr. 43 (output
frequency detection).
Output when the inverter is ready to be
started by switching the start signal on.
Refer to Pr. 150 and Pr. 151
(output current detection).
Refer to Pr. 152 and Pr. 153
(zero current detection).
Pr. 150,
Pr. 151
Pr. 152,
Pr. 153
Refer to Pr. 128 to Pr. 134 (PID
control).
Pr. 128 to
Pr. 134
The output current average value
and capacitor life timer value are
output during the constant speed
operation. (Note 3)
Capacitor life alarm Refer to Pr.503 and Pr.504
output
(capacitor life alarm).
Output when a minor fault (fan
Minor fault output
failure or communication error
warning) occurs.
Output when the inverter's
Alarm output
protective function is activated to
stop the output (major fault).
Current average
value monitor
signal
173
⎯⎯
Pr. 41
Pr. 22, Pr. 23,
Pr. 66
Pr. 42, Pr. 43
⎯⎯
Pr. 555 to
Pr. 557
Pr. 503, Pr. 504
Pr. 121,
Pr. 244
⎯⎯
4
PARAMETERS
Note: 1. The same function may be set to more than one terminal.
2. Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 do not function if the values set are other than the above.
3. The FR-E520-0.1K to 7.5K (C), FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.75K, and FR-E510W0.1K to 0.75K only can be set.
Only Pr. 190 and Pr. 191 can be set.
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239Î Refer to Pr. 4.
Pr. 240Î Refer to Pr. 72.
4.2.45 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244)
Pr. 244 "cooling fan operation selection"
You can control the operation of the cooling fan built in the inverter (whether there is a
cooling fan or not depends on the models. Refer to the outline dimensional drawings
(page 193)).
Parameter
Number
244
Factory
Setting
0
Setting
Range
0, 1
<Setting>
Setting
0
1
Description
Operated at power on (independent of whether the inverter is running or
at a stop).
Cooling fan on-off control valid
(The cooling fan is always on while the inverter is running. During a stop,
the inverter status is monitored and the fan switches on-off according to
temperature.)
<Reference>
In either of the following cases, fan operation is regarded as faulty, [FN] is shown on the
operation panel, and the minor fault (LF) signal is output. Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
(output terminal function selection) to allocate the terminal used to output the LF signal.
1) Pr. 244 = "0"
When the fan comes to a stop with power on.
2) Pr. 244 = "1"
When the inverter is running and the fan stops during fan ON command.
Note: Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal
function selection) may affect the other functions. Confirm the functions of the
corresponding terminals before making settings.
174
PARAMETERS
4.2.46 Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247)
Pr. 245 "rated motor slip"
Pr. 246 "slip compensation response time"
Pr. 247 "constant power range slip compensation selection"
The inverter output current may be used to assume motor slip to keep the motor speed
constant.
Parameter
Number
245
246
Factory
Setting
9999
0.5
0 to 50%, 9999
0.01 to 10 s
247
9999
0, 9999
Setting Range
Remarks
9999: No slip compensation
9999: Slip compensation is made in
the constant power range when
Pr.245 ≠ "9999"and slip
compensation is selected.
<Setting>
Rated slip =
Parameter
Number
245
246
Synchronous speed at base frequency - rated speed
Synchronous speed at base frequency
×100[%]
Setting
Function
0 to 50%
9999
0.01 to 10s
Used to set the rated motor slip.
Slip compensation is not made.
Used to set the slip compensation response time. (Note)
Slip compensation is not made in the constant power
range (frequency range above the frequency set in Pr. 3).
Slip compensation is made in the constant power range
when Pr.245 ≠ "9999"and slip compensation is selected.
Slip compensation is not made when Pr.245 = "9999"
0
247
9999
Note: When this value is made smaller, response will be faster.
However, as load inertia is greater, a regenerative overvoltage (OVT) error is
more liable to occur.
175
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.47 Earth (ground) fault detection at start (Pr. 249)
(400V class does not have this function)
Pr. 249 "earth (ground) fault detection at start"
You can select whether earth (ground) fault detection at start is made or not. Earth
(ground) fault detection is made only immediately after the start signal is input to the
inverter.
If an earth (ground) fault occurs during operation, the protective function is not
activated.
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
Setting
Range
249
0
0, 1
<Setting>
Setting
0
1
Description
Earth (ground) fault detection not made
Earth (ground) fault detection made
Note: 1. Since detection is made at a start, an about 20ms output delay occurs at
every start.
2. When an earth (ground) fault is detected with "1" set in Pr. 249, alarm output
"E.GF" is detected and the output is shut off.
3. If the motor capacity is less than 0.1kW, earth (ground) fault protection may
not be provided.
176
PARAMETERS
4.2.48 Stop selection (Pr. 250)
Pr. 250 "stop selection"
Related parameters
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Pr. 44 "second acceleration/
deceleration time"
Pr. 45 "second deceleration
time"
Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start
signal (STF/STR) switches off.
Parameter
Number
250
Factory
Setting
Setting Range
0 to 100s, 1000 to
1100s, 8888, 9999
9999
(1) Pr. 250 = "9999"
When the start signal switches off, the motor is decelerated to a stop.
Start signal
Output
frequency
(Hz)
OFF
ON
Decelerated when start signal switches off.
Deceleration time (time set in Pr. 8, etc.)
DC brake
Time
(2) Pr. 250 = 0 to 100s (output is shut off after preset time)
The output is shut off when the time set in Pr. 250 has elapsed after the start signal
was switched off. The motor coasts to a stop.
Start signal
Output
frequency
(Hz)
OFF
Output is shut off when time set in Pr. 250
has elapsed after start signal was switched
off.
Motor coasts to a stop.
Time
RUN signal
OFF
177
4
PARAMETERS
When the Pr. 250 value is 8888, the functions of terminals STF and STR change as
shown below:
STF = start signal, STR = rotation direction signal
STF
STR
OFF
OFF
Inverter Operating Status
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Forward rotation
ON
ON
Reverse rotation
Stop
When the Pr. 250 value is any of 1000 to 1100s, the functions of terminals STF and STR
are the same as when the Pr. 250 value is 8888.
Also, for the stopping method used when the start signal switches off, the output is shut
off (the motor coasts to a stop) after the period set in Pr. 250 (i.e. 1000s) have elapsed.
Note: 1. The RUN signal switches off when the output stops.
2. When the start signal is switched on again during motor coasting, the motor
starts at 0Hz.
3. When the Pr. 250 value is 0, the output is shut off within the shortest time.
4.2.49 Output phase loss protection selection (Pr. 251)
Pr. 251 "Output phase loss protection selection"
You can make invalid the output phase loss protection (E.LF) function which stops the
inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load
side) becomes open.
Choose "without output phase loss protection" when the motor capacity is smaller than
the inverter capacity (when the output current is less than approximately 25% of the
rated inverter current value as a guideline), since performing operation in such a case
may activate output phase loss protection.
Parameter
Number
Setting
Range
Minimum
Setting
Increments
Factory
Setting
251
0, 1
1
1
Pr. 342 Î Refer to Pr. 117
178
Description
0: Without output phase loss
protection
1: With output phase loss
protection
PARAMETERS
4.2.50 Capacitor life alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504) (No function for the
400V class)
Pr. 503 "capacitor life timer"
Pr. 504 "capacitor life alarm output set
time"
Related parameter
Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output
terminal function selection)
Indicates the replacement time (note 1) of the inverter main circuit smoothing capacitor
by outputting the capacitor life alarm output signal "Y95" when the cumulative
energization time of the inverter reaches the time set in Pr.504 "capacitor life alarm
output set time".
Parameter
Number
503
504
Factory
Setting
—
500 (50000h)
Setting Range
—
0 to 9998, (9999)
<Setting>
Parameter
Number
503
Setting
—
0 to 9998
504
9999
Description
Remarks
Displays the cumulative
energization time of the inverter
in 100h increments. (Cannot be
written.)
Clamped at 9998(999800h).
Set the time until the
maintenance timer alarm signal
(Y95) is output.
For maker setting.
The set time is 50000h.
First power ON
By setting "95" in Pr.190
to Pr.192 "output terminal
function selection", the
capacitor life alarm signal
"Y95" can be output.
(Refer to page 173.)
999800h
Capacitor life timer
(Pr. 503)
Y95 output / display
The capacitor life is
counted every 1h and the
figures above hundreds
are displayed.
Pr. 504
OFF
ON
The life of electrolytic capacitor is about eight years (50000h) if used for 20 hours a day
and 300 days a year in the average yearly ambient temperature of 35ºC. (Note 2)
The life of electrolytic capacitor decreases to half if the ambient temperature increases
by 10ºC and doubles if decreases by 10ºC. Please note this as reference when setting
the time
For example, when the average yearly ambient temperature is 45ºC, set "250" (25000h)
in Pr. 504.
Note: 1. For replacement of the capacitor, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.
2. The estimated life time (50000h) of the capacitor differs according to the
environmental conditions (ambient temperature, conditions, etc.) of the
inverter.
179
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.51 Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557)
(no function for the 400V class)
Pr. 555 "current average time"
Pr. 556 "data output mask time"
Pr. 557 "current average value monitor
signal output reference current"
Related parameter
Pr. 57 "restart coasting time"
Pr. 503 "capacitor life timer"
Pr. 190, Pr. 191 (output terminal
function selection)
The average value of the output current during constant speed operation and the
capacitor life timer value (Pr. 503) are output as pulses to the current average value
monitor signal (Y93).
The pulse width measured by inputting the signal to the I/O module of the PLC or the
like can be used as a guideline for increase in output current due to abrasion of
peripheral machines and elongation of belt and for aged deterioration of peripheral
devices to know the maintenance time.
The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is output as pulse for 20s as 1 cycle and
repeatedly output during constant speed operation.
Maintenance
time
PLC
Output module
Input module Inverter
Parts have
reached their life
Parameter
Number
555
556
557
Factory
Setting
1.0s
0.0s
1.0A
Setting Range
0.1 to 1.0s
0.0 to 20s
0.1 to 999A
180
PARAMETERS
<Pulse operation>
The output pulse of the current average value monitor signal (Y93) is shown below.
From acceleration to constant speed operation
Output
frequency
1 cycle (20s)
Next cycle
Y93 signal
1) Data output mask time
When the speed has changed
to constant from acceleration/
deceleration, Y93 signal is not
output for Pr. 556 time.
2) Start pulse
Output as high pulse shape for 1s
(fixed). Time and output current set in
Pr. 555 are averaged.
5) End pulse
Output as low pulse
shape for 1 to 16.5s
4) Capacitor life timer pulse
The capacitor life timer value (Pr. 503) is output as
high pulse shape for 2 to 9s (16000h to 72000h).
Pr. 503 100h
Signal
5s
output time
40000h
3) Output current average value pulse
The averaged current value is output for 0.5 to 9s
(10 to 180%) during start bit output.
output current average value (A)
Signal
5s
output time
Pr. 557 (A)
4
181
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
Perform setting according to the following steps.
1) Setting of Pr. 556 "data output mask time"
The output current is unstable (transient state) right after the operation is changed
from the acceleration/deceleration state to the constant speed operation. Set the time
for not obtaining (mask) transient state data in Pr. 556.
2) Setting of Pr. 555 "output current average time"
The average output current is calculated during output of start pulse (1s) as high
pulse shape. Set the time taken to average the current during start pulse output in Pr.
555.
3) Setting of Pr. 557 "current average value monitor signal output reference current"
Set the reference (100%) for outputting the signal of the current average value.
Obtain the time to output the signal from the following formula.
Note that the output time range is 0.5s to 9s,
and it is 0.5s when the output current average
value is less than 10% of the setting value of
output reference current (Pr. 557) and 9s
when exceeds 180%.
Example) when Pr. 557 = 10A and the
average value of output current is
15A
As 15A/10A × 5s = 7.5, the current
average value monitor signal is
output as low pulse shape for 7.5s.
Signal output time
output current average value
× 5s (output current average value 100%/5s)
setting value of output reference current (Pr. 557)
(s)
9
0.5
10
180 (%)
Output current
average value
Signal output time
4) Output of capacitor life timer value (Pr. 503)
After the output current average value is output as low pulse shape, the capacitor life
timer value is output as high pulse shape. The output time of the capacitor life timer
value is obtained from the following formula.
Capacitor life timer value (Pr. 503) × 100h
× 5s (capacitor life timer value 100%/5s)
40000h
Note that the output time range is 2 to 9s, and
it is 2s when the capacitor life timer value (Pr.
(s)
503) is less than 16000h and 9s when
9
exceeds 72000h.
182
2
16000
72000(h)
Capacitor life timer value
PARAMETERS
REMARKS
• Mask of data output and sampling of output current are not performed during
acceleration/deceleration.
• Set "93" in Pr. 190 (RUN terminal) and Pr. 191 (FU terminal) and assign the
current average value monitor signal (Y93) to the RUN terminal. It can not be
assigned to the ABC contact (Pr. 192)
• When the speed is changed to acceleration/deceleration from constant speed
during start pulse output, the data is judged as invalid, the start pulse is output as
high pulse shape for 3.5s, and the end signal is output as low pulse shape for
16.5s. The signal is output for at least 1 cycle even when acceleration/
deceleration state continues after the start pulse output is completed.
Output frequency
Previous cycle
The speed is changed to deceleration from
the constant speed during start pulse output
Invalid cycle (20s)
Time
Next cycle
Y93
signal
2) Start bit
Output as high
pulse shape for
3.5s
5) End signal
Output as low pulse
shape for 16.5s
• When the output current value (inverter output current monitor) is 0A on
completion of the 1 cycle signal output, the signal is not output until the speed
becomes constant next time.
• The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is output as low shape pulse for
20s (without data output) under the following condition.
1) when the motor is in the acceleration/deceleration state on completion of the 1
cycle signal output
2) when the 1 cycle output is completed during restart operation with automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 571 ≠ "9999")
3) when automatic restart operation was being performed with automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure selected (Pr. 571 ≠ "9999") on completion of
the data output mask
183
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.52 Meter (frequency meter) calibration (Pr. 900)
Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration"
Related parameters
Pr. 54 "FM terminal function
selection"
Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring
reference"
Pr. 56 "current monitoring
reference"
z By using the operation panel or parameter
unit, you can calibrate a meter connected to terminal FM to full scale deflection.
z Terminal FM provides the pulse output. By setting Pr. 900, you can calibrate the
meter connected to the inverter from the parameter unit without providing a
calibration resistor.
z You can display a digital value on a digital counter using the pulse train signal from
terminal FM. A 1440 pulses/s output is provided at the full scale value as explained in
the section of Pr. 54. When the running frequency has been selected for monitoring,
the ratio of this FM terminal output frequency can be set in Pr. 55.
Meter
1mA full scale
Analog meter
FM
1mA
(+)
*Calibration
resistor
SD
Pulse width T1
Pulse period T2
T1
FM
(-)
(Digital indicator)
1440pulses/s (+)
(-)
8VDC
SD
T2
: Adjusted with Pr. 900
: Set in Pr. 55 (frequency monitoring)
Set in Pr. 56 (current monitoring)
Note : The parameter is factory-set to 1mA
full-scale or 1440pulses/s.
FM output frequency at 60Hz.
* Not needed when the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04) is used for
calibration. Used when calibration must be made near the frequency meter for
such a reason as a remote frequency meter. However, the frequency meter
needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resisitor is connected. In this
case, use this resistor and the operation panel or parameter unit together.
(1) Calibration of terminal FM
1) Connect an indicator (frequency meter) across inverter terminals FM-SD.
(Note the polarity. FM is the positive terminal.)
2) When a calibration resistor has already been connected, adjust the
resistance to "0" or remove the resistor.
3) Set any of "0 to 2" in Pr. 54.
When the running frequency or inverter output current has been selected as
the output signal, preset in Pr. 55 or Pr. 56 the running frequency or current
at which the output signal is 1440pulses/s.
At this 1440 pulses/s, the meter normally deflects to full scale.
184
PARAMETERS
<Operation procedure>
• When using the operation panel
1) Select the PU operation mode.
2) Set the running frequency.
3) Press the
SET
key.
4) Read Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration".
5) Press the
key to run the inverter. (Motor need not be connected.)
FWD
6) Hold down the
key to adjust the meter needle to a required position.
/
(Depending on the setting, it may take some time until the needle moves.)
7) Press the
SET
key for about 1.5s.
8) Press the
STOP
RESET
key to stop the inverter.
REMARKS
Calibration can also be made for external operation. Set the frequency in the
external operation mode and make calibration in the steps 4) to 8).
Note: 1. Pr. 900 is factory-set to 1mA full-scale and FM output frequency of 1440
pulses/s at 60Hz. The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400
pulses/s.
2. When a frequency meter is connected across terminals FM-SD to monitor
the running frequency, the FM terminal output is filled to capacity at the
factory setting if the maximum output frequency reaches or exceeds 100Hz.
In this case, the Pr. 55 setting must be changed to the maximum frequency.
3. It is possible to calibrate even during operation.
185
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.53 Biases and gains of the frequency setting voltage (current)
and built-in frequency setting potentiometer
(Pr. 902 to Pr. 905, Pr. 922, Pr. 923)
Pr. 902 "frequency setting voltage bias"
Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain"
Pr. 904 "frequency setting current bias"
Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain"
Related parameters
Pr. 38 "frequency at 5V (10V) input"
Pr. 39 "frequency at 20mA input"
Pr. 73 "0-5/0-10V selection"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr.146"frequency setting
command selection"
Pr. 922 "built-in frequency setting potentiometer bias"
Pr. 923 "built-in frequency setting potentiometer gain"
You can set the output frequency as desired in relation to the frequency setting
potentiometer of the operation panel or the external frequency setting signal (0 to 5V,0
to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC).
The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust the relationship between the input
signal entered from outside the inverter (to set the output frequency), i.e. 0 to 5VDC,0 to
10VDC or 4 to 20mADC, and the output frequency.
Parameter
Factory
Setting Range
Number
Setting (*)
902
0V
0Hz 0 to 10V 0 to 60Hz
903
5V
60Hz 0 to 10V 1 to 400Hz
904
4mA 0Hz 0 to 20mA 0 to 60Hz
905
20mA 60Hz 0 to 20mA 1 to 400Hz
922
0V
0Hz
0 to 5V 1 to 60Hz
923
5V
60Hz 0 to 5V 1 to 400Hz
* Factory settings may differ because of
calibration parameters.
Output frequency (Hz)
z Use Pr. 902 to set the bias of the voltage signal and use Pr. 903 to set its gain
z Use Pr. 904 to set the bias of the current signal and use Pr. 905 to set its gain.
z Use Pr. 922 to set the bias of the operation panel's potentiometer and use Pr. 923 to
set its gain.
Factory setting
(60Hz)
Gain Pr.903
Bias
Pr.905
Pr.902
Pr.923
Pr.904
0
5V Pr.73
Pr.922 0
10V
4
20mA
Frequency setting signal
<Setting>
(1) The frequency setting voltage (current) biases and gains may be adjusted by any
of the three following ways:
1) Any point can be adjusted with a voltage applied across terminals 2-5 (with a
current flowing across terminals 4-5).
2) Any point can be adjusted with no voltage applied across terminals 2-5 (with no
current flowing across terminals 4-5).
3) Only the bias and gain frequencies are adjusted and the voltage (current) is not
adjusted.
186
PARAMETERS
(2) The bias and gain of the frequency setting potentiometer may also be adjusted by
any of the three following ways:
1) Any point can be adjusted with the potentiometer being turned.
2) Any point can be adjusted without the potentiometer being turned.
3) Only the bias and gain frequencies are adjusted.
Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain"
(Pr. 902, Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 can also be adjusted similarly.)
<Adjustment procedure>
When using an external frequency setting signal to set the frequency.
(1)
Power-on (monitoring mode)
Hz
MON
PU
MODE
FWD
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
MAX
MIN
(2)
Choose the PU operation mode.
1) Using the
MODE
zMonitoring mode
Hz
key, make sure that the PU operation mode has been selected.
MODE
zFrequency setting
mode
Hz
MODE
zParameter setting
mode
MODE
MON
PU
PU EXT
PU
zOperation mode
(PU operation mode)
MODE
zHelp mode
MODE
4
PU
PU
MODE
FWD
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
MAX
MIN
Confirm that the PU operation mode
(
) has been chosen.
In the JOG operation mode (
)
or external operation mode (
),
press the
/
key to display
.
If
cannot be displayed by pressing
the
/
key in the external operation mode
(
) (if Pr. 79 "operation mode
≠
selection" "0"), refer to 2) and set "1" (PU
operation mode) in Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection".
187
PARAMETERS
2)Set "1" (PU operation mode) in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection".
Example: To change the external operation mode (Pr. 79 = 2) to the PU operation
mode (Pr. 79 = 1)
Using the
MODE
key,
choose the "parameter
setting mode" as in 1).
Parameter setting mode
Most significant
digit flickers
EXT
SET
MODE
FWD
SET
Least significant
Middle digit flickers digit flickers
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
MAX
MIN
7 times
9 times
SET
0 to 9
Current setting
0 to 9
Setting change
SET
Press for
1.5s
SET
Setting write
Flicker
If
appears, make sure that the forward
rotation (STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal
connected to the control terminal is not on.
If it is on, turn it off.
"1" (PU operation mode) has been set in Pr. 79.
If
appears, you did not press the SET
key for 1.5s when writing the setting.
Press the
key once, press the SET key, and
restart the setting from the beginning.
188
PARAMETERS
3)Set "1" (built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid) in Pr. 146 "frequency
setting command selection".
Change the setting of built-in frequency setting potentiometer valid (Pr. 146 = 0)
to that of built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid (Pr. 146 = 1).
Using the MODE key,
choose the "parameter
setting mode" as in (2) -1).
Parameter setting mode
Most significant
digit flickers
PU EXT
MODE
SET
FWD
Least significant
Middle digit flickers digit flickers
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
MAX
MIN
× Once
× 4 times
SET
0 to 9
0 to 9
0 to 9
Setting change
Current setting
SET
× 6 times
SET
SET
Press for
1.5s
4
SET
Setting write
Flicker
If
appears and the RUN indication is
lit or flickering, stop operation by pressing the
STOP
RESET key or by turning off the forward rotation
(STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal
connected to the control terminal.
"1" (built-in frequency setting potentiometer
invalid) has been set in Pr. 146.
If
appears, you did not press the
SET key for 1.5s when writing the setting.
Press the
key once, press the SET key,
and restart the setting from the beginning.
189
PARAMETERS
(3)
Read Pr. 903 and show the current setting of the gain frequency.
(Pr. 902, Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 can also be adjusted similarly.)
Parameter setting mode
Using the MODE key, choose the
"parameter setting mode" as in (2)-1).
(Note) When Pr.146="0", reading Pr.902
and Pr.903 results in
.
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
MODE
FWD
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
MAX
MIN
SET
Most significant
digit flickers.
Middle digit
flickers.
Least significant
digit flickers.
SET
×9 times
×3 times
SET
SET
0 to 9
0 to 9
Current setting of gain frequency
Hz RUN
A
PU EXT
(4)
Set a gain frequency in Pr. 903 and show the analog voltage value across
terminals 2-5 in % (when the frequency is set to 80Hz)
Current setting of
gain frequency
zChanging the gain
frequency
Hz RUN
A
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
PU EXT
Press
to change
the set frequency.
Press for 1.5s
SET
zAnalog voltage value (%)
across terminals 2-5
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
In any of the methods in (5)-1) to (5)-3) on the following
page, continue the setting until the analog voltage value
flickers. If you end the setting here, the gain frequency
change will not be reflected.
190
PARAMETERS
z When not adjusting the gain voltage → go to (5)-1)
z When adjusting any point by applying a voltage → go to (5)-2)
z When adjusting any point without applying a voltage → go to (5)-3)
(5)-1)How to adjust only the gain frequency and not to adjust the voltage
zAnalog voltage value (%)
across terminals 2-5
zPress the
or
key once to display
the current analog voltage calibration value.
Example: When analog voltage
adjustment value is
Press for 1.5s
100% (5V)
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
SET
go to (6)
Flicker
(5)-2) How to adjust any point by applying a voltage across terminals 2-5 (e.g. from the
external potentiometer) (current: across terminals 4-5) (when applying 5V))
zAnalog voltage
value (%) across
terminals 2-5
zApply a 5V voltage.
(Turn the external potentiometer
connected across terminals 2-5 to maximum.)
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
Press for 1.5s
SET
When the potentiometer
is at the maximum position,
the value is nearly 100 (%).
Flicker
go to (6)
(5)-3)How to adjust any point without applying a voltage across terminals 2-5 (without a
current flowing across terminals 4-5) (when changing from 4V (80%) to 5V (100%)
zAnalog voltage
value (%) across
terminals 2-5
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
zPress the
or
key
once to display the current
analog voltage calibration
value.
zSet the gain voltage (%)
/
with the
key.
[0(%) for 0V (0mA), 100(%)
for 5V (10V, 20mA)]
/
Press for 1.5s
SET
Flicker
191
go to (6)
4
PARAMETERS
(6)
(7)
Press the
key to shift to the next parameter.
Re-set Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" according to the operation mode to be
used.
SET
Note: 1. If the Pr. 903 or Pr. 905 (gain adjustment) value is changed, the Pr. 20 value
does not change.
2. When the Pr. 903 or Pr. 905 value is set, the value of Pr. 38 "frequency at
5V (10V) input" or Pr. 39 "frequency at 20mA input" changes automatically.
CAUTION
Be careful when setting the bias frequency at 0V to any value other than
"0". Even without the speed command, the motor will start running at the
set frequency by merely switching on the start signal.
192
PARAMETERS
Pr. 923 "built-in frequency setting potentiometer gain"
(Pr. 922 can be adjusted in the same manner)
When the built-in frequency setting potentiometer is used to set the bias and gain of the
built-in frequency setting potentiometer to set the magnitude (slope) of the output
frequency as desired.
)
(1)
Power-on (monitoring mode)
Hz
MON
PU
MODE
FWD
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
MAX
MIN
(2)
Choose the PU operation mode.
1)Using the
M ODE
zMonitoring mode
Hz
key, make sure that the PU operation mode has been selected.
MODE
zFrequency setting
mode
Hz
MODE
zParameter setting
mode
MODE
MON
PU
PU EXT
PU
zOperation mode
(PU operation mode)
MODE
zHelp mode
MODE
PU
PU
MODE
FWD
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
MAX
MIN
Confirm that the PU operation mode
(
) has been chosen.
In the JOG operation mode (
)
or external operation mode (
),
press the
/
key to display
.
If
cannot be displayed by pressing
the
/
key in the external operation mode
(
) (if Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection" ≠ "0"), refer to 2) and set "1" (PU
operation mode) in Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection".
193
4
PARAMETERS
2)Set "1" (PU operation mode) in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection".
Example: To change the external operation mode (Pr. 79 = 2) to the PU operation
mode (Pr. 79 = 1)
Using the
MODE
key,
choose the "parameter
setting mode" as in 1).
Parameter setting mode
SET
MODE
FWD
SET
Least significant
Middle digit flickers digit flickers
Most significant
digit flickers
EXT
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
MAX
MIN
× 7 times
0 to 9
Current setting
SET
× 9 times
0 to 9
Setting change
SET
Press for
1.5s
SET
Setting write
Flicker
If
appears, make sure that the forward
rotation (STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal
connected to the control terminal is not on.
If it is on, turn it off.
"1" (PU operation mode) has been set in Pr. 79.
If
appears, you did not press the SET
key for 1.5s when writing the setting.
Restart the procedure from the beginning.
Press the
key once, press the SET key, and
restart the setting from the beginning.
194
PARAMETERS
3)Set "0" (built-in frequency setting potentiometer valid) in Pr. 146 "frequency
setting command selection".
Change the setting of built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid (Pr. 146 = 1)
to that of built-in frequency setting potentiometer valid (Pr. 146 = 0).
Using the
MODE
key,
choose the "parameter
setting mode" as in (2) -1).
Parameter setting mode
Most significant
digit flickers
PU EXT
MODE
SET
FWD
Least significant
Middle digit flickers digit flickers
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
MAX
MIN
× Once
× 4 times
SET
0 to 9
0 to 9
0 to 9
Setting change
Current setting
SET
× 6 times
SET
SET
Press for
1.5s
4
SET
Setting write
Flicker
If
appears and the RUN indication is
lit or flickering, stop operation by pressing the
STOP
key
or
by turning off the forward rotation
RESET
(STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal
connected to the control terminal.
"0" (built-in frequency setting potentiometer
valid) has been set in Pr. 146.
If
appears, you did not press the
SET key for 1.5s when writing the setting.
Press the
key once, press the SET key,
and restart the setting from the beginning.
195
PARAMETERS
(3)
Read Pr. 923 and show the current setting of the gain frequency.
(Pr. 922 can also be adjusted similarly.)
Parameter setting mode
Using the MODE key, choose the
"parameter setting mode" as in (2)-1).
Hz RUN
A MON
PU
MODE
FWD
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
MAX
MIN
SET
Most significant
digit flickers.
Middle digit
flickers.
9 times
Least significant
digit flickers.
2 times
SET
3 times
SET
SET
0 to 9
0 to 9
0 to 9
Current setting of gain frequency
Hz RUN
A
PU EXT
(4)
Set a new gain frequency in Pr. 923 and show the analog voltage value of the
built-in frequency setting potentiometer. (when the frequency is set to 80Hz at
MAX)
zCurrent setting of gain
frequency
zChanging the gain
frequency
Hz RUN
Hz RUN
A
A MON
PU EXT
A near-0 value is shown at the
MIN position of the
potentiometer, and near-100 at
MAX.
Set to the potentiometer
position where operation is to
be performed at the set
frequency
(80Hz in the example).
PU EXT
Press
to change
the set frequency.
Press for 1.5s
SET
zAnalog voltage value (%) of the built-in
frequency setting potentiometer
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
In any of the methods in (5)-1) to (5)-3) on the
following pages, continue the setting until the analog
voltage value flickers. If you end the setting here, the
gain frequency change will not be reflected.
196
PARAMETERS
z When adjusting any point by turning the potentiometer → go to (5)-1)
z When not adjusting the gain voltage → go to (5)-2)
z When adjusting any point without turning the potentiometer → go to (5)-3)
(5)-1)How to adjust any point by turning the built-in frequency setting potentiometer
(when applying 5V)
zAnalog voltage
zTurn the potentiometer
value (%) of the
to the gain frequency
built-in frequency
setting potentiometer output (MAX) position.
zThe gain voltage
corresponding to the
potentiometer position appears.
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
Press for 1.5s
SET
When the potentiometer
is at the MAX position,
the value is nearly 100.
Flicker
go to (6)
(5)-2)How to adjust the gain frequency only without the voltage being adjusted
zAnalog voltage value (%)
of the built-in frequency
setting potentiometer
zPress the
or
key once to display
the current analog voltage adjustment.
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
Press for 1.5s
Example: When analog voltage
adjustment value is 100%
SET
go to (6)
Flicker
4
(5)-3) How to adjust any point without turning the potentiometer (When changing from
4V (80%) to 5V (100%))
zAnalog voltage
value (%) of the
built-in frequency
setting potentiometer
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
zPress the
zSet the gain voltage (%) with
or
key once to display
the
key.
/
the current analog
[0(%) for 0V (0mA), 100(%) for
voltage calibration value. 5V (10V, 20mA)]
/
Press for 1.5s
SET
Flicker
197
go to (6)
PARAMETERS
(6)
(7)
Press the
key to shift to the next parameter.
Re-set Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" according to the operation mode to be
used.
SET
CAUTION
You should be careful when setting any value other than "0" to the bias
frequency at 0V, since the motor will start at the preset frequency by
merely turning on the start signal if no speed command is given.
198
CHAPTER 5
PROTECTIVE
FUNCTIONS
This chapter explains the "protective functions" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
Chapter 1
5.1 Errors (Alarms) ........................................ 200
5.2 Troubleshooting ....................................... 210
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
199
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.1
Errors (Alarms)
When an alarm occurs in the inverter, the protective function is activated bringing the
inverter to an alarm stop and the PU display automatically changes to any of the
following error (alarm) indications.
If your fault does not correspond to any of the following errors or if you have any other
problem, please contact your sales representative.
• Retention of alarm output signal ...... When the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on
the power supply side of the inverter is opened
at the activation of the protective function, the
inverter's control power will be lost and the
alarm output will not be held.
• Alarm indication ............................... When the protective function is activated, the
operation panel display automatically switches
to the above indication.
• Resetting method............................... When the protective function is activated, the
inverter output is kept stopped. Unless reset,
therefore, the inverter cannot restart. Switch power
off once, then on again; or apply RES signal for
more than 0.1s. If the RES signal is kept on, "Err."
appears (flickers) to indicate that the inverter is in a
reset status.
• When the protective function is activated, take the appropriate corrective action, then
reset the inverter, and resume operation.
5.1.1
Error (alarm) definitions
(1) Major faults
When the protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and the alarm is
output.
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E. OC1
FR-PU04 OC During Acc
Overcurrent shut-off during acceleration
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds
approximately 200% of the rated current during acceleration,
the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output
Check for sudden acceleration.
Check that the downward acceleration time is not long in
vertical lift application.
Check for output short-circuit/earth (ground) fault.
Increase the acceleration time. (Shorten the downward
acceleration time in vertical lift application.)
200
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E. OC2
FR-PU04 Stedy Spd OC
Overcurrent shut-off during constant speed
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds
approximately 200% of the rated current during constant speed,
the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check for sudden load change.
Check for output short-circuit/earth (ground) fault.
Keep load stable.
E. OC3
FR-PU04 OC During Dec
Overcurrent shut-off during deceleration
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds
approximately 200% of the rated current during deceleration
(other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective
circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check for sudden speed reduction.
Check for output short-circuit/earth (ground) fault.
Check for too fast operation of the motor's mechanical brake.
Increase the deceleration time.
Adjust brake operation.
E. OV1
FR-PU04 OV During Acc
Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during acceleration
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC
voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protective circuit
is activated to stop the inverter output. It may also be activated by a
surge voltage generated in the power supply system.
Check for too slow acceleration. (e.g. during descending
acceleration with lifting load)
Decrease the acceleration time.
E. OV2
FR-PU04 Stedy Spd OV
Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during constant speed
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main
circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the
protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
It may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the
power supply system.
Check for sudden load change.
• Keep load stable.
• Use the brake unit, high power factor converter (FR-HC) or
power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
201
5
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E. OV3
FR-PU04 OV During Dec
Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during deceleration or stop
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main
circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the
protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
It may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the
power supply system.
Check for sudden speed reduction.
• Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time
which matches the moment of inertia of the load)
• Longer the brake cycle
• Use the brake unit, high power factor converter (FR-HC) or
power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
I
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E. THM
FR-PU04 Motor Ovrload
Motor overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function)
(Note 1)
The electronic overcurrent protection in the inverter detects
motor overheat due to overload or reduced cooling capability
during constant-speed operation to stop the inverter output.
When a multi-pole motor or two or more motors are run,
provide a thermal relay on the output side of the inverter.
Check the motor for use under overload.
• Reduce the load weight.
• For the constant-torque motor, change the Pr. 71 setting to
the constant-torque motor setting.
E. THT
FR-PU04 Inv. Ovrload
Inverter overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function)
(Note 1)
If a current of more than 150% of the rated output current
flows and overcurrent shut-off does not occur (200% or less),
the electronic thermal relay activate to stop the inverter output
in order to protect the output transistors.
Check the motor for use under overload.
Reduce the load weight.
Note:1. Resetting the inverter initializes the internal heat integrating data of the
electronic thermal relay function.
202
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E. FIN
FR-PU04 H/Sink O/Temp
Fin overheat
If the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor is actuated
to stop the inverter output.
• Check for too high ambient temperature.
• Check for heatsink clogging.
Set the ambient temperature to within the specifications.
E. BE
FR-PU04 Br. Cct. Fault (Note)
Brake transistor alarm detection
If a brake transistor fault occurs due to excessively large
regenerative energy from the motor, for example, that fault is
detected to stop the inverter output. In this case, the inverter
power must be switched off immediately.
Check for improper braking duty.
Change the inverter.
Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel Indication
E. GF
Name
Corrective action
Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent
This function stops the inverter output if an earth (ground) fault
overcurrent flows due to an earth (ground) fault which occurred in
the inverter's output (load) side. Use Pr. 249 "ground fault detection
at start" to set whether the protective function is to be activated or
not. (The 400V class always has the protective function.)
Check for an earth (ground) fault in the motor and connection
cable.
Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
Operation Panel Indication
E. OHT
Name
External thermal relay operation (Note 2)
If the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat
protection or the internally mounted temperature relay in the
motor switches on (contacts open), the inverter output is
stopped. If the relay contacts are reset automatically, the
inverter will not restart unless it is reset.
•Check for motor overheating.
•Check that the value of "7" (OH signal) is set correctly in any
of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection).
Reduce the load and operating duty.
Description
Check point
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
FR-PU04
Ground Fault
OH Fault
Note:2. This function is activated only when OH has been set to any of Pr. 180 to Pr.
183 (input terminal function selection).
203
5
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Operation Panel Indication
E. OLT
Name
Stall prevention
The running frequency has fallen to 0 by stall prevention
activated. (OL while stall prevention is being activated.)
Check the motor for use under overload.
Reduce the load weight.
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
E.OPT
Stll Prev STP
FR-PU04 Option Fault
Option alarm
Stops the inverter output if a functional fault (e.g.
communication error of the communication option) occurs in
the communication option.
Stops the inverter output if the inverter station is disconnected
from the system in the NET mode. (Note 3)
Stops the inverter output if a setting error or connection
(connector) fault occurs during use of in-board option.
Check that the communication cable is not open.
Please contact your sales representative.
Note:3. Only when the communication option is fitted to the three-phase 400V power
input model.
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E. PE
FR-PU04 Corrupt Memry
Parameter storage device alarm
A fault occurred in parameters stored (example: E2PROM
fault).
Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Please contact your sales representative.
E. PUE
FR-PU04 PU Leave Out
Parameter unit disconnection
This function stops the inverter output if communication
between the inverter and PU is suspended, e.g. the PU is
disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr. 75.
This function stops the inverter output if the number of
successive communication errors is greater than the number
of permissible retries when the Pr. 121 value is other than
"9999" for RS-485 communication from the PU connector.
• Check for loose fitting of the operation panel or FR-PU04.
• Check the Pr. 75 setting.
Fit the operation panel and FR-PU04 securely.
204
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Operation Panel Indication
Name
E. RET
FR-PU04 Retry No Over
Check point
Corrective action
Retry count exceeded
If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of
retries set, this function stops the inverter output.
Find the cause of alarm occurrence.
Eliminate the cause of the error preceding this error indication.
Operation Panel Indication
E. CPU
Name
Check point
Corrective action
CPU error
If the arithmetic operation of the built-in CPU does not end
within a predetermined period, the inverter self-determines it
as an alarm and stops the output.
———
Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel Indication
E. 3
Name
Option fault
Also stops the inverter output if the dedicated option used in
the inverter results in setting error or connection (connector)
fault. (Note 4)
• Check that the function setting and operation of the option
are correct.
• Check that the communication option is plugged in the
connector securely.
• Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around
the inverter.
• Connect the communication option securely.
• Take measures against noises if there are devices producing
excess electrical noises around the inverter.
• Contact your sales representative.
Description
Description
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04 CPU Fault
FR-PU04 Fault 3
Note:4. Only when the communication option is fitted to the three-phase 400V power
input model.
E. 6
Fault 6
Operation Panel Indication
FR-PU04
E. 7
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Fault 7
CPU error
This function stops the inverter output if a communication error
occurs in the built-in CPU. (400V class only)
Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around
the inverter.
• Take measures against noises if there are devices producing
excess electrical noises around the inverter.
• Please contact your sales representative.
205
5
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Operation Panel Indication
E. P24
Name
Check point
Corrective action
24VDC power output short circuit
When the 24VDC power output from the PC terminal is
shorted, this function shuts off the power output. At this time,
all external contact inputs switch off. The inverter cannot be
reset by entering the RES signal. To reset it, use the operation
panel or switch power off, then on again. (for 400V class only)
Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output.
Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
Operation Panel Indication
E. LF
Name
Output phase loss
This function stops the inverter output if one of the three
phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) is
lost.
• Check the wiring (Check the motor for a fault.)
• Check that the capacity of the used motor is not smaller than
the inverter capacity.
• Wire the cables properly.
• Check the setting of Pr. 251 "output phase loss protection
selection".
Description
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04 Pr.24 alarm
FR-PU04 E. LF
206
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
(2) Minor fault
The output is not shut off when the protective function is activated. You can make
parameter setting to output the minor fault signal. (Set "98" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
(output terminal function selection). Refer to page 173.)
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FN
FR-PU04 Fan Failure
Fan fault
For the inverter which contains a cooling fan, FN appears on
the operation panel when the cooling fan stops due to a fault
or operates differently from the setting of Pr. 244 "cooling fan
operation selection"
Check the cooling fan for a fault.
Replace the fan. (Refer to page 219.)
(3) Warnings
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
OL
FR-PU04 OL
Stall prevention (overcurrent)
During
If a current of more than 150% (Note 5) of
acceleration
the rated inverter current flows in the motor,
this function stops the increase in frequency
until the overload current reduces to
prevent the inverter from resulting in
overcurrent shut-off. When the overload
current has reduced below 150%, this
function increases the frequency again.
If a current of more than 150% (Note 5) of
During
the rated inverter current flows in the motor,
constant-speed
this function lowers the frequency until the
operation
overload current reduces to prevent
overcurrent shut-off. When the overload
current has reduced below 150%, this
function increases the frequency up to the
set value.
During
If a current of more than 150% (Note 5) of
deceleration
the rated inverter current flows in the motor,
this function stops the decrease in frequency
until the overload current reduces to prevent
the inverter from resulting in overcurrent
shut-off. When the overload current has
reduced below 150%, this function
decreases the frequency again.
Check the motor for use under overload.
The acceleration/deceleration time may change.
Increase the stall prevention operation level with Pr. 22 "stall
prevention operation level", or disable stall prevention with Pr.
156 "stall prevention operation selection".
Note:5. The stall prevention operation current can be set as desired. It is factory-set to
150%.
207
5
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel Indication
oL
FR-PU04 oL
Stall prevention (overvoltage)
During
If the regenerative energy of the motor
deceleration increases too much to exceed the brake
capability, this function stops the decrease in
frequency to prevent overvoltage shut-off. As
soon as the regenerative energy has reduced,
deceleration resumes.
Check for sudden speed reduction.
The deceleration time may change. Increase the deceleration
time using Pr. 8 "deceleration time".
PS
FR-PU04 PS
Name
PU stop
Description
A stop made by pressing the
in Pr. 75 "PU stop selection".
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel Indication
Description
Corrective action
STOP
RESET
key of the PU has been set
Check for a stop made by pressing the
operation panel during external operation.
Refer to page 130.
STOP
RESET
key of the
Err.
This alarm appears if:
• The RES signal is on;
• You attempted to set any parameter value in the external
operation mode;
• You attempted to change the operation mode during
operation;
• You attempted to set any parameter value outside its setting
range.
• You attempted to set any parameter value during operation
(while signal STF or STR is ON).
• You attempted to set any parameter value while parameter
write is being inhibited in Pr. 77 "parameter write disable
selection".
Perform operation correctly.
208
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.1.2
To know the operating status at the occurrence of alarm
When any alarm has occurred, the display automatically switches to the indication of the
corresponding protective function (error). By pressing the M O D E key at this point without
resetting the inverter, the display shows the output frequency. In this way, it is possible
to know the running frequency at the occurrence of the alarm. This also applies to the
current. After resetting, you can confirm the data in the alarm history (refer to page 73).
5.1.3
Correspondence between digital and actual characters
There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters
and the digital characters displayed on the operation panel:
Actual
Display
Actual
Display
Actual
0
A
1
B
N
2
C
O
3
D
o
4
E
P
5
F
6
G
7
H
8
I
9
J
Display
M
S
T
U
V
r
L
-
5.1.4
Resetting the inverter
The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the
electronic overcurrent protection's internal heat calculation value and the number of
retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter.
Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.
Operation 1: ............Using the operation panel, press the
STOP
RESET
key to reset the inverter.
(This may only be performed when the inverter protective function
(major fault) is activated.)
Operation 2: ............Switch power off once, then switch it on again after the POWER
lamp on the operation panel turns off.
Operation 3: ............Switch on the reset signal (RES).
209
5
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.2
Troubleshooting
POINT: Check the corresponding areas. If the cause is still unknown, it is
recommended to initialize the parameters (return to factory settings), reset
the required parameter values, and check again.
5.2.1
Motor remains stopped
1) Check the main circuit
Check that a proper power supply voltage is applied (operation panel display is
provided).
Check that the motor is connected properly.
Check that the conductor across P1-P is connected.
2) Check the input signals
Check that the start signal is input.
Check that both the forward and reverse rotation start signals are not input.
Check that the frequency setting signal is not zero.
Check that the AU signal is on when the frequency setting signal is 4 to 20mA.
Check that the output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is not on.
Check that the sink/source jumper connector is fitted securely.
3) Check the parameter settings
Check that the reverse rotation prevention (Pr. 78) is not selected.
Check that the operation mode (Pr. 79) setting is correct.
Check that the frequency setting command selection (Pr. 146) setting is correct.
Check that the bias and gain (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905, Pr. 922, Pr. 923) settings are
correct.
Check that the starting frequency (Pr. 13) setting is not greater than the
running frequency.
Check that various operational functions (such as three-speed operation),
especially the maximum frequency (Pr. 1), are not zero.
4) Check the load
Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the shaft is not locked.
5) Others
Check that the ALARM lamp is off.
Check that the operation panel display does not show an error (e.g. E.OC1).
Check that the Pr. 15 "jog frequency" setting is not lower than the Pr. 13
"starting frequency" value.
.
5.2.2
Motor rotates in opposite direction
Check that the phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is correct.
Check that the start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are connected
properly.
210
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.2.3
Speed greatly differs from the setting
Check that the frequency setting signal is correct. (Measure the input signal level.)
Check that the following parameter settings are correct (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 19, Pr. 38,
Pr. 39, Pr. 245, Pr. 902 to Pr. 905).
Check that the input signal lines are not affected by external noise. (Use shielded
cables)
Check that the load is not too heavy.
5.2.4
Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth
Check that the acceleration and deceleration time settings are not too short.
Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the torque boost setting is not too large to activate the stall prevention
function.
5.2.5
Motor current is large
Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the torque boost setting is not too large.
5.2.6
Speed does not increase
Check that the maximum frequency setting is correct.
Check that the load is not too heavy. (In agitators, etc., load may become heavier
in winter.)
Check that the torque boost setting is not too large to activate the stall prevention
function.
Check that the brake resistor is not connected to terminals P-P1 or terminals P1PR accidentally.
5.2.7
Speed varies during operation
When slip compensation is selected, the output frequency varies with load
fluctuation between 0 and 2Hz. This is a normal operation and is not a fault.
1) Inspection of load
Check that the load is not varying.
2) Inspection of input signal
Check that the frequency setting signal is not varying.
Check that the frequency setting signal is not affected by noise.
Check that a malfunction does not occur due to an undesirable current when
the transistor output unit is connected, for example. (Refer to page 27.)
3) Others
Check that the setting of the applied motor capacity (Pr. 80) is correct for the
inverter capacities in general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
Check that the wiring length is within 30m in general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control.
Check that the wiring length is correct in V/F control.
211
5
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.2.8
Operation mode is not changed properly
If the operation mode does not change correctly, check the following:
1) External input signal ............... Check that the STF or STR signal is off.
When it is on, the operation mode cannot be
changed.
2) Parameter setting .................. Check the Pr. 79 setting.
When the setting of Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection" is "0", switching input power on
places the inverter in the external operation
mode. By pressing the M OD E key twice and
pressing the
key, the external operation
mode changes to the PU operation mode. For
any other setting (1 to 8), the operation mode is
limited according to the setting.
(For details of Pr. 79, refer to page 133.)
5.2.9
Operation panel display is not operating
Make sure that the operation panel is connected securely with the inverter.
Check for a short circuit across terminals PC-SD.
Check that the jumper across terminals P-P1 is fitted securely.
5.2.10 POWER lamp is not lit
(Check the power lamp after removing the operation panel.)
Make sure that the wiring and installation are correct.
5.2.11 Parameter write cannot be performed
Make sure that operation is not being performed (signal STF or STR is not ON).
Make sure that you pressed the SET key ( WRITE key) for longer than 1.5s.
Make sure that you are not attempting to set the parameter outside the setting
range.
Make sure that you are not attempting to set the parameter in the external
operation mode.
(Set "2" in Pr. 77 when performing parameter setting in the external operation
mode. (Refer to page 132))
Check Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection".
212
CHAPTER 6
MAINTENANCE/
INSPECTION
This chapter explains the "maintenance/inspection" of this
product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
Chapter 1
6.1 Precautions for Maintenance and
Inspection ................................................ 214
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
213
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
6.1
Precautions for Maintenance and
Inspection
The transistorized inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices.
Daily inspection must be performed to prevent any fault from occurring due to adverse
influence by the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and
vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.
6.1.1
Precautions for maintenance and inspection
For some short time after the power is switched off, a high voltage remains in the
smoothing capacitor. Therefore, when more than 10 minutes have elapsed after poweroff, make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P (+) - N (–) of the
inverter is 30VDC or less using a meter, etc. Then, access the inverter for inspection.
6.1.2
Check items
(1) Daily inspection
• Check the following:
1) Motor operation fault
2) Improper installation environment
3) Cooling system fault
4) Unusual vibration and noise
5) Unusual overheating and discoloration
• During operation, check the inverter input voltages using a meter.
(2) Cleaning
Always run the inverter in a clean state.
When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral
detergent or ethanol.
Note: Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they
will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.
Do not use detergent or alcohol to clean the display and other sections of the
operation panel as these sections may deform.
6.1.3
Periodic inspection
Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection.
1) Cooling system:............. Clean the air filter, etc.
2) Screws and bolts: .......... These parts may become loose due to vibration,
temperature changes, etc. Check that they are tightened
securely and retighten as necessary.
3) Conductors and insulating materials: Check for corrosion and damage.
4) Insulation resistance: Measure.
5) Cooling fan, smoothing capacitor: Check and change if necessary.
214
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
6.1.4
1)
Insulation resistance test using megger
Before performing the insulation resistance test using a megger on the external
circuit, disconnect the cables from all terminals of the inverter so that the test
voltage is not applied to the inverter.
2) For the continuity test of the control circuit, use a meter (high resistance range) and
do not use the megger or buzzer.
3)
For the inverter, conduct the insulation resistance test on the main circuit only as
shown below and do not perform the test on the control circuit. (Use a 500VDC
megger.)
Power supply
R (L1) Inverter U
S (L2)
V
W
T (L3)
Motor
IM
500VDC
megger
Earth(ground) terminal
6.1.5
Pressure test
Do not conduct a pressure test. The inverter's main circuit uses semiconductors, which
may deteriorate if a pressure test is made.
6
215
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
General
2 years
Method
Check ambient
Surrounding temperature,
environment humidity, dust, dirt,
etc.
{
Refer to page 14.
Overall unit Check for unusual
vibration and noise.
{
Visual and auditory
checks.
{
Measure voltage
across inverter
terminals R-S-T (L1L2-L3).
Power
supply
voltage
Main circuit
Interval
Periodic*
Description
Daily
Inspection
Item
Check that main
circuit voltage is
normal.
(1) Check with
megger (across
main circuit
terminals and
earth (ground)
terminal).
General (2) Check for loose
screws and bolts.
(3) Check for
overheat on each
part.
(4) Clean.
(1) Check conductors
for distortion.
Conductors,
(2) Check cable
cables
sheaths for
breakage.
Terminal Check for damage.
block
Inverter
module
Converter
module
{
{
{
{
Ambient
temperature:
-10°C to
+50°C°,
non-freezing.
Ambient
humidity: 90%
or less, noncondensing.
Instrument
Thermometer,
hygrometer,
recorder
No fault.
Within
permissible AC
Meter,
(DC) voltage
digital
fluctuation
multimeter
(Refer to page
228)
(1) 5MΩ or
more.
{ (1) Disconnect all
cables from
inverter and
measure across
terminals R (L1),
S (L2), T (L3), U,
500VDC
V, W and earth
(ground) terminal (2), (3) No fault. class megger
with megger.
(2) Retighten.
(3) Visual check.
(1), (2) Visual check. (1), (2) No
fault.
{
{
Visual check
No fault
Disconnect cables
from inverter and
measure across
terminals R, S, T-P, Refer to page
{ N (L1, L2, L3 - +, –),
218.
and across U, V, W P (+), N (–) with a
meter with a 100Ω
range.
(1), (2) Visual check. (1), (2) No
fault.
Check resistance
across terminals.
(1) Check for liquid
leakage.
(2) Check for safety
valve projection
Smoothing
and bulge.
capacitor
(3) Measure
electrostatic
capacity.
Criterion
{
Analog meter
{
{
(3) Measure with
capacity meter.
216
(3) 85% or
more of
rated
capacity.
Capacity
meter
Customer's
check
Daily and periodic inspection
1 year
Area of
Inspection
6.1.6
Cooling
system
Control circuit
Protective circuit
Main
circuit
(1) Check for
chatter during
operation.
Relay
(2) Check for rough
surface on
contacts.
(1) Check balance
of output
voltages across
phases with
inverter operated
independently.
(2)
Perform
Operation
sequence
check
protective
operation test to
make sure there
is no fault in
protective or
display circuits.
Cooling fan
Display
Display
Meter
General
Motor
(2) Clean.
Check that reading
is normal.
(1) Check for
{
unusual vibration
and noise.
(2) Check for
{
unusual odor.
Check with megger
Insulation (across terminals
resistance and earth (ground)
terminal).
(1) Auditory check. (1) No fault.
{
(2) Visual check.
(2) No fault.
{
(1) Measure
voltage across
inverter output
terminals U-VW.
(1) Phase-tophase
voltage
balance
within 4V
(8V) for
200V
(400V).
(2) Fault must
occur
because of
sequence.
{
{
{
(2) Simulate
connection of
inverter
protective
circuit output
terminals.
(1) Turn by hand
with power off.
Instrument
Customer's
check
Criterion
{
{
(1) Check for
{
unusual vibration
and noise.
(2) Check for loose
connection.
(1) Check for LED
{
lamp blown.
Method
2 years
Description
Daily
Inspection
Item
1 year
Area of
Inspection
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
Interval
Periodic*
Digital
multimeter,
rectifier type
voltmeter
No unusual
vibration and
unusual noise.
(2) Visual check.
(1) Lamps indicate (1) Check that
indicator lamps
lamps are
on panel.
lit.
(2) Clean with rag.
Check reading of
Must satisfy
meters on panel.
specified and
management
values.
(1) Auditory,
(1), (2) No
sensory, visual
fault.
checks.
(2) Check for
unusual odor
due to
overheat,
damage, etc.
{ Disconnect cables 5MΩ or more.
from U, V, W,
including motor
cables.
Voltmeter,
ammeter,
etc.
500V
megger
Note: The values within the parentheses are for the 400V class.
* For periodic inspection, contact you nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
6
217
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
z Checking the inverter and converter modules
<Preparation>
(1) Disconnect the external power supply cables (R, S, T (L1, L2, L3)) and motor cables
(U, V, W).
(2) Prepare a meter. (Use 100Ω range.)
<Checking method>
Change the polarity of the meter alternately at the inverter terminals R (L1), S (L2),
T (L3), U, V, W, P (+) and N (–), and check for continuity.
Note: 1. Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged.
2. At the time of discontinuity, the measured value is almost ∞. When there is
an instantaneous continuity, due to the smoothing capacitor the tester may
not indicate ∞. At the time of continuity, the measured value is several to
several ten's-of ohms depending on the number of modules, number of
parallel modules, circuit tester type, etc. If all measured values are almost
the same, the modules are without fault.
<Module device numbers and terminals to be checked>
Inverter module
Converter
module
Tester Polarity
D1
D2
D3
TR1
TR3
TR5
R (L1)
P (+)
S (L2)
P (+)
T (L3)
P (+)
U
P (+)
V
P (+)
W
P (+)
P (+)
R (L1)
P (+)
S (L2)
P (+)
T (L3)
P (+)
U
P (+)
V
P (+)
W
Tester Polarity
Measured
Value
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
D4
D5
D6
TR4
TR6
TR2
R (L1)
N (–)
S (L2)
N (–)
T (L3)
N (–)
U
N (–)
V
N (–)
W
N (–)
N (–)
R (L1)
N (–)
S (L2)
N (–)
T (L3)
N (–)
U
N (–)
V
N (–)
W
Measured
Value
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
(Assumes the use of an analog meter.)
Converter module P (+) Inverter module
TR1
D1 D2
TR3
TR5
D3
R (L1)
U
C
S (L2)
V
T (L3)
W
D4 D5 D6
TR4
TR6
TR2
N (-)
Note: The FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.75K and FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K do not have T (L3),
D3 and D6.
218
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
6.1.7
Replacement of parts
The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.
The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structural or physical
characteristics, leading to reduced performance or failure of the inverter. For preventive
maintenance, the parts must be changed periodically.
Part Name
Standard
Replacement Interval
Description
Cooling fan
2 to 3 years
Replace (as required)
Smoothing capacitor in main circuit
8 years *
Replace (as required)
Smoothing capacitor on control board
8 years *
Replace the board
(as required).
* The design life of electrolytic capacitor is about eight years (50000h) if used for 20
hours a day and 300 days a year in the average yearly ambient temperature of 35°C.
Note: For part replacement, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.
(1) Cooling fan
The cooling fan cools heat-generating parts such as the main circuit semiconductor
devices. The life of the cooling fan bearing is usually 10,000 to 35,000 hours. Hence,
the cooling fan must be changed every 2 to 3 years if the inverter is run continuously.
When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed during inspection, the cooling fan must
be replaced immediately. When you need to change the cooling fan, contact the nearest
Mitsubishi FA Center.
Inverter Model No.
FR-E520-0.75K
Fan Type
MMF-04C24DS BKO-CA1382H01
FR-E520-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
FR-E520S-0.75K
MMF-06D24DS BKO-C2461H07
FR-E520-5.5K, 7.5K
MMF-06D24ES BKO-CA1027H08
FR-E540-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
MMF-06D24ES-FC4 BKO-CA1027H09
FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K
MMF-06D24ES-FC5 BKO-CA1027H10
6
219
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
z Removal
(For the FR-E520-0.75K to 3.7K, FR-E520S- 0.75K)
1) Remove the wiring cover. (Refer to page 8.)
2) Unplug the fan connector.
The cooling fan is plugged into the cooling fan
connector beside the inverter terminal block.
Unplug the connector and separate the inverter
from the cooling fan.
3) Remove the cooling fan cover.
Push the cover in the direction of arrow and pull it
down.
4) Remove the cooling fan and cooling fan cover.
The cooling fan is secured by the fixing hooks.
Disengage the fixing catches to remove the
cooling fan and cooling fan cover.
(For the FR-E520-5.5K and 7.5K)
1) Remove the cooling fan cover from the inverter.
(Push the cover in the direction of arrow A and pull
it down in the direction of B.)
Take care of connection cables of the cooling fan
and inverter.
2) Remove the cooling fan connectors.
The cooling fan is connected to the inverter with a
connector.
Slide the connector cover out of the way to remove
the connector.
3) Remove the cooling fan.
The cooling fan is secured by the fixing hooks.
Disengage the fixing hooks to remove the cooling
fan and cooling fan cover.
220
A
B
A
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
(For the FR-E540-1.5K to 7.5K)
1) Remove the front cover (Refer
to page 6).
2) Unplug the fan connector.
The cooling fan is connected to
the cooling fan connector
beside the main circuit terminal
block of the inverter.
Unplug the connector.
Fan connector
3) Remove the inverter and
cooling fan.
Push in the direction of arrow A
and pull out in the direction of
arrow B.
A
A
4) Remove the cooling fan and
cooing fan cover.
The cooling fan is secured by
the fixing hooks.
You can remove the cooling
fan and cooling fan cover by
disengaging the fixing hooks.
B
Cooling fan
Cooling fan cover
6
221
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
z Reinstallation
(For the FR-E520-0.75K to 7.5K, FR-E520S-0.75K)
1) After confirming the orientation of the fan,
reinstall the fan to the cover so that the arrow
on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces in the
opposite direction of the fan cover.
Note: If the air flow is set in the wrong
direction, the inverter life can be shorter.
2) Reinstall the fan cover to the inverter.
Run the cable through the wiring groove to
prevent it from being caught between the
chassis and cover.
3) Reconnect the cable to the connector.
4) Reinstall the wiring cover.
AIR FLOW
(For 5.5K, 7.5K)
*Wire the cables using care so that they
are not caught by the cooling fan.
222
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
(For the FR-E540-1.5K to 7.5K)
1) After confirming the orientation of
the fan, reinstall the fan to the
cover so that the arrow on the left
of "AIR FLOW" faces in the
opposite direction of the fan cover.
Note: If the air flow is set in the
wrong direction, the inverter
life can be shorter.
AIR FLOW
2) Reinstall the fan cover to the
inverter.
Run the cable through the wiring
groove to prevent it from being
caught between the chassis and
cover.
Wiring groove
3) Reconnect the cable to the
connector.
4) Reinstall the front cover.
Fan connector
(2) Smoothing capacitors
A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing the DC in the
main circuit, and an aluminum electrolytic capacitor is also used for stabilizing the
control power in the control circuit.
Their characteristics are adversely affected by ripple current, etc. When the inverter is operated
in an ordinary, air-conditioned environment, change the capacitors about every 5 years. When
5 years have elapsed, the capacitors will deteriorate more rapidly. Check the capacitors at
least every year (less than six months if the life will be expired soon). Check the following:
1) Case (side faces and bottom face for expansion)
2) Sealing plate (for remarkable warp and extreme crack)
3) Appearance, external cracks, discoloration, leakage.
When the measured capacitance of the capacitor has reduced below 80% of the
rating, replace the capacitor.
The capacitor life alarm is output to give an indication of replacement time. (Refer to
page 179.)
223
6
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
6.1.8
Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers
z Measurement of voltages and currents
Since the voltages and currents on the inverter power supply and output sides include
harmonics, accurate measurement depends on the instruments used and circuits
measured.
When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement, measure the
following circuits using the instruments given on the next page.
Three-phase 200V
power input
Three-phase 400V
power input
Output
voltage
Input
voltage
Input
current
Output
current
Single-phase 100V
power input
Single-phase 200V
power input
Inverter
Ar
Three-phase
power
W11
R (L1) U
Au
W12
S (L2) V
Av
W13
T (L3) W
Aw
Vr
As
To motor
Vv
Vs
At
W21
Vu
(Note 2) Vt
W22
Vw
P (+) N (-)
:Moving-iron type
:Electrodynamometer type
:Moving-coil type
V
+
-
:Rectifier type
Instrument types
Typical Measuring Points and Instruments
Note: 1. Use FFT (Fast Fourier Transforms) to measure the output voltage accurately.
It cannot be measured accurately with a meter or general instrument.
2. For FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.75K and FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K do not use At,
As, Vt, Vs, W12 and W13.
224
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
Measuring Points and Instruments
Item
Power supply
voltage
(V1)
Power supply side
current
(I1)
Power supply side
power
(P1)
Power supply side
power factor
(Pf1)
Output side
voltage
(V2)
Output side
current
(I2)
Output side power
(P2)
Output side power
factor (Pf2)
Measuring Point
Measuring Instrument
Across R-S (L1-L2), S-T (L2L3) and T-R (L3-L1 )
Moving-iron type AC
voltmeter
R, S and T line currents
(L1, L2 and L3 line currents)
Moving-iron type AC
ammeter
Remarks
(Reference Measured Value)
Is the commercial power supply within
permissible variation of AC voltage
(Refer to page 228)
At R (L1), S (L2) and T (L3),
Electrodynamic type
P1 = W11 + W12 + W13
and across R-S (L1-L 2), S-T
single-phase wattmeter
(3-wattmeter method)
(L2-L 3) and T-R (L3-L1 )
Calculate after measuring power supply voltage, power supply side current and power supply side
power.
[For three-phase power supply]
[For single-phase power supply]
Pf1=
P1
3V I1
Pf1=
100%
Across U-V, V-W and W-U
P1
V1 I1
(Note 1)
(Cannot be measured by
moving-iron type)
Moving-iron type AC
ammeter
(Note 2)
100%
Difference between phases is within
±1% of maximum output voltage.
Current should be equal to or less than
rated inverter current.Difference
between phases is 10% or lower.
P2 = W21 + W22
At U, V and W, and across U- Electrodynamic type
2-wattmeter method (or 3-wattmeter
V and V-W
single-phase wattmeter
method)
Calculate in similar manner to power supply side power factor.
U, V and W line currents
Pf2=
P2
100%
3V2 I2
Across P-N (+ - –)
Frequency setting
signal
Across 2 (positive)-5
Across 4 (positive)-5
Inverter LED display is lit. 1.35 × V1
Maximum 380V (760V) during
regenerative operation
0 to 5V/0 to 10VDC
4 to 20mADC
Frequency setting
power supply
Across 10 (positive)-5
5VDC
Moving-coil type
(such as tester)
"5" is
common.
Converter output
Frequency meter
signal
Moving-coil type
(Meter, etc. may be used)
(Internal resistance:
50Ω or larger)
Across FM (positive)-SD
T1
8VDC
T2
Pulse width T1:
Adjusted with Pr. 900
Pulse cycle T2:
Set with Pr. 55
(Valid for frequency monitoring
only)
SD is common.
Approximately 5VDC at
maximum frequency (without
frequency meter)
Across STF, STR, RH, RM,
RL, MRS, RES-SD
Across RES (positive)-SD
Across MRS (positive)-SD
Moving-coil type
(Meter, etc. may be used)
(Internal resistance:
50kΩ or larger)
20 to 30VDC when open.ON
voltage: 1V or less
Alarm signal
Across A-C
Across B-C
Moving-coil type
(such as a meter)
Continuity check
<Normal>
<Fault>
Across A-C: Discontinuity Continuity
Across B-C: Continuity
Discontinuity
Note:
SD is
common.
Start signal
Select signal
Reset
Output stop
1. Use FFT to measure the output voltage accurately. It can not be measured accurately with a meter
or general instrumentation.
2. If the carrier frequency exceeds 5kHz, do not use this instrument since using it may increase eddycurrent loss produced in metal parts inside the instrument, leading to burnout.
In this case, use an approximate effective value type instrument.
*The value within the parentheses is for the 400V class.
225
6
MEMO
226
CHAPTER 7
SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter explains the "protective functions" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
Chapter 1
7.1 Standard Specifications ........................... 228
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
227
SPECIFICATIONS
7.1
7.1.1
Standard Specifications
Model specifications
(1) Three-phase 200V power supply
Power supply
Output
Type FR-E520K(C)
(Note 8)
Applicable motor capacity
(kW)
(Note 1)
Rated capacity (kVA)
(Note 2)
Rated current (A)
(Note 6)
Overload capacity
(Note 3)
Voltage
(Note 4)
Rated input AC (DC)
voltage, frequency
Permissible AC (DC)
voltage fluctuation
Permissible frequency
fluctuation
Power supply system
capacity (kVA)(Note 5)
Protective structure
(JEM1030)
Cooling system
Approximate weight (kg)
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
7.5
0.3
0.6
1.2
2.0
3.2
4.4
7.0
9.5
13.1
0.8
(0.8)
1.5
(1.4)
3
(2.5)
5
8
11
17.5
24
(4.1)
(7)
(10) (16.5) (23)
150% 60s 200% 0.5s
(inverse-time characteristics)
Three phase, 200V to 240V
Three phase, 200V to 240V 50Hz/60Hz
(280VDC, Note 7)
170 to 264V 50Hz/60Hz
(252 to 310VDC, Note 7)
33
(31)
0.4
0.8
±5%
1.5
2.5
4.5
5.5
9
12
17
Enclosed type (IP20), IP40 for totally enclosed structure series
0.6
Self-cooling
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.7
Forced air cooling
1.7
2.2
4.4
4.9
Note:1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable
when a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used.
2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230V.
3. The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload
current to the inverter's rated current. For repeated duty, allow time for the
inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
4. The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The
maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged
at about
that of the power supply.
5. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side
inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables).
6. The rated output current in the parentheses applies when low acoustic noise
operation is to be performed at the ambient temperature higher than
40°C(30°C for the totally enclosed structure) with the Pr. 72 (PWM frequency
selection) value set to 2kHz or higher.
7. When using a DC power supply
(1) The guideline for the power supply voltage fluctuation range is 280VDC
±10%, and usually use the power supply at or below 300VDC.
(2) When DC power is switched on, a larger inrush current flows than in AC
power. The number of power-on times should be minimized.
(3) 300VDC must be reserved to make the torque characteristic equal to
when AC power supply is used.
8. The type code of the dirt-protection structure series ends with C.
228
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) Three-phase 400V power supply
Power supply
Output
Type FR-E540K (C) (Note 7)
Applicable motor capacity (kW)
(Note 1)
Rated capacity (kVA) (Note 2)
Rated current (A)
(Note 6)
Overload capacity
(Note 3)
Voltage
(Note 4)
Rated input AC voltage,
frequency
Permissible AC voltage
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
fluctuation
Power supply system capacity
(kVA)
(Note 5)
Protective structure (JEM1030)
Cooling system
Approximate weight (kg)
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
1.2
1.6
(1.4)
2.0
2.6
(2.2)
3.0
4.6
7.2
9.1
4.0
6.0
9.5
12
(3.8)
(5.4)
(8.7)
150% 60s 200% 0.5s
(inverse-time characteristics)
Three phase, 380V to 480V
7.5
7.5
13.0
17
Three phase, 380V to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
325V to 528V 50Hz/60Hz
±5%
1.5
2.5
4.5
5.5
9.5
12
17
Enclosed type (IP20), IP40 for totally enclosed structure
series
Self-cooling
Forced air cooling
1.9
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.1
3.8
3.8
Note:1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable
when a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used.
2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440V.
3. The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload
current to the inverter's rated current. For repeated duty, allow time for the
inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
4. The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The
maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged
at about
that of the power supply.
5. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side
inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables).
6. The rated output current in the parentheses applies when low acoustic noise
operation is to be performed at the ambient temperature higher than 40°C
(104°F) (30°C for the totally enclosed structure) with the Pr. 72 (PWM
frequency selection) value set to 2kHz or higher.
7. The type code of the dirt-protection structure series ends with C.
7
229
SPECIFICATIONS
(3) Single-phase 200V power supply
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
0.3
0.6
1.2
2.0
0.8
1.5
3.0
5.0
(0.8)
(1.4)
(2.5)
(4.1)
150% 60s 200% 0.5s (inverse-time characteristics)
Three phase, 200V to 240V
Single phase, 200V to 240V 50Hz/60Hz
Power supply
Output
Type FR-E520SK
Applicable motor capacity (kW)
(Note 1)
Rated capacity (kVA) (Note 2)
Rated output current (A)
(Note 6)
Overload capacity
(Note 3)
Voltage
(Note 4)
Rated input AC voltage,
frequency
Permissible AC voltage
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
fluctuation
Power supply capacity (kVA)
(Note 5)
Protective structure (JEM1030)
Single phase, 170 to 264V 50Hz/60Hz
Within ±5%
0.5
Cooling system
Approximate weight (kg)
0.9
1.5
2.5
Enclosed type (IP20)
Self-cooling
0.6
0.6
1.0
Forced air
cooling
1.7
Note:1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable
when a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used.
Normally, the rated current (at 50Hz) of the motor applied should not exceed
the rated current.
2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230V.
3. The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload
current to the inverter's rated current. For repeated duty, allow time for the
inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
4. The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The
maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged
at about
that of the power supply.
5. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side
inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables). Prepare
the power supply capacity which is not less than the indicated.
6. The rated output current in the parentheses applies when low acoustic noise
operation is to be performed at the ambient temperature higher than 40°C with
the Pr. 72 (PWM frequency selection) value set to 2kHz or higher.
230
SPECIFICATIONS
(4) Single-phase 100V power supply
Power supply
Output
Type FR-E510WK
Applicable motor capacity (kW)
(Note 1)
Rated capacity (kVA) (Note 2)
Rated output current (A)
(Note 7)
Overload capacity
(Note 3)
Voltage
(Note 4)
Rated input AC voltage,
frequency
Permissible AC voltage
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
fluctuation
Power supply capacity (kVA)
(Note 5)
Protective structure (JEM1030)
Cooling system
Approximate weight (kg)
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
0.3
0.6
1.2
2
0.8
1.5
3.0
5.0
(0.8)
(1.4)
(2.5)
(4.1)
150% 60s 200% 0.5s (inverse-time characteristics)
Three phase, 200V to 230V (Note 4, 8)
Single phase, 100V to 115V 50Hz/60Hz
Single phase, 90 to 132V 50Hz/60Hz
Within ±5%
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.5
Enclosed type (IP20)
Self-cooling
0.6
1.0
2.5
1.7
Note:1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable
when the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used.
Normally, the rated current (at 50Hz) of the motor applied should not exceed
the rated current.
2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230V.
3. The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload
current to the inverter's rated current. For repeated duty, allow time for the
inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
4. For single-phase 100V power input, the output voltage provided cannot be
twice or more than the power supply voltage. The pulse voltage value of the
inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about
that of the power
supply.
5. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side
inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables). Prepare
the power supply capacity which is not less than the indicated.
6. Load applied to the motor will reduce the output voltage about 10 to 15%.
When using a general-purpose motor, it must be used under reduced load.
7. The rated output current in the parentheses applies when low acoustic noise
operation is to be performed at the ambient temperature higher than 40°C with
the Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" value set to not less than 2kHz.
8. For single-phase 100V power input, the application of motor load reduces the
output voltage about 10 to 15%. Therefore, the load must be reduced when a
general-purpose motor is used.
7
231
SPECIFICATIONS
7.1.2
Common specifications
Selectable between Soft-PWM control and high carrier frequency
PWM control, V/F control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector
control are selectable.
Output frequency range
0.2 to 400Hz (starting frequency variable between 0 and 60Hz)
Across terminals 2-5: 1/500 of maximum set frequency (5VDC input),
1/1000 (10VDC, 4-20mADC input), 1/256 (when operation panel
Analog input potentiometer is used)
Frequency
setting
Frequency setting potentiometer: 1/256 of maximum set frequency
resolution
0.01Hz (less than 100Hz), 0.1Hz (100Hz or more) when digital setting
Digital input
is made using the operation panel
Analog input Within ±0.5% of maximum output frequency (25°C ±10°C)
Frequency
Within 0.01% of set output frequency when setting is made from
accuracy
Digital input
operation panel.
Base frequency set as required between 0 and 400Hz. Constant
Voltage/frequency characteristic
torque or variable torque pattern can be selected.
150% or more (at 1Hz), 200% or more (at 3Hz) when general-purpose
Starting torque
magnetic flux vector control or slip compensation is selected
Torque boost
Manual torque boost, 0 to 30% may be set.
Acceleration/deceleration time
0.01, 0.1 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually),
setting
linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode can be selected.
Regenerative 0.1K, 0.2K ... 150%, 0.4K, 0.75K ... 100%,
(Note 3)
1.5K ... 50%, 2.2K, 3.7K, 5.5K, 7.5K ... 20%
Braking torque
DC injection
Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation
brake
voltage (0 to 30%) variable
Current stall prevention
Operation current level can be set (0 to 200% variable), presence or
operation level
absence can be selected.
Voltage stall prevention
Operation level is fixed, presence or absence can be selected.
operation level
Fast-response current limit level Operation level is fixed, presence or absence can be selected.
Frequency Analog input 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC, 4 to 20mADC, built-in frequency setting
potentiometer.
setting
signal
Digital input
Entered from operation panel.
Forward rotation and reverse rotation, start signal self-holding input
(3-wire input) selectable.
Used to reset alarm output provided when protective function is
Alarm reset
activated.
Up to 15 speeds can be selected. (Each speed can be
Multi-speed selection
set between 0 and 400Hz, running speed can be
changed during operation from the operation panel.)
Used to select second functions (acceleration time,
Second function selection
deceleration time, torque boost, base frequency,
electronic overcurrent protection).
Instantaneous shut-off of inverter output (frequency, Use
Output stop
voltage).
Pr. 180 to
Used to select input of frequency setting signal 4 to Pr. 183 for
Current input selection
20mADC (terminal 4).
selection.
Thermal relay contact input for use when the inverter is
External thermal relay input
stopped by the external thermal relay.
PU operation-external
Used to switch between PU operation and external
operation switchover
operation from outside the inverter.
V/F-general-purpose
Used to switch between V/F control and general-purpose
magnetic flux switching
magnetic flux vector control from outside the inverter.
Start signal
Input signals
Control specifications
Control system
232
Display
Operation functions
Output signals
Control specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating status
For meter
Operation panel
display
Operating
status
Alarm
definition
LED display
Environment
Protective/alarm functions
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Storage temperature (Note 2)
Ambience
Altitude, vibration
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation,
external thermal relay input selection, automatic restart operation after
instantaneous power failure, forward/reverse rotation prevention, slip
compensation, operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function,
PID control, computer link operation (RS-485)
2 open collector output signals can be selected from inverter running,
up to frequency, frequency detection, overload alarm, zero current
detection, output current detection, PID upper limit, PID lower limit, PID
forward/reverse rotation, operation ready, capacitor life alarm, current
average value monitor, minor fault and alarm, and 1 contact output
(230VAC 0.3A, 30VDC 0.3A) can be selected.
1 signal can be selected from output frequency, output current and
output voltage. Pulse train output (1440 pulses/s/full scale).
Output voltage, output current, set frequency, running.
Alarm definition is displayed when protective function is activated. 4
alarm definitions are stored.
Power application (POWER), Alarm (ALARM)
Overcurrent shut-off (during acceleration, deceleration, constant
speed), regenerative overvoltage shut-off, undervoltage (Note 1),
instantaneous power failure (Note 1), overload shut-off (electronic
overcurrent protection), brake transistor alarm, output short circuit, stall
prevention, brake resistor overheat protection, heatsink overheat, fan
failure (Note 4), parameter error, PU disconnection, output phase loss
protection, earth (ground) fault overcurrent protection (400V class),
starting-time earth (ground) fault overcurrent protection (other than
400V class), option alarm (400V class), 24VDC power supply short
circuit (400V class).
-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
(-10°C to +40°C for totally-enclosed structure feature)
90%RH or less (non-condensing)
-20°C to +65°C
Indoors (no corrosive and flammable gases, oil mist, dust and dirt.)
Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation.
Note: 1. When undervoltage or instantaneous power failure has occurred, alarm
display or alarm output is not provided but the inverter itself is protected.
Overcurrent, regenerative overvoltage or other protection may be activated
at power restoration according to the operating status (load size, etc.)
2. Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc.
3. The braking torque indicated is a short-duration average torque (which
varies with motor loss) when the motor alone is decelerated from 60Hz in
the shortest time and is not a continuous regenerative torque. When the
motor is decelerated from the frequency higher than the base frequency, the
average deceleration torque will reduce. Since the inverter does not contain
a brake resistor, use the optional brake resistor when regenerative energy is
large. (The optional brake resistor cannot be used with 0.1K and 0.2K.) A
brake unit (BU) may also be used.
4. Not provided for the FR-E540-0.4K, 0.75K, FR-E520(S)-0.1K to 0.4K and
FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K which are not equipped with a cooling fan.
7
233
SPECIFICATIONS
7.1.3
Outline dimension drawings
(1) 200V class, 100V class
z FR-E520-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K, 0.75K
z FR-E520S-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K
z FR-E510W-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K
Frequency setting potentiometer
knob is removable.
5
φ5 hole
STOP
RESET
MAX
5
6
56
68
4
5
118
MIN
128
RUN
11
6
D2
D
7
D1
Inverter Type
FR-E520-0.1K
FR-E520-0.2K
FR-E520-0.4K
FR-E520-0.75K
FR-E520S-0.1K
FR-E520S-0.2K
FR-E520S-0.4K
FR-E510W-0.1K
FR-E510W-0.2K
FR-E510W-0.4K
Wiring holes
D
76
76
108
128
76
76
138
76
106
138
D1
10
10
42
62
10
10
42
10
10
42
D2
55
55
55
55
55
55
85
55
85
85
Note: FR-E520-0.75K is provided with
cooling fan.
(Unit: mm)
234
SPECIFICATIONS
z FR-E520-1.5K, 2.2K
z FR-E520S-0.75K
z FR-E510W-0.75K
5
Frequency setting potentiometer
knob is removable.
2-φ5 hole
STOP
RESET
MAX
5
29
6
68
96
108
5
118
MIN
128
RUN
11
11
6
7
D2
D1
D3
D
Wiring holes
Inverter Type
FR-E520-1.5K, 2.2K
FR-E520S-0.75K
FR-E510W-0.75K
Cooling fan
D
131
131
155
D1
65
65
59
D2
55
55
85
D3
8
8
5
Note: FR-E510W-0.75K is not equipped with a
cooling fan.
(Unit: mm)
7
235
SPECIFICATIONS
z FR-E520-3.7K
5
2-φ5 hole
RUN
Frequency setting potentiometer
knob is removable.
STOP
RESET
MAX
118
128
MIN
6
68
114.5
158
170
5
5
5
82.5
55.5
11
19.5
7
55
72
138
6
Wiring holes
Cooling fan
(Unit: mm)
236
SPECIFICATIONS
z FR-E520-5.5K, 7.5K
Frequency setting potentiometer
Knob is removable.
8
2-φ6 hole
ST OP
RESET
MAX
8
244
MIN
6 96
8
260
RUN
68
164
180
16
8
11
7
10
112.5
170
57.5
Wiring holes
Cooling fan
(Unit: mm)
7
237
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) 400V class
zFR-E540-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
RUN
6
2-φ5 hole
STOP
RESET
MAX
138
150
MIN
128
140
11
6
5
6
7
6
Inverter Type
FR-E540-0.4K, 0.75K
FR-E540-1.5K to 3.7K
Cooling fan
61
D1
D
D
116
136
D1
44
64
Note: There is no cooling fan in the FRE540-0.4K and 0.75K
(Unit: mm)
238
SPECIFICATIONS
z FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K
RUN
6
2-φ5 hole
STOP
RESET
MAX
138
150
MIN
208
220
11
6
5
6
6
7
64
73
148
Cooling fan
(Unit: mm)
7
239
MEMO
240
APPENDIX
This chapter provides "supplementary information" for use of this
product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
APPENDIX 1 Instruction Code List................. 242
APPENDIX 2 When using the communication
option. (400V class only) .......... 246
241
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 1
Second
functions
Output
terminal
functions
Standard operation functions
Basic functions
Function
Parameter
Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
Instruction Code List
Instruction
Code
Name
Torque boost
Maximum frequency
Minimum frequency
Base frequency
Multi-speed setting (high speed)
Multi-speed setting (middle speed)
Multi-speed setting (low speed)
Acceleration time
Deceleration time
Electronic thermal O/L relay
DC injection brake operation frequency
DC injection brake operation time
DC injection brake voltage
Starting frequency
Load pattern selection
Jog frequency
Jog acceleration/deceleration time
High-speed maximum frequency
Base frequency voltage
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency
Acceleration/deceleration time increments
Stall prevention operation level
Stall prevention operation level compensation factor
at double speed
Multi-speed setting (speed 4)
Multi-speed setting (speed 5)
Multi-speed setting (speed 6)
Multi-speed setting (speed 7)
Acceleration/deceleration pattern
Regenerative function selection
Frequency jump 1A
Frequency jump 1B
Frequency jump 2A
Frequency jump 2B
Frequency jump 3A
Frequency jump 3B
Speed display
Frequency at 5V (10V) input
Frequency at 20mA input
Up-to-frequency sensitivity
Output frequency detection
Read
Write
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
12
13
14
15
16
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
92
93
94
95
96
Link Parameter
Extension Setting
(Instruction Code
7F/FF)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
17
97
0
18
19
1A
1B
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
2A
98
99
9A
9B
9D
9E
9F
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A9
AA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
43
Output frequency detection for reverse rotation
2B
AB
0
44
45
46
47
48
Second acceleration/deceleration time
Second deceleration time
Second torque boost
Second V/F (base frequency)
Second electronic thermal O/L relay
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
AC
AD
AE
AF
BO
0
0
0
0
0
242
Read
Write
Display
functions
52
54
55
56
Operation panel/PU main display data selection
FM terminal function selection
Frequency monitoring reference
Current monitoring reference
34
36
37
38
B4
B6
B7
B8
Link Parameter
Extension Setting
(Instruction Code
7F/FF)
0
0
0
0
Automatic
restart
functions
APPENDIX
57
Restart coasting time
39
B9
0
58
Restart cushion time
3A
BA
0
59
Remote setting function selection
3B
BB
0
60
61
62
63
65
Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode
Reference current
Reference current for acceleration
Reference current for deceleration
Retry selection
Stall prevention operation level reduction starting
frequency
Number of retries at alarm occurrence
Retry waiting time
Retry count display erasure
Special regenerative brake duty
Applied motor
PWM frequency selection
0-5V/0-10V selection
Filter time constant
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop
selection
Parameter write disable selection
Reverse rotation prevention selection
Operation mode selection
Motor capacity
Motor excitation current
Rated motor voltage
Rated motor frequency
Motor constant (R1)
Auto-tuning setting/status
Communication station number
Communication speed
Stop bit length
Parity check presence/absence
Number of communication retries
Communication check time interval
Waiting time setting
CR/LF selection
3C
3D
3E
3F
41
BC
BD
BE
BF
C1
0
0
0
0
0
Parameter
Number
Operation selection functions
Additional
function
Function
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
Communication
functions
General-purpose
magnetic flux
vector control
75
77
78
79
80
82
83
84
90
96
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
Instruction
Code
Name
243
42
C2
0
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4B
CB
0
4D
4E
4F
50
52
53
54
5A
60
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
CD
CE
CF
D0
D2
D3
D4
DA
E0
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Parameter
Number
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
Sub functions
Multi-speed operation
Terminal
assignment functions
User
functions
Initial Additional
Sub
monitor function function
Current
detection
Additional
function
Function
PID control
APPENDIX
Instruction
Code
Name
Link Parameter
Extension Setting
(Instruction Code
7F/FF)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read
Write
PID action selection
PID proportional band
PID integral time
Upper limit
Lower limit
PID action set point for PU operation
PID differential time
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
9C
9D
9E
9F
A0
A1
A2
145
PU display language selection
2D
AD
1
146
Frequency setting command selection
2E
AE
1
150
151
152
153
Output current detection level
Output current detection period
Zero current detection level
Zero current detection period
32
33
34
35
B2
B3
B4
B5
1
1
1
1
156
Stall prevention operation selection
38
B8
1
160
User group read selection
00
80
2
170
Watt-hour meter clear
0A
8A
2
171
Actual operation hour meter clear
0B
8B
2
173
174
175
176
180
181
182
183
190
191
User group 1 registration
User group 1 deletion
User group 2 registration
User group 2 deletion
RL terminal function selection
RM terminal function selection
RH terminal function selection
MRS terminal function selection
RUN terminal function selection
FU terminal function selection
0D
0E
0F
10
14
15
16
17
1E
1F
8D
8E
8F
90
94
95
96
97
9E
9F
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
192
A, B, C terminal function selection
20
A0
2
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
244
245
246
247
249
Multi-speed setting (speed 8)
Multi-speed setting (speed 9)
Multi-speed setting (speed 10)
Multi-speed setting (speed 11)
Multi-speed setting (speed 12)
Multi-speed setting (speed 13)
Multi-speed setting (speed 14)
Multi-speed setting (speed 15)
Soft-PWM setting
Cooling fan operation selection
Rated motor slip
Slip compensation response time
Constant-output region slip compensation selection
Earth (ground) fault detection at start
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
34
35
36
37
39
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B4
B5
B6
B7
B9
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
244
APPENDIX
Calibration
functions
Current
Additional
average
Function
value monitor
LONWORKS®
functions
DeviceNetTM
functions
Computer
link
function
Stop
Aditional
selection
function
function
Function
Parameter
Number
250
Instruction
Code
Name
Read
Write
Stop selection
3A
BA
Link Parameter
Extension Setting
(Instruction Code
7F/FF)
2
251
Output phase loss protection selection
3B
BB
2
338*
339*
340*
Operation command source
Speed command source
Link startup mode selection
26
27
28
A6
A7
A8
3
3
3
342
E2PROM write selection
DeviceNet address startup data (lower byte)
DeviceNet baudrate startup data (lower byte)
DeviceNet address startup data (higher byte)
2A
AA
3
345*
346*
347*
2D
2E
2F
AD
AE
AF
3
3
3
348*
DeviceNet baudrate startup data (higher byte)
30
B0
3
387*
388*
389*
390*
391*
392*
500*
501*
Initial communication delay time
Send time interval at hart beat
Minimum sending time at hart beat
% setting reference frequency
Receive time interval at hart beat
Event driven detection width
Communication error recognition waiting time
Communication error occurrence count display
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
00
01
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
80
81
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
502*
Stop mode selection at communication error
02
82
5
555
Current average time
37
B7
5
556
Data output mask time
38
B8
5
557
Current average value monitor signal output
reference current
39
B9
5
900
901
902
903
904
905
922
923
990
991
FM terminal calibration
AM terminal calibration
Frequency setting voltage bias
Frequency setting voltage gain
Frequency setting current bias
Frequency setting current gain
Built-in frequency setting potentiometer bias
Built-in frequency setting potentiometer gain
PU buzzer control
PU contrast adjustment
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
16
17
5A
5B
DC
DD
DE
DF
E0
E1
96
97
DA
DB
1
1
1
1
1
1
9
9
9
9
*For only the 400V class fitted with the communication option.
DeviceNetTM is a registered trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association,
Inc.).
LONWORKS® is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation in the U.S.A. and other
countries.
245
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 2
When using the communication
option. (400V class only)
Operation at Communication Error Occurrence
The extended functions for E.OPT error and E. 3 error have been added to this
instruction manual. (Pr. 500 to Pr. 502)
(1) Pr. 500 "communication error execution waiting time"
You can set the waiting time from occurrence of a communication line fault to
communication error indication "E.OPT".
Parameter
Number
500
Minimum Setting
Increment
0.1 s
Setting Range
0 to 999.8 s
Communication line status
Normal
Factory Setting
0
Abnormal
Communication error "E.OPT"
Indication output
Time set in Pr. 500
If a communication line fault still persists after the time set in Pr. 500 has elapsed, it is
recognized as a communication error and the communication error indication "E.OPT" is output.
If communication is restored to normal during the set time, operation is continued
without a communication error indication.
(2) Pr. 501 "communication error occurrence count indication"
You can display the cumulative number of communication line faults that occurred.
Write "0" to Pr. 501 to clear the communication error occurrence count.
Parameter
Number
501
Minimum Setting
Increment
1
Setting Range
0
Factory Setting
0
Count timing according to
communication line status
Normal
Abnormal
1 count
Normal
Abnormal
1 count
At the time when a communication line fault occurs, one count is made in Pr. 501
"communication error occurrence count indication".
Note: The communication error occurrence count indication is temporarily stored in RAM.
As it is reflected to E2PROM per hour only, performing power-on reset or inverter
reset causes the last value stored in E2PROM to display as the value of Pr. 501.
246
APPENDIX
(3) Pr. 502 "stop mode selection at communication error"
You can select inverter operation to be performed in the occurrence of a communication
line fault or an option error.
Parameter
Number
Setting Range
Minimum Setting
Increment
Factory Setting
502
0, 1, 2
1
0
(About the settings)
Communication line
Fault
Error Recognition after Elapse
At Occurrence of Fault
At Resolution of Fault
of Pr. 500 Time
Pr. 502
Setting Operating
IndiAlarm Operating
IndiAlarm Operating
IndiAlarm
status
cation
output
status
cation
output
status
cation
output
Not
Coasting
E.OPT
0
Continued
No
E.OPT lit Provided Stop held
Provided
provided
to stop
kept lit
DeceleE.OPT lit Provided
E.OPT
Not
ration to
Stop held
Provided
1
Continued
No
after stop after stop
kept lit
provided
stop
DeceleNot
E.OPT lit
Not
E.OPT
Not
2
Continued
No
ration to
Restart
provided
after stop provided
kept lit
provided
stop
Option error
0
1
2
Coasting
E.3 lit
Provided
to stop
DeceleE.3 lit after Provided
ration to
stop
after stop
stop
DeceleE.3 lit after Provided
ration to
stop
after stop
stop
Coasting
E.3 lit
Provided
to stop
DeceleE.3 lit after Provided
ration to
stop
after stop
stop
DeceleE.3 lit after Provided
ration to
stop
after stop
stop
Stop held E.3 kept lit Provided
Stop held E.3 kept lit Provided
Stop held E.3 kept lit Provided
Note: 1. A communication error [E.OPT (fault data: A0H)] is a fault on the
communication line, and a communication error [E. 3 (fault data: F3H)] is a
communication error inside the inverter.
2. The alarm output is the ABC contact output or alarm bit output.
3. If the Pr. 502 setting is 1 or 2, the deceleration time is the ordinary
deceleration time setting (Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45).
4. The acceleration time at restart is the ordinary acceleration time setting (Pr.
7, Pr. 44).
5. If the Pr. 502 setting is 2, the operation command/speed command at restart
follows the command before occurrence of a fault.
6. For the setting of alarm output, the fault definition is stored in the alarm
history.(Write to the alarm history is performed when the alarm output is
provided.)If the alarm output is not provided, the fault definition overwrites
the alarm indication of the alarm history temporarily but is not stored.After
the fault is cleared, the alarm indication is reset and returns to the ordinary
monitor and the alarm history returns to the original alarm history.
7. When a communication line fault, which occurred at the Pr. 502 setting of 2,
is cleared during deceleration, acceleration restarts at that point.
(Acceleration does not restart at occurrence of a Option fault.)
247
APPENDIX
Switching mode between the PU operation mode and network operation
mode (when used with a communication option)
You can switch operation between the PU operation and network operation from the operation
panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04) during starting up in the network operation mode.
Pr. 340
Setting
Pr. 79
0
10
Mode at Power On or at Restoration
from Instantaneous Power Failure
Operation Mode
PU or network
operation
Inverter operates in the network operation mode.
Operation mode can be switched between the PU
operation and the network operation.
1
PU operation
Inverter operates in the PU operation mode.
2
Network operation
Inverter operates in the network operation mode.
3
External/PU combined
operation
Input running frequency from the PU and the start
signal from outside.
4
External/PU combined
operation
Input running frequency from outside and the start
signal from the PU.
6
Switch-over
Inverter operates in the network operation mode.
Operation mode can be switched between the PU
operation and the network operation.
7*
PU operation interlock
MRS signal ON..... Inverter operates in the
external operation mode.
(Operation mode can be
switched to the PU operation
mode by the parameter unit.)
MRS signal OFF... Inverter operates in the
external operation mode.
8*
X16 signal ON ...... Inverter operates in the
Operation mode switchexternal operation mode.
over by the external
X16 signal OFF .... Inverter operates in the PU
signal
operation mode.
The above parameters can be changed during a stop in any operation mode.
* When Pr. 79 = "7 or 8", the inverter operates in the same manner as when Pr. 340 =
"0". (The inverter will not operate in the network operation mode at powering on.)
248
APPENDIX
When Pr. 340="10" and Pr. 79="0 or 6", operation can be switched between the PU
operation and network operation from the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04).
• Operation panel
Shifts to the PU operation mode when
is displayed on the operation
mode switching menu and shifts to the network operation when
is
displayed.
• FR-PU04
Shifts to the PU operation mode when
mode when
is displayed and to the network operation
is displayed.
REMARKS
1. Change of the Pr. 340 setting is made valid when powering on or resetting
the inverter.
2. When copying parameters to the inverter which is not available with Pr.
340="10", the inverter operates in the same manner as when Pr. 340 ="0".
For Pr. 340="0, 1", refer to the instruction manual of each communication
option.
249
MEMO
250
For Maximum Safety
• Mitsubishi general-purpose inverters are not designed or manufactured to be
used in equipment or systems in situations that can affect or endanger
human life.
• When considering this product for operation in special applications such as
machinery or systems used in passenger transportation, medical, aerospace,
atomic power, electric power, or submarine repeating applications, please
contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
• Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality
control, you are strongly advised to install safety devices to prevent serious
accidents when it is used in facilities where breakdowns of the product are
likely to cause a serious accident.
• Please do not use this product for loads other than three-phase induction
motors.
251
REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date
*Manual Number
Nov., 1997
Jun., 1998
IB(NA)-66813-A
IB(NA)-66813-B
Revision
First edition
Additions
•
•
•
•
•
Single-phase 200V power input specifications
Response to Standard-compliant models
FR-E520-5.5K, 7.5K
Pr. 146 "frequency setting command selection"
Pr. 249 "earth (ground) fault detection at start"
Modifications
• Corrections to clerical errors
• Factory setting of Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Jul., 1999
IB(NA)-66813-C
Additions
• Three-phase 400V power input specifications
• Single-phase 100V power input specifications
Modifications
• Control circuit terminal screw tightening torque
Nov., 2000
IB(NA)-66813-D
Additions
• Pr. 251 "output phase failure protection selection"
• Pr. 342 "E2PROM write selection" (400V class only)
Modifications
• Alarm indications (E. 6, E. 7)
• Instructions for compliance with U.S. and Canadian
Electrical Codes
Jul., 2001
IB(NA)-66813-E
Modifications
• Pr. 342 "E2PROM write selection"
• Alarm indications (E. 3)
Jul., 2003
IB(NA)-66813-F
Additions
• Pr. 503 "capacitor life timer"
• Pr. 504 "capacitor life alarm output set time
Modifications
• The setting range of Pr.240 "Soft-PWM setting"
• The setting range of Pr.340 "link start up mode
selection"
Apr., 2004
IB(NA)-66813-G
Additions
• Control logic change function for the 100V/200V class
Jun., 2007
IB(NA)-66813-H
Additions
• Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557)
• Setting value "93" of Pr. 190 and Pr. 191
252